C 20 Dmnge 06-08-21 - 556.

GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND

TRAINING
Andhra Pradesh :: AMARAVATI
Globally Competitive
CURRICULUM (C-20)
For Polytechnic Diploma Courses
in Andhra Pradesh
3 YEAR (REGULAR)
DIPLOMA IN
MINING ENGINEERING
1
CURRICULUM -2020
(C-20)
3 YEAR (REGULAR)
DIPLOMA IN MINING ENGINEERING
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

Andhra Pradesh :: AMARAVATI
2
CURRICULUM -2020
( C-20 )
FOR DIPLOMA COURSES IN ANDHRA PRADESH CURRICULUM- C 20
PREAMBLE
The proposed programme intends to develop a skilled technician to support the industries both nationally
or globally. It also helps to kindle the spirit of entrepreneurship with necessary skills and theoretical inputs
aligning with the State Board of Technical Education and Training, (SBTET) AP, has been offering Diploma
programmes to meet the above said National policy of ‘Make in India’. The programme also provides for
accomplishing higher education goals for those who wish to enrich their theoretical concepts further.
Aspirations of the stake holders: industries, students, academia, parents and the society at large. As such, it
has been the practice of SBTET, A.P., to keep the curriculum abreast with the advances in technology
through systematic and scientific analysis of current curriculum and bring out an updated revised version at
regular intervals. Accordingly the SBTET, AP under the aegis of the Department of Technical Education,
Andhra Pradesh in it’s 57th Board Meeting held on 05-02-2019 (vide item no: 18) resolved to update the
Polytechnic Curriculum C-16 with the guidance of National Institute of Technical Teachers Training &
Research (NITTTR), Extension Centre, Vijayawada (ECV), to be implemented with effect from the academic
year ‘20-21.
Analysis of Curriculum C-16 (SWOT analysis) started in the month of June-2019. Feedback was collected from
all stake holders: Students, Lecturers, Senior Lecturers, Head of Sections and Principals for all programmes
for this purpose. A series of workshops with subject experts followed in the subsequent weeks and the draft
curricula were prepared for every programme. Finally, an interactive session with representatives from
industries, academia and subject experts was held on 04.01.2020 for thorough perusal and critique of draft
curricula; and the suggestions received thus received from Industrialists and academia have been recorded ,
validated by another set of experienced subject teachers from the Department of Technical education for
incorporation into the Curriculum C-20.
The design of new Curricula for the different diploma programmes has thus been finalised with the active
participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the Polytechnics of Andhra Pradesh, and duly
reviewed by Expert Committee constituted of academicians and representatives from industries. Thus, the
primary objective of the curriculum change is to produce employable technicians in the country by
correlating the growing needs of the industries with relevant academic input.
The outcome based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed throughout the design of this
curriculum is designed to meet the requirements of NBA Accreditation, too.
The revised New Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2020 (C-20) is approved by BoG of SBTET for its implementation
with effect from 2020-21.
3
Highlights of Curriculum C-20:
1. Duration of course for regular Diploma and for sandwich Diploma is 3 years and 3½ years
respectively.
2. The Curriculum is prepared in Semester Pattern. However, First Year is maintained as Year-wise
pattern.
3. 6 Months Industrial training has been introduced for 3 years Diploma Courses and 1 year Industrial
Training is introduced for 3 ½ years Sandwich Diploma courses.
4. Updated subjects relevant to the industry are introduced in all the Diploma courses.
5. CISCO course content has been incorporated into the ECE and CME programmes for certification from
CISCO in lieu of industrial training when students are unable to get Industrial Training placement in
any industry.
6. The policy decisions taken at the State and 1Central level with regard to environmental science are
implemented by including relevant topics in Chemistry. This is also in accordance with the Supreme
Court guidelines issued in Sri Mehta’s case.
7. Keeping in view the increased need of communication skills which is playing a major role in the
success of Diploma Level students in the Industries, emphasis is given for learning and acquiring
listening, speaking, reading and writing skills in English. Further as emphasized in the meetings,
Communication Skills lab and Life Skills lab are continuing for all the branches.
8. CAD specific to the branch has been given emphasis in the curriculum. Preparing drawings using CAD
software has been given more importance.
9. Upon reviewing the existing C-16 curriculum, it is found that the theory content is found to have
more weightage than the Practical content. In C-20 curriculum, more emphasis is given to the
practical content in Laboratories and Workshops, thus strengthening the practical skills.
10. With increased emphasis for the student to acquire Practical skills, the course content in all the
subjects is thoroughly reviewed and structured as outcome based than the conventional procedure
based.
11. Curricula of Laboratory and Workshops have been thoroughly revised based on the suggestions
received from the industry and faculty, for better utilization of the equipment available in the
Polytechnics. The experiments /exercises that are chosen for the practical sessions are identified to
confirm to the field requirements of industry.
12. An exclusive section for assessing Higher order Thinking skills (HOTS) has been introduced in
summative evaluation.
Acknowledgements:
It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of Curriculum C-20.
A series of workshops in three phases were conducted by NITTTR, AP Extension Centre, Vijayawada
involving faculty from Polytechnics, Premier Engineering Colleges & Industries to analyze the Previous
C-16 Curriculum and to design C-20 Curriculum under the guidance of Dr C. R. Nagendra Rao,
Professor & Head, NITTTR-ECV. The efforts & support extended by NITTTR to bring out final
Curriculum C-20 by incorporating needs, aspiration & expectations of all stake holders is highly
appreciated and gratefully acknowledged.
The Members of the working group are grateful to Sri M.M. Nayak, I.A.S., Special Commissioner of
Technical Education & Chairman of SBTET, AP. and Sri. G. Anantha Ramu, I.A.S., Principal Secretary,
Department of Skill Development and Training for their guidance and valuable inputs during process
of revising, modifying and updating the Curriculum C-20.
The Members acknowledge with thanks the guidance & inspiration provided by Sri. V.S. Dutt,
Secretary, SBTET, Andhra Pradesh and other officials of Directorate of Technical Education and the
State Board of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh, experts from industry, academia from the
universities and higher learning institutions and all teaching fraternity from the Polytechnics who are
directly or indirectly involved in preparation of the curricula.
4
RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-20 CURRICULUM
1 DURATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES:
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years or 3½ years
duration of academic instruction.
All the Diploma courses are run on year wise pattern in the first year, and the remaining two or two
& half years are run in the semester pattern. In respect of few courses like Diploma in Bio-Medical
course, the training will be in the seventh semester. Run-through system is adopted for all the
Diploma Courses, subject to eligibility conditions.
2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:

Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and Regulations laid down in this regard from time
to time.
a) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to appear for
the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET) conducted by the State
Board of Technical Education and Training, Andhra Pradesh, Vijayawada.
Only the candidates satisfying the following requirements will be eligible to appear for the
Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
b) The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for S.S.C examination, conducted by
the Board of Secondary Education, Andhra Pradesh or equivalent examination thereto, at the
time of applying for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In
case of candidates whose results of their Qualifying Examinations is pending, their selection
shall be subject to production of proof of their passing the qualifying examination in one
attempt or compartmentally at the time of admission.
c) Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test (POLYCET) and
the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Andhra Pradesh from time to time.
d) For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which entry qualification is 10+2,
candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be issued for admission
into these courses.
i). D.HMCT ii).D. Pharmacy
3 MEDIUM OF INSTRUCTION
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in sessional work
and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for promotion etc., A Permanent
Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each admitted candidate to maintain academic
records.
5
5 NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS PER SEMESTER / YEAR:
a) The Academic year for all the Courses shall be in accordance with the Academic Calendar.
b) The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c) There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration each on all working days.
d) The minimum number of working days for each semester / year shall be 90 / 180 days
excluding examination days. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved due to any reason,
special arrangements shall be made to conduct classes to complete the syllabus.
6 ELIGIBILITY (ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END EXAMINATION):
a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all subjects, if he or she
has attended a minimum of 75% of working days during the year/Semester.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and above and below
75%) in each semester or 1st year may be granted on medical grounds.
c) A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of attendance.
d) Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / 1st year and not
paid the condonation fee in time are not eligible to take their end examination of that class
and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek re-admission for that semester /
1st year when offered in the next subsequent academic semester/year.
f) For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:
i) During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90%
attendance.
ii) If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the
student shall reappear for 6 months industrial training at his own expenses.
7 READMISSION
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal/ Regional

Joint Director.
a) (i) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester (Except
Industrial Training).
(ii) For Industrial Training: before commencement of the Industrial training.
b) Within 30 days after commencement of class work in any year (including D. Pharmacy course
or first year course in Engineering and Non Engineering Diploma streams).
Otherwise such cases shall not be considered for readmission for that semester / year and
are advised to seek readmission in the next subsequent eligible academic year.
The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates shall be calculated from the first
day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / Semester, as officially announced by
CTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she has actually reported to the class work.
6
8 SCHEME OF Evaluation
a) First Year
THEORY Courses: Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with examination of 3 hours
duration, along with internal assessment for Maximum of 20 marks. (Sessional marks). However,
there are no minimum marks prescribed for sessionals.
Laboratory Courses: There shall be 40 Marks for internal assessment i.e. sessional marks for each
practical Course with an end examination of 3 hours duration carrying 60 marks. However, there
are no minimum marks prescribed for sessionals.
b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

THEORY Courses: End semester evaluation shall be of 3 hours duration and for a maximum of 80
marks.
Laboratory Courses: Each Course carry 60/30 marks of 3hours duration 40/20 sessional
marks.
9 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT SCHEME

a) Theory Courses: Internal assessment shall be conducted for awarding sessional marks on the
dates specified. Three unit tests shall be conducted for I year students and two Unit Tests for
semesters.
Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum of 40 marks. For
each test
The average of marks of all the test, reduced to 20 shall be taken as final sessional in any case.
b) Practical Courses:
(i) Drawing Courses:

The award of sessional marks for internal Assessment shall be as given in the
following table
Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks
First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)
Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks
From the From the Average of From the Average of From the Average of
Average of Assessment of Regular Class TWO Unit Tests. Assessment of Regular Class
THREE Unit work Exercises. work Exercises.
Tests.
All Drawing exercises are to be filed in serial order and secured for further scrutiny by a competent
authority
7
(ii) Laboratory Courses:
Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during the year/ semester
of study for 40 marks in each practical Course.
Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

i. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing) here after
shall be task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET,
AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in SBTET website.
ii. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on the basis of task/s performed by the
student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and
posted in AP, SBTET website.
iii. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall also be task/s based and shall be
prepared and distributed by SBTET as done in case of theory courses be prepared as per
SBTET rules in vogue.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field work etc., during the course of study shall
be done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the concerned Teacher.
d) For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be two examiners. External
examiner shall be appointed by the Principal in consultation with respective Head of
Section preferably choosing a qualified person from in the order of preference.
i) Nearby Industry
ii) Govt / Semi Govt organization like R & B, PWD, PR, Railways, BSNL,APSRTC,APSEB etc.,
iii) Govt / University Engg College.
iv) HoDs from Govt.Polytechnic
Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal assessment as in (c) above. The
end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover ( the experiments / exercise
prescribed to test various) skills like handling, manipulating, testing, trouble shooting, repair,
assembling and dismantling etc., from more than one experiment / exercise.
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical Courses are to be
maintained for official inspection.
g) In case of Diploma programs having Industrial Training, Internal Assessment and Summative
Evaluation, shall be done as illustrated in the following table:
8
Upon
Assessment Max
completion By Based on
no Marks
of
1 12 weeks 1.The faculty Learning outcomes as given in the 120

concerned and scheme of assessment ,for
Industrial Training
2 20-22 weeks 2. Training Mentor of 120
the industry
1.The faculty member 1.Demonstration of any one of

concerned, the skills listed in learning
outcomes 30
3.Final 2.HoD concerned and
summative 23 week
Evaluation 3.An external
examiner 2.Training Report 20
3.Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 300
10 MINIMUM PASS MARKS

THEORY EXAMINATION:
For passing a theory Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 35% in end examination and a
combined minimum of 35% of both Sessional and end examination marks put together.
PRACTICAL EXAMINATION:
For passing a practical Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50% in end examination and
a combined minimum of 50% of both sessional and practical end examination marks put together. In
case of D.C.C.P., the pass mark for typewriting and short hand is 45% in the end examination. There
are no sessional marks for typewriting and Shorthand Courses of D.C.C.P course.
INDUSTRIAL ASSESSMENT:
Pass marks is 50% in assessment at Industry (I and II assessments put together) and also 50% in final
summative assessment at institution level
9
11. PROVISION FOR IMPROVEMENT
Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all the Courses from First Year
to Final semester of the Diploma.
a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.

b) The student can avail of this improvement chance ONLY ONCE, that too within the
succeeding two examinations after the completion of Diploma. However, the duration
including Improvement examination shall not exceed FIVE years from the year of first
admission.
c) No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab Courses or Project work or Industrial Training
assessment. However, improvement in drawing Course(s) is allowed.
d) If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in previous Examinations hold
good.
e) Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who are punished under Mal-
practice in any Examination.
f) Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the notification issued by State
Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time.
g) All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of performance shall deposit
the original Marks Memos of all the years / Semesters and also original Diploma
Certificate to the Board. If there is improvement in performance of the current
examination, the revised Memorandum of marks and Original Diploma Certificate will
be issued, else the submitted originals will be returned.
12. RULES OF PROMOTION FROM 1ST YEAR TO 3,rd, 4,th 5th ,6th and 7th SEMESTERS:
A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he / she puts in
75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%) i.e. attendance after
condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the
first year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training, AP from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay
the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training AP from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b) Should not have failed in more than four Courses in 1st year
10
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:
a) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b) A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she
clears at least two Courses in third semester.
iv) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the required percentage
of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee. A candidate, who could not
pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State
Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 5 th
semester.

b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.
The first backlog exam in 5th semester will be conducted only in instant/supplementary
diploma examination.
For IVC& ITI Lateral Entry students:
v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pay the examination fee/ promotion fee as
prescribed by SBTET.
A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment (Seminar/Viva-voce)

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 6th semester Industrial
Training.
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 6th semester Industrial
Training.
b) should get eligibility to appear for 5th Semester Examination.
B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/ CHOT/ TT ):
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for 1st year examination provided he / she puts in 75%
attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%) i.e. attendance after
condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay the examination fee.
attendance in the 1st year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the 1st
year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical
Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
11
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the
3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical
Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if he/she
a). Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
b). Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st year.

iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester industrial training provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
commencement of 5th semester.
v. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st spell of Industrial Training to 2nd
spell) provided he/she puts the required percentage of attendance, which in this case ie.,90 % of
attendance and attends for the VIVA-VOCE examination at the end of training.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he / she puts the required percentage
of attendance in the 6th semester and pays the examination fee. A candidate, who could not
pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State
Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 7th
semester.
vii. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course provided he/she has successfully
completed both the spells of Industrial Training.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th semester Examination.
b) Should not have failed more than four backlog Courses of 3rd Semester
C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):
The same rules which are applicable for conventional courses also apply for this course. The
industrial training in respect of this course is restricted to one semester (6 months) after the 6th semester (3
years) of the course.
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he / she puts in
75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto 10%) i.e. attendance
after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less than 65% and pay the examination
fee.
12
attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A candidate who could not pay
the first year examination fee has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 3 rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate who
could not pay the 3rd semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed
by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 1st year
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee. A candidate,
who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as
prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time before
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester exam if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th semester.
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester examination.

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester.
b) Should not have failed in more than Four backlog Courses of 3rd Semester.
v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the examination fee.
A candidate who could not pay the 5th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion
fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time
before commencement of 6th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester and
b) Should get eligibility to appear for 4th Semester Examination.

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester.
13
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in the required
percentage of attendance in 6th semester and pay the examination fee. A candidate, who
could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee prescribed by
SBTET from time to time before commencement of the 7th semester (Industrial Training).
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester Industrial
Training

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester Industrial
Training.
Important Note:
Seminar/Viva-voce should not be conducted for Not-Eligible Candidates, till the candidate gets
eligibility. However, the record of internal Assessment for Industrial Training for 260 marks shall
be maintained at Institution Level for all candidates and the data is to be uploaded only for eligible
candidates. For not eligible candidates the data is to be uploaded as and when the candidate gets
eligibility.
OTHER DETAILS
a) In case a candidate does not successfully complete the Industrial training, he / she will have
to repeat the training at his / her own cost.
b) The First spell of Industrial training shall commence 10 days after the completion of the last
theory examination of 4th Semester.
c) The Second spell of Industrial training shall commence within 10 days after the completion
of first spell of Industrial training.
13. STUDENTS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under the following divisions of pass.
a) First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates who secure an overall aggregate of
75% marks and above.
b) First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall aggregate of 60% marks and above and
below 75% marks.
c) Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a pass with an overall aggregate of below
60%.
14
i. The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which are taken for computing overall
aggregate shall be 25% of I year marks + 100% of 3rd and subsequent Semesters.
ii. In respect IVC & ITI Lateral Entry candidates who are admitted directly into diploma course
at the 3rd semester (i.e., second year) level the aggregate of (100%) marks secured at the 3 rd
and subsequent semesters of study shall be taken into consideration for determining the
overall percentage of marks secured by the candidates for award of class/division.
d) Second Class shall be awarded to all students, who fail to complete the Diploma in the regular 3
years/ 3 ½ years and four subsequent examinations, from the year of first admission.
14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:
The examination fee should be as per the notification issued by State Board of Technical Education
and Training, AP from time to time.
15. STRUCTURE OF EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER:
I. Formative assessment (Internal examination)
a) For theory Courses:
Three unit tests for first year and two unit tests for semesters shall be conducted with a duration
of 90 minutes for each test for maximum marks of 40. It consists of part A and Part B.
Part A contains five questions and carries 16 marks. Among these five questions first question
consists of four objective items like one word or phrase answer/filling-in the blanks/true or false
etc. with one mark for each question. The other four questions are short answer questions and
carry three marks each.
Part B carries 24 marks and consists of three questions with internal choice ie., Either/Or type ,
and each question carries 8 marks.
The sum of marks of 3 tests for I year and 2 tests for semesters shall be reduced to 20 marks in
each Course for arriving at final sessional marks.
b) For drawing Courses:

For I year:
Three unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marks shall be
conducted for first year. It consists of part A and Part B.
Part A consists four questions for maximum marks of 16 and each question carries four marks
(4×4 marks=16 marks).
Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while the student shall answer
any three questions out of these five questions. Each question in this part carries a maximum
marks of 8, (3×8 marks=24 marks).
The sum of marks obtained in 3 unit test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for arriving at final
sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course teacher based on the student’s
performance during regular class exercise.
15
For semester: Two unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marks
shall be conducted. The sum of marks obtained in 2 unit test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks
for arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course teacher
based on the student’s performance during regular class exercise
c) For Laboratory /workshop: 50% of total marks for the Course shall be awarded based on
continuous assessment of the student in laboratory/workshop classes and the remaining
50% shall be based on the sum of the marks obtained by the students in two tests.
II. Summative assessment (End examination)

The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such a manner that the
Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of the topics for a particular Course be
considered. End Examination paper is of 3 hours duration.
a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.

Section ‘A’ with Max marks of 30, contains 10 short answer questions. All questions are to be
answered and each carries 3 marks, i.e., 10 x 3 = 30.
Section ‘B’ with Max marks of 40 contains 5 essay type questions including Numerical questions
(without any divisions in the question), with internal choice(Either/or type), each carrying 8
marks, i.e., Max. Marks: 5 x 8 = 40.
Section ‘C’ with Max marks of 10 contains single essay type, Higher order Thinking skills
question (HoTs)including Numerical questions, without choice (without any divisions in the
question),
Thus the total marks for theory examination shall be: 80.
b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and section ‘B’.
Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All questions in section ‘A’ are to
be answered to the scale and each carries 5 marks, ie. 4 x 5=20.
Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains six (6) questions. The student shall answer any four
(4) questions out of the above six questions and each question carries 10 Marks, ie. 4 x 10 = 40.
c) Practical Examinations
For Workshop practice and Laboratory Examinations, Each student has to pick up a question
paper distributed by Lottery System.
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 50
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 10
Total Max. Marks : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks shall be distributed as
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 25
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 05
Total Max. Marks : 30
In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the same shall be informed sufficiently in
advance to the candidates.
16
d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:
I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing)

hereafter shall be task/competency based as delineated in the Laboratory sheets,
prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
II. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on basis of task/s performed by
the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP and
posted in its website.
III. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall be prepared as per SBTET rules in
vogue.
16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued memorandum of marks without
any payment of fee. However candidates who lose the original memorandum of marks have to pay
the prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P. for each
duplicate memo from time to time.
17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA Programmes:

Maximum period for completion of the diploma courses is twice the duration of the course from the
date of First admission (includes the period of detention and discontinuation of studies by student
etc.) failing which they will have to forfeit the claim for qualifying for the award of Diploma (They will
not be permitted to appear for examinations after that date). This rule applies for all Diploma
courses of 3 years and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-engineering courses.
18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA

A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the following academic
regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½ academic years & not more than 6 /
7 academic years.
ii. He / she have completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma within 6 /
7 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course & their seat
shall stand cancelled.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic years & not more than
4 / 5 academic years.
ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the Diploma within
4 / 5 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit their seat in the course & their seat
shall stand cancelled.
17
19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING& REVERIFICATION:
A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

I. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued answer script/s should apply
within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
II. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all theory Courses and Drawing
Course(s).
III. The Photo copy of valued answer script will be dispatched to the concerned candidate’s
address as mentioned in the application form by post.
IV. No application can be entertained from third parties.
B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT

i. A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued answer script should apply
within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the result.
ii. Re-verification of valued answer script shall be done for all theory Courses’ and Drawing
Course(s).
iii. The Re-verification committee constituted by the Secretary, SBTETAP with Course experts shall
re-verify the answer scripts.
I. RE-COUNTING
The Officer of SBTET will verify the marks posted and recount them in the already
valued answer script. The variations if any will be recorded separately, without making any
changes on the already valued answer script. The marks awarded in the original answer
script are maintained (hidden).
II. RE-VERIFICATION
(i) The Committee has to verify the intactness and genuineness of the answer script(s)
placed for Re-verification.
(ii) Initially single member shall carry out the re-verification.
(iii) On re-verification by single member, if the variation is less than 12% of maximum
marks, and if there is no change in the STATUS in the result of the candidate, such
cases will not be referred to the next level ie., for 2-Tier evaluation.
(iv) On re-verification by a single member, if the variation is more than 12% of maximum
marks, it will be referred to 2-Tier evaluation.
(v) If the 2-Tier evaluation confirms variation in marks as more than 12% of maximum
marks, the variation is considered as follows:
a) If the candidate has already passed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum
marks on Re-verification, then the variation is considered.
b) If the candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum marks on
Re-verification and secured pass marks on re-verification, then the status of the
candidate changes to PASS.
c) If a candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum marks on Re-
verification and if the marks secured on re-verification are still less than the
minimum pass marks, the status of the candidate remain FAIL only.
18
(vii) After Re-verification of valued answer script the same or change if any therein on
Re-verification, will be communicated to the candidate.
(viii) On Re-verification of Valued Answer Script if the candidate’s marks are revised, the
fee paid by the candidate will be refunded or else the candidate has to forfeit the
fee amount.
Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued answer

script would be entertained from a candidate who is reported to have resorted
to Malpractice in that examination.
20. MAL PRACTICE CASES:

If any candidate resorts to Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be booked and
the Punishment shall be awarded as per SBTETAP rules and regulations in vogue.
21. DISCREPANCIES/ PLEAS:

Any Discrepancy /Pleas regarding results etc., shall be represented to the SBTETAP within
one month from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be entertained in any
manner.
22. ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA

If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and desires a duplicate to be issued
he/she should produce written evidence to this effect. He / she may obtain a duplicate from the
Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P., on payment of prescribed fee and
on production of an affidavit signed before a First Class Magistrate (Judicial) and non-
traceablecertificate from the Department of Police. In case of damage of original Diploma Certificate,
he / she may obtain a duplicate certificate by surrendering the original damaged certificate on
payment of prescribed fee to the State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.
In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within 1 year from the date of issue
of the certificate, the candidate has to pay the penalty prescribed by the SBTET AP from time to
time.
23. ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:

The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the candidates who
intend to prosecute Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
24. The following specific changes are discussed and incorporated:
25. GENERAL
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at any time
and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students, for whom it is
intended, with effect from the dates notified by the competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP are
within the jurisdiction of Vijayawada.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of the
Secretary, SBTET, A.P is final.
19
C-20 Curriculum for DMNGE
With Industrial training in Semester VI
VISION
Develop Mining Engineering professionals competent to face the global challenges in a progressive
environment conducive to learn technical knowledge, skills blended with ethics and values, to serve the
society and to better it for a happy and comfortable living.
MISSION
M1 To provide a competitive learning environment, through a need based curriculum designed

in collaboration with industry, conducive for high quality education emphasising on transfer
of knowledge and skill development essential for the profession and the society as well.
M2 To nurture higher order leadership qualities and ethics and values in students to enable
them to be leaders in their chosen professions while maintaining the highest level of ethics.
M3 Conduct of laboratories, guest lectures, industrial visits and industrial training for better
understanding of critical concepts of Mining Engineering
M4 To foster effective interactions and networking with all the stake holders so as to work
towards the growth and sustainability of the society and environment.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

1. Basic and discipline specific knowledge: Apply knowledge of basic mathematics, science and
engineering fundamentals and engineering specialization to solve the engineering problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify and analyse well-defined engineering problems using codified
standard methods.
3. Design/Development of solutions: Design solutions for well-defined technical problems and
assist with the design of systems components or processes to meet specified needs .
4. Engineering tools, Experimentation and Testing: Apply modern engineering tools and
appropriate technique to conduct standard tests and measurements.
5. Engineering practices for society, sustainability and environment: Apply appropriate
technology in context of society, sustainability, environment and ethical practices.
6. Project Management: Use engineering management principles individually, as a team member
or a leader to manage projects and effectively communicate about well defined engineering
activities.
7. Life-long learning: Ability to analyse individual needs and engaging updating in the context of
technological changes.
PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

1. An ability to apply disciplines - specific knowledge to solve core and/or applied Mining Engineering
problems.
2. An ability to plan and perform experiments and practices and to use the results to solve Mining
Engineering problems.
Apply appropriate technologies and tools with an understanding of the limitations
20
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATIONS
I YEAR
Instruction
Scheme of Examination
period / week Total
Subject Name of the
Period End
Code Subject Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practical/Tutorial / Sem Exam
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
MNG-
English 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
101
MNG- Engineering
5 - 150 3 20 80 100
102 Mathematics – I
MNG- Engineering
4 - 120 3 20 80 100
103 Physics
Engineering
MNG- Chemistry &
4 - 120 3 20 80 100
104 Environmental
Studies
MNG- Elements of
6 - 180 3 20 80 100
105 Mining
MNG- Fundamentals
5 - 150 3 20 80 100
106 of Geology
PRACTICAL
MNG- Engineering
- 6 180 3 40 60 100
107 Drawing
MNG- Workshop
- 3 90 3 40 60 100
108 Practice
109-A Physics
MNG- Lab 45 20 30 50
- 3 3
109 109-B Chemistry 45 20 30 50
Lab
MNG- Computer
Fundamentals - 3 90 3 40 60 100
110
Practice
TOTAL 27 15 1260 280 720 1000
21
III SEMESTER (SECOND YEAR)
Instruction
period / week Total
Subject Name of the
Period End
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Engineering
MNG- Mathematics – 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
301 II
MNG- Basic Electrical
5 - 75 3 20 80 100
302 Engineering
Basic
MNG-
Mechanical 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
303
Engineering
Underground
MNG-
Coal Mining 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
304
Methods
MNG- Mine
5 - 75 3 20 80 100
305 Surveying-I
MNG-
Mining Geology 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
306
PRACTICAL
Basic Electrical
MNG- Engineering
- 3 45 3 40 60 100
307 Laboratory
Practice
Basic
MNG- Mechanical
Engineering - 3 45 3 40 60 100
308
Laboratory
Practice
MNG- Mine Surveying
- 4 60 3 40 60 100
309 Practice –I
MNG- Mining Geology

Laboratory - 3 45 3 40 60 100
310
Practice
TOTAL 29 13 630 280 720 1000
22
IV SEMESTER (SECOND YEAR)
Instruction
period / week Total
Subject Name of the
Period End
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Engineering
MNG- 3 - 45 3 20 80 100
Mathematics – III
401
Underground
MNG-
Metal Mining 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
402
Methods
Mine
MNG-
Environmental 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
403
Engineering
MNG- Mining
4 - 60 3 20 80 100
404 Machinery-I
MNG- Mine Surveying –
5 - 75 3 20 80 100
405 II
MNG-
Surface Mining 5 75 3 20 80 100
406
PRACTICAL
Mine
MNG- Environmental
Engineering - 3 45 3 40 60 100
407
Laboratory
Practice
MNG- Communication
- 3 45 3 40 60 100
408 Skills
MNG- Mine Surveying
- 4 60 3 40 60 100
409 Practice - II
Mine Planning
MNG- and Design
- 3 45 3 40 60 100
410 Laboratory
Practice
Mining
MNG- Machinery 3 45 3 40 60 100
411 Laboratory
Practice
TOTAL 26 16 630 320 780 1100
23
V SEMESTER (THIRD YEAR)
Instruction
period / week Total
Subject Name of the
Period End
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Mine
MNG-
Management and 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
501
Entrepreneurship
MNG- Mine Legislation
6 - 90 3 20 80 100
502 and Safety
MNG- Mine Hazards and
5 - 75 3 20 80 100
503 Rescue
MNG- Mining
6 - 90 3 20 80 100
504 Machinery-II
Rock Mechanics
MNG-
and Strata 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
505
Control
PRACTICAL
MNG- Practical Training

- 1 07 1 20 30 50
506 and Assessment*
MNG- Rock Mechanics

Laboratory - 3 45 3 40 60 100
507
Practice
MNG-
Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
508
MNG-
CAD Practice - 3 45 3 40 60 100
509
MNG- Total Station
- 3 45 3 40 60 100
510 Survey Practice
MNG-
Project Work - 2 38 2 20 30 50
511
TOTAL 27 15 630 300 700 1000
*MNG 506 shall be scheduled for one single day for entire semester while framing the time table for class
work.
24
MNG-601 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Upon
Assessment Max
no Marks
of
12 weeks 1.The faculty 120

1 concerned and Learning outcomes as given in the
2. Training Mentor of following scheme of assessment
20-22 weeks the industry 120
2
1.The faculty member 1. Demonstration of any one of

30
3.Final
outcomes,other than S.No. 2
summative 23 week 2.HoD concerned and 2.Training Report 20
examiner 3.Viva Voce 10
TOTAL 300
25
FIRST YEAR
26
I YEAR
Instruction
period / week Total
Subject
Name of the Subject Period End
Code Practical/ Duration Sessional Total
Theory / Sem Exam
Tutorial (hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
MNG- 101 English 3 - 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering
MNG-102 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Mathematics – I
MNG-103 Engineering Physics 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Engineering
Chemistry &
MNG-104 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Environmental
Studies
MNG-105 Elements of Mining 6 - 180 3 20 80 100
Fundamentals of
MNG-106 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Geology
PRACTICAL
MNG-107 Engineering Drawing - 6 180 3 40 60 100
MNG-108 Workshop Practice - 3 90 3 40 60 100
MNG-109 109-A Physics Lab 3 45 3 20 30 50

-
109-B Chemistry Lab 45 20 30 50
Computer
MNG-110 Fundamentals - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Practice
TOTAL 27 15 1260 280 720 1000
27
English
Course Code Course Title No. of Periods/Week Total No. of Marks Marks for SA
Periods for FA
MNG-101 English 3 90 20 80
S. No. Unit Title No of Periods COs Mapped

1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
9 The End Point First! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4
Total Periods 90
To improve the skills of English Language use by enriching vocabulary and

learning accurate structures for effective communication.
Course Objectives
To comprehend themes for value based living in professional and personal
settings.
CO No. Course Outcomes
CO1 Applies perceptions of themes related to societal responsibility of adolescents towards their
surroundings.
CO2 Demonstrates knowledge of form and function of ‘grammar items’ and use them in both
academic and everyday situations.
CO3 Demonstrates effective English communication skills with competence in listening, speaking,
reading and writing in academic, professional and everyday contexts.
CO4 Displays positivity and values of harmonious living in personal and professional spheres as
reflected through communication.
28
CO-PO Matrix
Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods: 90
MNG-101 Number of Course Outcomes: 4
POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks
with CO No. Column 1 Mapping
Number Percentage (1,2,3)
PO1 Not directly Applicable for English course, however activities that use
content from science and technology relevant to the Programme taken up
PO2 by the student shall be exploited for communication in the Course.
PO3
PO4
PO5 CO1, CO2, 20 22 >50%: Level 3

CO3, CO4
PO6 CO1, CO2, 52 58 21-50%: Level 2

CO3, CO4
PO7 CO1, CO2, 18 20

Up to 20%: Level 1
CO3, CO4
Level 3 – Strongly Mapped

Level 2- Moderately Mapped
Level 1- Slightly Mapped
PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7
CO 1   
CO 2   
CO3   
CO 4   
NOTE: CO-PO groups shall be fulfilled through activities that use content from science and technology
relevant to the Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited for communication in the Course.
PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by concerned
teacher.
PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be planned and
conducted.
PO7: Such activities are to be planned that students visit library to refer standard books on Mathematics
and latest updates in reputed national and international journals, attending seminars, learning
mathematical software tools.
29
Blue Print of Question Paper
S. Name of the Unit Period Weighta Marks Wise Question Wise CO's
No. s ge Distribution of Distribution of Mapped
Allocat Allocate Weightage Weightage
ed d
R U Ap An R U Ap An
CO1,
English for
1 8 3 1 CO2,
Employability
CO3, CO4
1 CO1,
2 Living in Harmony 8 17 3 1 * 1* CO2,
8* CO3, CO4
CO1,
3 Connect with Care 8 3 CO2,
CO3, CO4
CO1,
Humour for
4 8 3 1 CO2,
Happiness
1* CO3, CO4
14
8* CO1,
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 3 1 CO2,
CO3, CO4
CO1,
6 Preserve or Perish 9 3 CO2,
1 1 CO3, CO4
14 8*
* CO1,
The Rainbow of
7 8 3 CO2,
Diversity
1 CO3, CO4
CO1,
New Challenges -
8 8 CO2,
Newer Ideas
CO3, CO4
8*+ CO1,
1
9 The End Point First! 8 8* 3+3+ 4 1* CO2,
*
3 CO3, CO4
35
CO1,
10 The Equal Halves 8 10* CO2,
CO3, CO4
Dealing with 9 CO1,
11 Disasters CO2,
CO3, CO4
TOTAL 90 80 6 30 34 10 2 5 8 1
PART-A: 10 Questions 3 marks each =30 Marks All Questions are compulsory : 60 minutes
PART-B: 5 Questions 8 marks each =40 Marks Internal choice : 90 minutes
Part-C: 1 Question 10 marks =10 Marks
(Higher Order Question) No choice, one compulsory question : 30 minutes
NOTE: * indicates questions can be given from any of the corresponding lessons in the blue print.
Question Paper Pattern for Unit Tests
Part A: 16 marks: 4 questions with 1 mark each (FIB, True/false, one word/phrase, etc.)
4 questions with 3 marks each (short answer/ descriptive/ applicative questions)
Part B: 24 marks: 3 questions 8 marks each with internal choice
30
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1. English for Employability

1.1. Explain the need for improving communication in English for employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences
2. Living in Harmony
2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships
2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually
3. Connect with Care
3.1. Use social media with discretion
3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues for everyday situations
4. Humour for Happiness
4.1. Explain the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Display reading and speaking skills
4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement
4.5. Explain the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas as a preliminary
step for writing a good paragraph.
5. Never Ever Give Up!
5.1. Practice to deal with failures in life.
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative functions such as speaking
and writing about routines, professions, scientific descriptions and sports commentary.
5.3. Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills.
6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Describe the ecological challenges that we face today and act to save the environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events.
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment.
6.4. Write e-mails.
7. The Rainbow of Diversity
7.1. Illustrate and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural workspace
7.2. use different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations
8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas
8.1. Explain the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive Voice
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. List the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Explain latest innovations and get motivated
31
9. The End Point First!
9.1. Illustrate the importance of setting a goal in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life
10. The Equal Halves
10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing
11. Dealing with Disasters
11.1. Speak and write about different kinds of disasters and the concept of disaster
management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it in sentences
11.3. Analyze an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. write different kinds of reports
Textbook: INTERACT (A Textbook for I Year English) - Published by SBTET, AP
Reference Books:
Martin Hewings : Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Murphy, Raymond : English Grammar in Use,Cambridge University Press
Sidney Greenbaum : Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press
Wren and Martin (Revised
ByN.D.V. Prasad Rao) : English Grammar and Composition, Blackie ELT Books, S.
Chand and Co.
Sarah Freeman : Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan
32
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION –A.P
C20- MNG-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-1
Time: 90 minutes Max. Marks: 40
PART-A 4X4= 16 marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries FOUR Marks.
1. Rewrite / Fill in the blank as directed. Each question carries ½ Mark. (CO2)
a) Write the antonym of ‘cruel’
b) Write the synonym of ‘love’
c) Give prefix to ‘adventure’.
d) Give suffix to ‘ liberate’
e) It is _______ universal truth. (Fill in with suitable article)
f) The boy is fond ____ ice-cream. ( Fill in the blank with proper preposition)
g) He ____not like sweets. (Fill in the blank with correct primary auxiliary verb.)
h) We ________ respect our national flag. ( Fill in with a proper modal verb)
2. Rewrite the sentences as directed. Each question carries One mark. 4X1=4 Marks (CO2)
a) No other metal is so useful as iron. ( Change into superlative degree)
b) Very few students are so clever as Ramesh. ( Change into comparative degree)
c) Guess the contextual meaning of the italicized word in the following sentence.
“The CBI officer has interrogated the bank employees in connection with the scam.”
d) only sings plays Prasanth not also well but cricket. ( Rearrange the jumbled words)
3. Fill in the blanks with proper form of the verb given in brackets. 4X1 = 4 marks (CO2)
The IPSGM _________(hold) in our college last month. Nearly all the colleges in our zone
______(participate) in the event. The prizes ________ (distribute) by the district collector.
Next year, Government Polytechnic, Vijayawada __________ (conduct) the games meet.
4. Rewrite the following sentences after making necessary corrections: 4X 1= 4 Marks (CO3)
a) The police has arrested the culprit.
b) Three hundred miles are a long distance.
c) The Principal along with the Heads of Sections have visited the laboratories.
d) Either he or I is to blame.
PART-B 3X8=24 Marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions and each question carries EIGHT marks.
5. Write a dialogue of at least five turns between a shopkeeper and customer about buying a
mobilephone. (CO3)
6. Make an analysis and write a paragraph in around 100 words about your strengths and
weaknesses in learning and using English and also the measures to improve it. (CO3)
7. Write a paragraph in about 100 words on how to overcome low esteem and negativity.
(CO3, CO4)
***
33
C20-MNG-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-II
PART-A 4X4= 16 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries FOUR marks.
1. Match the words in column A with their corresponding meanings in column B (CO2)
Column A Column B
a) Deserve i) continuous
b) hidden ii) protect
c) Preserve iii) worthy
d) Incessant iv) praise
v) unseen
vi) affection
2. Rewrite as directed: (CO3)
a) You ask your Mom to give you another chocolate. ( Change into a request)
b) The baby fell down and got injured. ( Change into an exclamatory sentence)
c) The match was very interesting. ( Frame a question using ‘how’)
d) Hemanth submitted his project report last week. (Frame Yes-No question)
3. Fill in the blanks with appropriate forms of verbs given in brackets: (CO2)
a) The Sun ______ (set) in the west.
b) Balu ______ (sing) for over fifty years in the films.
c) We _________ (see) a camel on the road yesterday.
d) They _______(enter) the stadium before the gates were closed.
4. Change the voice of the following: (CO2)
a) Marconi invented the radio.
b) Sravanthi has been offered a job.
c) Pragathi can type the letter.
d) The Chief Guest will be received by the Final year students.
34
PART-B 3X8=24 Marks
Answer all the questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks.
5. Write a letter to your younger brother motivating him to deal with failures and hurdles in life.
(CO3)
6. Write an essay in around120 words on the role of robots in the modern world. (CO3)
7. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow: (CO3)
The greatest enemy of mankind, as people have discovered, is not science, but war. Science merely
reflects the social forces by which it is surrounded. It was found that when there is peace, science is
constructive when there is war, science is perverted to destructive end. The weapons which science
gives us do not necessarily create war. These make war increasingly more terrible. Until now, it has
brought us on the doorstep of doom. Our main problem, therefore, is not to curb science, but to
substitute law for force, and international government for anarchy in the relations of one nation with
another. That is a job in which everybody must participate, including the scientists. Now we are face
to face with these urgent questions: Can education and tolerance, understanding and creative
intelligence run fast enough to keep us side by side without our mounting capacity to destroy? That is
the question which we shall have to answer, one way or the other, in this generation. Science must
help us in the answer, but the main decision lies within ourselves. The hour is late and our work has
scarcely begun.
a. What is the chief enemy of man?

b. What does science reflect?
c. When is science perverted?
d. What makes war more terrible?
e. Why do we need international government?
f. What are the four aspects that may stop destruction?
g. Have we really started our work to fight the problem discussed?
h. Pick the word from the passage that would mean: ‘replace with other one’
***
35
C20-MNG-101-ENGLISH
UNIT TEST-III
PART-A 4X4 = 16 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question caries Four marks.
1. Give the meaning of the word in italics: (CO3)
a) When the girls laughed in the class, the teacher was furious.
b) He was rusticated from the school for his misbehavior.
c) Vikramaditya was a benevolent Indian King.
d) We should not show any discrimination between boys and girls.
2. Change the speech of the following: (CO2)
a) He said, “I am sorry.”
b) The teacher said to the boys, “Why are you late?”
c) Sushma said that she had submitted her report recently.
d) Pratap requested Priya to give him her pen.
a) Though he was weak, he took the test. ( change into a simple sentence)
b) You must work hard to achieve success. ( change into a complex sentence)
c) If you run fast, you will catch the bus. ( change into a compound sentence)
d) The fog disappeared when the Sun rose. ( Split into two simple sentences)
4. Locate eight errors from the following passage and correct them. (CO2)
Once upon a time there live a king who was very kind to his people. In his council of ministers, there is a
wise man. He had a son called Sumanth who was a educated and highly learned. Once the wise minister
fall sick. All the physicists in the country could not heal him. Then Sumanth will go in search of medicine
in Himalayas. He bring the special medicinal roots to cure his father’s sickness. Sumanth looked before
his father carefully and healed him. The king rewarded Sumanth with rich gifts.
36
PART- B 3X8 = 24 Marks
Instructions: Answer all the questions and each one carries eight marks.
5. Read the following paragraph and make notes first and then its summary. (CO3)
Astronauts are people who travel on space ships. They need to have a very clean home. They travel far
from Earth. We need clean kitchens everywhere on earth and in space. Astronauts have to solve two
problems: how to get food and how to keep their spaceship clean. Here is how they solved the food
problem. At first, the astronauts took tubes of food with them into space. They would squeeze a tube
and eat semi-liquid food. It did not taste great, but since they did not need to take dishes or silverware
with them, they had no dishes to wash. Today’s spaceships have a bigger menu. Astronauts can eat
from bowls. In fact, they take cereal and other standard foods with them. The foods are packaged in
special containers to keep them fresh. They use knives, forks, and spoons. One unusual item on their
table is a pair of scissors. They use the scissors to open the food packages. They can eat right from the
package. They have a kitchen on the spaceship. Its oven can heat food to 170 degrees. The kitchen has
water and sets of meals that come on trays. The astronauts choose their menu before they go into
space. They take a lot of food with them. The astronauts keep bread and fresh fruits and vegetables in a
special food locker. How do they keep the kitchen clean? They do not have to worry about mice or
other rodents. They make sure that there are no rodents before the ship leaves. But sometimes mice
travel on the ship. Those mice are part of experiments. They live in cages. How do astronauts keep their
trays clean? That is another health problem the astronauts solve. They need to stay healthy in space. To
carry a lot of water to wash trays would be a lot of extra weight. They pack wet wipes in plastic bags.
They use them to clean trays. So, their kitchen is clean and they stay healthy.
6. Write an essay in about 120 words on the importance of goal setting and your short and long term
goals. (CO3,CO4)
7. Write a report about the bush fire that raged in Australia recently by using the following clues: forest,
natural disaster, wild fire, dried leaves, no rain fall, wild animals, burnt alive, loss of flora and fauna, fire
fighters, uncontrollable, moderate rains, environmental pollution, measures to protect...etc.
(CO3)
***
37
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION- A.P
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
C20-MNG-101- ENGLISH
Time: 3hrs Max.Marks:80
PART-A 10X3=30 Marks

Instructions: Answer all the questions. Each question carries Three marks.
1. a) Fill in the blanks with suitable articles: (CO2)

I have seen _____________ European at ____________local market.
b) Fill in with proper form of adjective given in the bracket: (CO2)
China is the ___________country in the world. ( populous, more populous, most populous )
c) i) Choose the synonym from the following for the word : ‘filthy’ (CO3)
dirty / clean / hygienic / tidy
ii) Choose the antonym from the following for the word: ‘exterior’ (CO3)
external / internal / open / interior
2. a) i) Give prefix for the word: ‘popular’ (CO2)

ii) Write suffix for the word : ‘king’ (CO2)
b) He was married ______ her ______ January 2015. ( Fill in with appropriate preposition) (CO3)
c) Match the words in column A with their corresponding meanings in column B: (CO2)
Column-A Column-B
i) Dynamic a) tasty
ii) Gloomy b) active
c) sad
d) proud
3. a) The old man hunted for his spectacles. ( Give the contextual meaning of the word in italics)
(CO3)
b) The committee / have submitted / its report / to the President. ( identify the part
which contains an error ) (CO3)
c) Recently has a scooter purchased Shanthi. ( Rearrange the jumbled words to make
a meaningful sentence.) (CO3)
4. a) Use the following primary auxiliary verb in sentence of your own: (CO2)
‘ does’
b) Fill in the blank with proper modal auxiliary verb based on the clue in the bracket: (CO2)
Harish __________ speak four languages. ( ability)
c) Rakesh wants two hundred rupees from his father. (Write the sentence how he requests his
Father) (CO2)
5. Fill in the blanks with suitable form of the verb given in brackets: (CO2)
a) He ______ (go) for a walk daily.
b) The bus ________ (arrive) just now.
c) We _______ (live) in Chennai since 2005.
38
6. Change the voice of the following sentences: (CO2)
a) English is spoken all over the world.
b) They watched a movie yesterday.
c) The Chief Minister will inaugurate the exhibition.
7. a) It is a beautiful rainbow. ( Change into an exclamatory sentence) (CO3)

b) C.V. Raman won the Nobel Prize in 1930. ( Frame a question using ‘When’) (CO3)
c) He can swim across the river. ( change into ‘Yes / No’ question ) (CO3)
8. Change the speech of the following: (CO2)

a) He said, “I will go to Delhi tomorrow.”
b) Ravi said to Ashok, “ Where are you going?”
c) She told him to mind his own business.

a) In spite of being busy he attended the meeting. ( Rewrite the sentence using ‘though’ )
b) She is poor. She is honest. ( combine the two sentences using ‘but’)
c) On seeing the tiger, he climbed a tree. ( split into two simple sentences)
10. Rewrite the following sentences after making necessary corrections: (CO2)
a) We have gone to picnic yesterday.
b) Suresh watched T.V when I went to his house.
c) They left Gujarat before the earthquake occurred.
PART-B 5X8=40
Instructions: Answer the following questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks.
11. Write a paragraph in about 100 words on what you do daily. (CO3,CO4)
OR
Write a paragraph in about 100 words on the uses and misuses of social media.
12. Construct a dialogue of at least five turns between an American and you about places worth
visiting in your city. (CO3,CO4)
OR
Compose a dialogue of at least five turns between two friends, one favouring homemade food
and the other, fast foods.
13. Write a letter to your parents about your preparation for year-end examinations. (CO3,CO4)
OR
Write a letter to the editor of a newspaper about the inconvenience caused due to loud speakers
in your area.
14. Write an essay in about 120 words on measures to prevent water pollution.
OR
Write an essay in about 120 words on importance of gender equality.
39
15. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow: (CO3)
A farmer in ancient China had a neighbour who was a hunter, and who owned ferocious and poorly
trained hunting dogs. They jumped over the fence frequently and chased the farmer's lambs. The
farmer asked his neighbour to keep his dogs in check, but this fell on deaf ears. One day the dogs again
jumped the fence, attacked and severely injured several of the lambs.
The farmer had had enough, and went to town to consult a judge who listened carefully to the story
and said: "I could punish the hunter and instruct him to keep his dogs chained or lock them up. But you
would lose a friend and gain an enemy. Which would you rather have, friend or foe for a neighbour?"
The farmer replied that he preferred a friend. “Alright, I will offer you a solution that keeps your lambs
safe, and which will keep your a neighbour a friend." Having heard the judge's solution, the farmer
agreed.
Once at home, the farmer immediately put the judge's suggestions to the test. He took three of his
best lambs and presented them to his neighbour's three small sons, who were beside themselves with
joy and began to play with them. To protect his son's newly acquired playthings, the hunter built a
strong kennel for his dogs. Since then, the dogs never again bothered the farmer's lambs. Out of
gratitude for the farmer's generosity toward his sons, the hunter often shared the game he had hunted
with the farmer. The farmer reciprocated by sending the hunter the cheese he had made. Within a short
time the neighbours became good friends.
a) What kind of dogs does the neighbour have?

b) When did the farmer consult the judge?
c) What would be the consequence if the judge punished the neighbour?
d) What was the solution suggested by the judge?
e) What did the neighbour’s sons do with the gifts they received?
f) How did the dogs stop bothering the farmer’s lambs?
g) What items are exchanged happily between the two neighbours?
h) Pick the word from the passage that would mean: ‘a closed shelter for dogs’.
OR
Read the following short poem and answer the questions that follow:
Crisp in the winter’s morning,
Softly all through the night,
What is this without warning,
Falling and white?
I have never seen snow,

But I can imagine it quite –
Not how it tastes, but I know,
It falls and is white.
40
One morning I’ll open the door,
To bring in the morning’s milk,
And all around there’ll be snow –
Fallen and still.
How I’ll roll in the stuff!

How I’ll tumble and spin!
Until the neighbours cry,
Enough!And send me back in.
Q.1. What is the poem about?

2. How does snow fall?
3. Did you ever touch snow? How did you feel?
4. a) Pick the word from the poem that means ‘slip and fall’
b) Write the antonym for the word ‘soft’
SECTION – C
1X10=10 Marks
16. Write a report on the blood donation camp organized by International Red Cross Society in your
college. Use the following clues: date, time, place, arrangements, donors, equipment, doctors,
response, sponsors, snacks, volunteers, help others, save lives…etc.
***
41
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Code Periods/week periods
Engineering
MNG-102 5 150 20 80
Mathematics-I
S.No. Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped
1 Algebra 31 CO1
2 Trigonometry 44 CO2
3 Co-ordinate Geometry 23 CO3
4 Differential Calculus 33 CO4
5 Applications of Differentiation 19 CO4, CO5
Total Periods 150
Course Objectives (i) To apply the principles of Algebra, Trigonometry and Co-Ordinate Geometry
to real-time problems in engineering.
(ii) To comprehend and apply the concept of Differential Calculus in engineering
applications.
CO1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems on
matrices.
Course Outcomes
CO2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their inverses
and complex numbers.
CO3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic sections
in coordinate system.
CO4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.
CO5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.
42
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES
Learning Outcomes
UNIT - I
C.O. 1 Identify various functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems on matrices.
L.O. 1.1 Define Set, ordered pairs and Cartesian product - examples.
1.2 Explain Relations and functions – examples
1.3 Find Domain & Range of functions – simple examples.
1.4 Classify types of functions (into, many-to-one, one-one, onto and bijective).
1.5 Define inverse functions - examples.
1.6 Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.
1.7 Explain the procedure of resolving rational fractions of the type mentioned
below into partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii)
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )
f ( x) f ( x)
iii) iv)
( x  a 2 )(bx  c)
2
( x  a )( x 2  b2 )
2 2
1.8 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.

1.9 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3rd order square matrices).
1.10 Compute sum, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Illustrate the properties of these
operations such as associative, distributive, commutative properties with examples and
counter examples.
1.11 Define the transpose of a matrix and write its properties;
1.12 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices with examples Resolve a square matrix into a
sum of a symmetric and skew- symmetric matrices and provide examples.
1.13 Define determinant of a square matrix, minor, co-factor of an element of a 3x3 square matrix
with examples. Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix using Laplace expansion formula. State
and apply the properties of determinants to solve problems.
1.14 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices. Define multiplicative inverse of a matrix and list
properties of adjoint and inverse. Compute adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square
matrix.
1.15 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule and matrix inversion
method.
UNIT - II
C.O.2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their inverses and complex numbers.
L.O. 2.1 Define trigonometric ratios of any angle.
2.2 List the values of trigonometric ratios at specified values.
2.3 Draw graphs of trigonometric functions.
2.4 Explain periodicity of trigonometric functions.
2.5 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B),tan(A±B) and cot(A±B).
2.6 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150,
cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
2.7 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.
2.8 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
2.9 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc. and sub multiple angles
A/2 in terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
43
2.10 Derive useful allied formulas like sin2A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.
2.11 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed
2.12 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios into a
product and vice versa, examples on these formulae.
2.13 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of three or
more terms.
2.14 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an appropriate
domain and range.
2.15 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
2.16 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that given A= sin-1x, express
angle A in terms of other inverse trigonometric functions with examples.
2.17 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like

sin-1x+cos-1 x = etc.
2
1 1 1  x y 
2.18 Apply formulae like tan x  tan y  tan   , where x  0, y  0, xy  1 etc.,
 1  xy 
to solve Simple problems.
2.19 Explain what is meant by solutions of trigonometric equations and find the general
solutions of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate examples.
2.20 Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0, a cos x + b sin x=c etc., and problems using
simple transformations.
2.21 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule.
2.22 Explain the formulae for sin A/2, cos A/2, tan A/2 and cot A/2 in terms of semi-perimeter s
and sides a,b,c and solve problems.
2.23 List various formulae for the area of a triangle.
2.24 Solve problems using the above formulae.
2.25 Define Sinh x, cosh x and tanh x and list the hyperbolic identities.
2.26 Represent inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
2.27 Define complex number, its modulus , conjugate and list their properties.
2.28 Define the operations on complex numbers with examples.
2.29 Define amplitude of a complex number.
2.30 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential (Euler) form with examples.
2.31 Write DeMoivre’s theorem (without proof) and illustrate with simple examples.
UNIT - III
Coordinate Geometry
C.O. 3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic sections in coordinate system.
L.O. 3.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – general form, point-slope form, slope-
intercept form, two-point form, intercept form and normal form or perpendicular
form.
3.2 Solve simple problems on the above forms.
3.3 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of
two non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
3.4 Define locus of a point and define a circle.
3.5 Write the general equation of a circle and find the centre and radius.
44
3.6 Find the equation of a circle given (i) centre and radius, (ii) two ends of a diameter
(iii) Centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three non collinear points.
3.7 Define a conic section.
3.8 Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus rectum of a conic with illustrations.
3.9 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given.
3.10 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola in standard forms
whose axes are along co-ordinate axes and solve simple examples on above.
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed
C.O.4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.

L.O. 4.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of lim f ( x)  l and state the
xa
properties of limits.
f ( x) f ( x)
4.2 Evaluate the limits of the type lim and lim
x l g ( x) x  g ( x )
xn  an sin x tan x a x 1
4.3 Mention the Standard limits lim , lim , lim , lim ,
xa x  a x 0 x x 0 x x 0 x
1
ex 1
x
 1
lim , lim (1  x) x , lim 1   (without proof) and solve the problems
x 0 x x 0 x   x
using these standard limits.
4.4 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an interval
with some examples whether a given function is continuous or not.
4.5 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle as
f ( x  h)  f ( x) and also provide standard notations to denote the
lim
h 0 h
derivative of a function.
4.6 State the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
4.7 Find the derivatives of elementary functions like xn , ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x,
tanx, Secx, Cosecx and Cot x using the first principles.
4.8 Find the derivatives of simple functions from the first principle .
4.9 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication,
product and quotient of functions with illustrative and simple examples.
4.10 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples.
4.11 Find the derivatives of Inverse Trigonometric functions and examples using the
Trigonometric transformations.
4.12 Explain the method of differentiation of a function with respect to another
function and also differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
4.13 Find the derivatives of hyperbolic functions.
4.14 Explain the procedures for finding the derivatives of implicit function with
examples.
4.15 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions with examples like
[f(x)]g(x).
4.16 Explain the concept of finding the higher order derivatives of second and third order with
examples.
4.17 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, partial derivatives anddifference
between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
4.18 Explain the definition of Homogenous function of degree n.
4.19 Explain Euler’s theorem for homogeneous functions with applications to simple problems.
45
C.O. 5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.
L.O.5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative as the slope of the tangent to the
curve y=f(x) at any point on the curve.
5.2 Explain the concept of derivative to find the slope of tangent and to find the equation of tangent
and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
5.3 Find the lengths of tangent, normal, sub-tangent and sub normal at any point on the curve y=f(x) .
5.4 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity and
acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
5.5 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like volumes, areas
vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
5.6 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions.
5.7 Explain the conditions to find points where the given function is increasing or decreasing with
illustrative examples.
5.8 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of single
variable- simple problems yielding maxima and minima.
5.9 Solve problems on maxima and minima in applications like finding areas, volumes etc.
5.10 Apply the concept of derivatives to find the errors and approximations in simple problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-III completed
CO/PO – Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 1 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 2 3 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 2 1
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.6 2.5 2 3 2.4 2
3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 =moderately mapped (Medium), 1 =slightly mapped (Low)
46
Note:
teacher.
conducted.
PSO1: An ability to understand the concepts of basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in
various areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and
electronic systems and all concerned engineering disciplines.
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tool, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.
PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.
PO- CO – Mapping strength

PO no Mapped with CO CO periods addressing PO in Level Remarks
no column I
(1,2 or 3)
No %
1 CO1, CO2, 150 100% 3

CO3,CO4,CO5
>40% Level 3
2 CO1, CO2, 138 92% 3
Highly
CO3,CO4,CO5
addressed
3 CO1, CO2, 133 88.6% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5
25% to 40%
4 CO1, CO2, 120 80% 3
Level 2
CO3,CO4,CO5
Moderately
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, 150 100% 3 addressed
CO3,CO4,CO5
PSO 2 CO1, CO2, 135 90% 3

5% to 25%
CO3,CO4,CO5
Level 1 Low
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, 125 83.3% 3 addressed
CO3,CO4,CO5
<5% Not
addressed
47
COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES
COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Relations and Functions:
Define Set, Ordered pairs, Cartesian product, Relations, functions, domain & range of functions. Describe
types of functions (in-to, many-to-one, one-one, onto and bijective) and inverse functions – examples.
2. Partial Fractions:
Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolve rational fractions
in to their partial fractions covering the types mentioned below.
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii)
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )
f ( x) f ( x)
iii) iv)
( x  a 2 )(bx  c)
2
( x  a )( x 2  b2 )
2 2
3. Matrices:
Definition of a matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-equality of two matrices, sum,
scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix-Symmetric, skew symmetric
matrices-Minor, cofactor of an element-Determinant of a square matrix-Laplace’s expansion, properties
of determinants. Singular and non-singular matrices-Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix-
examples-System of linear equations in 3 variables-Solutions by Cramers’s rule and Matrix inversion
method-examples.
Unit-II
Trigonometry
4. Trigonometric ratios:
Definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric ratios at specified values, draw
graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of trigonometric functions.
5. Compound angles:
Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B),cot(A±B),and related identities with problems.
6. Multiple and sub multiple angles:
Formulae for trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A, 3A and sub multipleangles A/2
with problems.
7. Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice versa simple problems
8. Inverse trigonometric functions:
Definition, domains and ranges-basic properties- problems.
9. Trigonometric equations:
Concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of trigonometric equations:
sinx =k , cosx= k, tanx =k, where k is a constant. Solutions of simple quadratic equations, equations
involving usage of transformations- problems.
10.Properties of triangles:
Relation between sides and angles of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule-
area of a triangle- problems.
11. Hyperbolic functions:
Definitions of hyperbolic functions, identities of hyperbolic functions, inverse hyperbolic
functions and expression of inverse hyperbolic functions in terms of logarithms.
48
12. Complex Numbers:
Definition of a complex number, Modulus and conjugate of a complex number, Arithmetic
operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form , Exponential form (Euler
form) of a complex number- Problems. DeMoivre’s theorem.
UNIT-III
Coordinate geometry
13 Straight lines: various forms of straight lines, angle between lines, perpendicular distance
from a point, distance between parallel lines-examples.
14. Circle: locus of a point, Circle, definition-Circle equation given (i) centre and radius, (ii)
two ends of a diameter (iii) centre and a point on the circumference (iv) three
non collinear points - general equation of a circle – finding centre, radius.
15. Definition of a conic section, equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity
are given. properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard forms.
UNIT-IV
Differential Calculus:
16. Concept of Limit- Definition- Properties of Limits and Standard Limits -Simple Problems-
Continuity of a function at a point- Simple Examples only.
17. Concept of derivative- Definition (first principle)- different notations-derivatives of elementary
functions- problems. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar multiplication of functions -
problems. Chain rule, derivatives of inverse trigonometric functions, derivative of a function
with respect to another function, derivative of parametric functions, derivative of hyperbolic,
implicit functions, logarithmic differentiation – problems in each case. Higher order derivatives -
examples – functions of several variables - partial differentiation, Euler’s theorem-simple
problems.
UNIT-V
Applications of Derivatives:
18. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of Tangent and normal to a curve at any point.
Lengths of tangent, normal, sub tangent and subnormal to the curve at any point - problems.
19. Physical applications of the derivative – velocity, acceleration, derivative as a rate measure –
Problems.
20. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing functions,
finding the maxima and minima of simple functions - problems leading to applications of maxima
and minima.
21. Using the concept of derivative of a function of single variable, find the absolute error, relative
and percentage errors and approximate values due to errors in measuring.
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. Shanti Narayan, A Textbook of matrices, S.Chand &Co.
2. Robert E. Moyer & Frank Ayers Jr., Schaum’s Outline of Trigonometry, 4th Edition, Schaum’s Series
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook, Mir Publishers, Moscow.
4. Frank Ayers & Elliott Mendelson, Schaum’s Outline of Calculus, Schaum’s Series.
49
Engineering Mathematics – I
Blue print
S. Chapter/ No of Periods Wei Marks wise distribution Question COs

No ghta of weight age mapp
Unit title wise distribution
ge ed
Allot of weight age

ted
Unit - I : Theory Practice R U Ap An R U Ap An

Algebra
1 Relations and 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO 1
Functions
2 Partial Fractions 3 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO 1
3 Matrices and 10 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO 1
Determinants
Unit - II : Trigonometry
4 Trigonometric 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Ratios
5 Compound 3 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Angles
6 Multiple and 4 4 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2
Submultiple
angles
7 Transformations 3 3 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO2
8 Inverse 3 2
Trigonometric
Functions
9 Trigonometric 3 2 8 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 CO2
Equations
10 Properties of 3 2
triangles
11 Hyperbolic 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CO2
Functions
12 Complex 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO2
Numbers
50
Unit III : Co-ordinate Geometry
13 Straight Lines 4 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 CO3
14 Circle 3 2 8 0 8 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO3
15 Conic Sections 8 4
Unit – IV : Differential Calculus
16 Limits and 4 2 3 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 CO4

Continuity
17 Differentiation 17 10 14 3 11 0 0 1 2 0 0 CO4
Unit - V : Applications of Differentiation
18 Geometrical 3 2 10 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 1 CO5
Applications
19 Physical 2 2
Applications
20 Maxima and 3 4
Minima
21 Errors and 2 1
Approximations
Total 89 61 80 15 39 16 10 5 8 2 1
R: Remembering Type : 15 Marks

U: understanding Type : 39 Marks
Ap: Application Type : 16 Marks
An: Analysing Type : 10 Marks
Engineering Mathematics – I
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O. 1.1 to L.O. 2.11
Unit Test-II From L.O. 2.12 to L.O. 3.10
Unit Test-III From L.O.4.1 to L.O. 5.10
51
Unit Test I C –20, MNG-102
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A. P
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-I
Sub Code: MNG-102
Time : 90 minutes Max.marks:40
Part-A 16Marks
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions.

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks
each.
1. Answer the following.
a. If f ( x)  x and domain  1, 0,1 , then find range.

2
(CO1)
1 2
b. If A    , then find 3A. (CO1)
3 4 
c. Write the value of Sin1200 (CO2)
d. Write the formula for tan 2A in terms of tan A (CO2)
2. If f : R  R is defined by f ( x)  3x  5 , then prove that f ( x) is onto. (CO1)

1 3   2 4
3. If A    B   3 1  then find 2 A  3B (CO1)
 4 9 
,
 
3
Prove that Sin 45  Sin 15 
2 0 2 0
4. (CO2)
4
sin 2 A
5. Prove that  cot A (CO2)
1  cos 2 A
Part-B 3×8=24

(2) Each question carries eight marks
(3) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation
is the content but not the length of the answer.
2x
6. A) Resolve into partial fractions. (CO1)
( x  1)( x  3)
or
52
x4
B) Resolve into partial fractions. (CO1)
x  3x  2
2
7. A) Using Cramer’s rule to solve

x  y  z  2, 2 x  3 y  4 z  4,3x  y  z  8 (CO1)
or
bc bc 1
B) Prove that ca c  a 1  (a  b)(b  c)(c  a) (CO1)
ab a  b 1
 1 2 2 
8. A) Find the adjoint of Matrix  1 3 5  (CO1)
 
 2 7 4 
or
 2 3 4  3 1 5
B) If A  5 7 9 ; B   2 1 4  , find AB and BA and verify if AB  BA .
 
   
 2 1 3   0 3 1 
(CO1)
-o0o-
53
Unit Test II C –20, MNG -102
First Year
Sub Code: MNG- 102
Time : 90 minutes Max.Marks:40
Part-A 16Marks

each
CD CD
a. sin C  sin D  2cos   sin   : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
 2   2 
b. If z  2  3i , then find z (CO2)
e x  e x
c. sinh x  : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
2
d. Write the eccentricity of rectangular hyperbola. (CO3)
2. Express (3  4i)(7  2i) in terms of a  ib (CO2)
3. Find the perpendicular distance from (1,1) to the line 2 x  3 y  1  0 (CO3)
4. Find the angle between lines 2 x  y  3  0 and x  y  2  0 (CO3)
Find the centre and radius of the circle x  y  2 x  4 y  4  0

2 2
5. (CO3)
54
Part-B 3×8=24

sin 2  sin 4  sin 6

6. A) Prove that  tan 4 . (CO2)
cos 2  cos 4  cos 6
or
1 1 1 
B) Prove that tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  (CO2)
2 5 8 4
7. A) Solve 2sin 2   sin   1  0 (CO2)

or
c a
In any ABC , If B  60 then
0
B)  1 (CO2)
ab bc
8. A) Find the equation of circle with (2,3) and (6,9) as the end points of diameter and
also find centre and radius of circle. (CO3)
or
B) Find the equation of ellipse whose focus is (1, 1) , directrix is x  y  3  0 and
eccentricity is1/2. (CO3)
-o0o-
55
Unit Test III C –20, MNG -102
First Year
Sub Code: MNG-102
Part-A 16Marks
each
x2  1
a. Find lim (CO4)
x 1 x5
sin 2
b. lim  2 : State TRUE/FALSE (CO4)
 0 
c.
d
dx
 3 tan 1 x   ? (CO4)
d. Formula for percentage error in x is _________ (CO5)
x5  32
2. Evaluate lim (CO4)
x 2 x2  4
Find the derivative of 3tan x  4log x  7 w.r.t. x

x
3. (CO4)
4. Differentiate x 2 sin x w.r.t. x (CO4)
2x  3
5. Find the derivative of (CO4)
3x  4
56
Part-B 3×8=24

1 2x  1  2 x 
6. A) Find the derivative of sin  2 
w.r.t. tan  2 
(CO4)
 1 x   1 x  .
OR
dy
if y  x
cos x
B) Find (CO4)
dx
x4  y 4
7. A) Verify Euler’s theorem when u ( x, y )  (CO4)
x y
OR
Find the equation of tangent and normal to the curve 3 y  x  6 x  17 at (4,3)

2
B)
(CO5)
8. A) Circular patch of oil spreads on water and the area is growing at the rate of 8 sqcm / min .
How fast is the radius increasing when radius is 5cm . (CO5)
OR
Find the maxima and minima values of f ( x)  x  6 x  9 x  15.

3 2
B) (CO5)
-o0o-
57
END-EXAM MODEL PAPERS
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, A.P
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS MNG- 102
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- I MAX.MARKS : 80M
PART-A
Answer All questions. Each question carries THREE marks. 10x3=30M
    
1. If A  0, , , ,  and f : A  B is a function such that f ( x)  cos x, then find the range of
 6 4 3 2
f . CO 1
x
2. Resolve the function into partial fractions. CO1
 x 1 x  2
3 9 0  4 0 2
3. If A    and B   , find A  B and A  B. CO1
1 8  2 7 1 4 
4. Show that cos16  sin16  tan 610.

0 0
CO2
cos16  sin16
0 0
5. Prove that sin 2  cot  . CO2

1  cos2
 1 i 
6. Find the modulus of the complex number  . CO2
 2i 
7. Find the distance between parallel lines x  2 y  3  0 and x  2 y  8  0. CO3

8. Find lim sin77 x . CO4
x0 sin11x
9. Differentiate 3tan x  4log x  7 x2 w.r.t. x. CO4
10. If x  at 2 , y  2at , then find dy

. CO4
dx
PART-B
Answer All questions. Each question carries EIGHT marks. 5x8=40M
3 3 4
11 A) Find the inverse of the matrix  2 3 4  . CO1

0 1 1 
Or
B) Solve the system of equations x  y  z  6, x  y  z  2 and 2x  y  3z  9 by

Cramer’s rule. CO1
58
12 A) If cos x  cos y  3 and cos x  cos y  2 , then show that CO2
5 7
x y  x y
21tan  10cot    0.
 2   2 
Or
B) If tan1 x  tan1 y  tan1 z   then show that x  y  z  xyz. CO2
13 A) Solve 3cos  sin 1. CO2

Or
B) In any  ABC, Show that cot A  cot B  cot C  s .

2
CO2
2 2 2 
14 A) Find the equation of the circle with  4,2 and 1,5 as the two ends of its
diameter and also find its centre and radius. CO3
Or
B) Find the centre, vertices, equation of axes, lengths of axes, eccentricity, foci, equations
of directrices and length of latus rectum of the ellipse 4x2 16 y 2  1. CO3
 2x   2x 
15 A) Find the derivative of sin 1  w.r.t. tan 1  CO4
2 2
 1 x   1 x 
Or
  y3 
3
u u
B) If u  tan 1  x  , then prove that x y  sin 2u. CO4
 x y  x y
PART-C
Answer the following question. Question carries TEN marks. 1x10=10M

16. The sum of two numbers is 24. Find them so that the sum of their squares is minimum. CO5
***
59
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- II MAX.MARKS : 80M
PART-A
tan x a x 1 ex 1
1. If lim , is a bijective function such that lim , then find lim , CO1
x 0 x x 0 x x 0 x
1
2. Resolve the function lim (1  x) x , into partial fractions. CO1
x 0
 1
x
f ( x  h)  f ( x )
3. If lim 1   is a skew-symmetric matrix, find the value of lim CO1
x   x h 0 h
4. Find the value of i) f ( x)

(ax  b)(cx  d )
CO2
5. Prove that ii) f ( x)

CO2
(ax  b)2 (cx  d )
6. Find the conjugate of the complex number  3  2i  . 4  7i  CO2

f ( x)
7. Find the equation of the line passing through the points iv) and  3, 4  .
( x 2  a 2 )( x 2  b2 )
CO3
8. Find  1,0,1 , CO4
9. Differentiatew.r.t. x. CO4
10. If tan 2A then find tan A and f : R  R CO4
PART-B
11 A) Show that f ( x)  3 x  5 CO1
Or
1 3 
B) Solve the system of equations f ( x) and A    using matrix inversion method. CO1
 4 9 
 2 4
12 A) Prove that B   
 3 1 
CO2
60
Or
B) Prove that 2 A  3B CO2
3
13 A) Solve Sin 45  Sin 15 
2 0 2 0
4 CO2
Or
B) In any  ABC, Show that 2x

( x  1)( x  3) CO2
14 A) Find the equation of the circle passing through the points x  4 and
x  3x  2
2
x  y  z  2, 2 x  3 y  4 z  4,3x  y  z  8 CO3
Or
bc b  c 1
B) Find the equation of the rectangular hyperbola whose focus is ca c  a 1  (a  b)(b  c)(c  a)
ab a  b 1
 1 2 2 
 
and directrix is 1 3 5
  CO3
 2 7 4 
 2 3 4  3 1 5
15 A) If A   5 7 9  then prove that B   2 1 4 
    CO4
 2 1 3   0 3 1 
Or
CD CD
B) If AB  BA then prove that sin C  sin D  2cos   sin   CO4
 2   2 
PART-C

16 Show that the semi-vertical angle of the cone of maximum volume and of given slant
height is z  2  3i CO4
***
61
No. of Periods Total No. of
Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
per week Periods
Engineering
MNG-103 4 120 20 80
Physics
S. No Unit Title/Chapter No of Periods COs Mapped
1 Units and Dimensions 08 CO1

2 Elements of Vectors 12 CO1
3 Dynamics 12 CO2
4 Friction 10 CO2
5 Work, Power and Energy 12 CO3
6 Simple harmonic motion 12 CO3
7 Heat and Thermodynamics 12 CO4
8 Sound 10 CO4
9 Properties of matter 10 CO5
10 Electricity and Magnetism 12 CO5
11 Modern physics 10 CO5
Total 120
Course Title: Engineering Physics

1. To familiarize with the concepts of Physics involved in the process
of various Engineering, Industrial and Daily life Applications.
2. To understand and apply the basic principles of physics in the field
Course Objectives of engineering and technology to familiarize certain natural
phenomenon occurring in the day to day life
3. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises
62
Explain S.I units and dimensions of different physical quantities, basic
CO1
operations among vector quantities.
Explain the motion of objects moving in one dimension and two dimensions,
CO2 the causes of motion and hindrance to the motion of the objects especially
with respect to friction.
Explain the mechanical energy of bodies like PE, KE and conservation law of
CO3
energy, the properties of simple harmonic motion.
Explain gas laws, ideal gas equation, Isothermal and adiabatic processes,
Course Specific heats, to study the laws of thermodynamics. Causes, consequences and
CO4
Outcomes methods to minimise noise pollution, explain beats, Doppler effect,
Reverberation, echoes.
Explain certain properties of solids, liquids like elastic properties, viscosity and
surface tension. Explain Ohm’s law, to study Kirchoff’s laws, to study the
principle of Wheatstone’s bridge and its application to meter bridge. To study
CO5 the magnetic force and understand magnetic field. To compute magnetic field
strength on axial and equatorial lines of a bar magnet. To familiarise with
modern topics like photoelectric effect, optical fibres, superconductivity and
nanotechnology.
COS, POS, PSOS MAPPING
 POs mapping strength (as per given table)
CO1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 2 1 1
3 = strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped
Note:
The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visits vii) Tech
Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussion x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books
63
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Concept of Units and dimensions

1.1 Explain the concept of Units, Physical quantity, F u n d a m e n t a l physical quantities and
D erived physical quantities
1.2 Define unit, fundamental units and derived units, State SI units with symbols
1.3 State Multiples and submultiples in SI system, State Rules of writing S.I. units, State
advantages of SI units
1.4 Define Dimensions, W r i t e Dimensional formulae of physical quantities
1.5 List dimensional constants and dimensionless quantities
1.6 State the principle of homogeneity of dimensions
1.7 State the applications and limitations of dimensional analysis
1.8 Errors in measurement, Absolute error, relative error, percentage error, significant figures
1.9 Solve problems
2.0 Concept of Elements of Vectors

2.1 Explain the concept of scalars, Vectors and give examples
2.2 Represent vectors graphically, Classify the Vectors, Resolve the vectors
2.3 Determine the resultant of a vector by component method, represent a vector in
Space using unit vectors (i, j, k)
2.4 State and explain triangle law, parallelogram law, and polygon law of addition of
Vectors
2.5 Define Dot product of two vectors with examples (Work done, Power), mention the
Properties of dot product
2.6 Define cross product of two vectors with examples (Torque, Linear velocity)
Mention the properties of Cross product.
2.7 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
3.0 Concept of Dynamics

3.1 Write the equations of motion in a straight line. Explain the acceleration due to
Gravity.
3.2 Explain vertical motion of a body and derive expressions for a) Maximum Height,
b) Time of ascent, c) time of descent, and d) time of flight
3.3 Derive height of a tower when a body projected vertically upwards from the top of
a tower.
3.4 Explain projectile motion with examples
3.5 Explain horizontal projection and derive an expression for the path of a projectile in
horizontal projection
3.6 Explain oblique projection and derive an expression for it. Derive formulae for
a) Maximum Height b) time of ascent c) time of descent and d) time of flight
e) Horizontal Range, f) Maximum range
3.7 Define force, momentum, angular displacement, angular velocity, angular
acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia, torque
3.8 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
64
4.0 Concept of Friction
4.1 Define friction and classify the types of friction.
4.2 Explain the concept of normal reaction.
4.3 State the laws of friction.
4.4 Define coefficients of friction, Angle of friction and angle of repose.
4.5 Derive expressions for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined plane.
(Upwards and downwards)
4.6 List the advantages and disadvantages of friction.
4.7 Mention the methods of minimizing friction.
4.8 Explain why it is easy to pull a lawn roller than to push it.
4.9 Solve t h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems.
5.0 Concepts of Work, Power, and Energy

5.1 Definet h e t e r m s W ork, Power and Energy. State SI units and dimensionalFormulae.
5.2 Define potential energy and give examples, derive an expression for potential energy.
5.3 Define Kinetic energy and give examples, derive an expression for kinetic energy.
5.4 State and derive Work-Energy theorem.
5.5 Derive the relation between Kinetic energy and momentum.
5.6 State the law of conservation of energy and verify it in the case of a freely falling |body.
6.0 Concepts of Simple harmonic motion

6.1 Define Simple harmonic motion, Give examples, state the conditions.
6.2 Explanation of uniform circular motion of a particle is a combination of two perpendicular
S.H.M.s.
6.3 Derive expressions for displacement, velocity, acceleration, Frequency, Time
period of a particle executing SHM.
6.4 Define phase of SHM.
6.5 Define Ideal simple pendulum and derive expression for time period of simple pendulum.
6.6 State the laws of motion of simple pendulum.
7.0 Concept of heat and thermodynamics

7.1 Explain the concept of expansion of gases
7.2 State and explain Boyle’s and Charles laws.
7.3 Define absolute zero temperature, absolute scale of temperature
7.4 Define ideal gas and distinguish from real gas
7.5 Derive I deal gas equation. Define specific gas constant and universal gas
constant, write S.I unit and dimensional formula. Calculate the value of R.
7.6 Explain why universal gas constant is same for all gases
7.7 State and explain isothermal process a n d adiabatic process
7.8 State first and second laws of thermodynamics and state applications
7.9 Define specific heats and molar specific heats of a gas, Derive CP-CV =R
7.10 Solve t h e r e l e v a n t n u m e r i c a l problems
65
8.0 Concept of Sound
8.1 Concept of the sound, Wave motion. (longitudinal and transverse wave)
8.2 Distinguish between musical sound and noise.
8.3 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for intensity level of sound.
8.4 Explain causes, effects and methods of minimizing of noise pollution.
8.5 Explain the phenomenon of beats state the applications.
8.6 Define Doppler effect, list the applications.
8.7 Define reverberation and reverberation time and write Sabine’s formula.
8.8 Define and explain echoes state its applications.
8.9 State conditions of good auditorium.
9.0 Concepts of properties of matter

9.1 Explain the terms elasticity, stress, strain and types of stress and strain.
9.2 State and explain Hooke’s law.
9.3 Definitions of Modulus of elasticity, Young’s modulus(Y), Bulk modulus (K),
Rigidity modulus ( n),Poisson’s ratio (),
9.4 Define surface tension and give examples.
9.5 Explain Surface tension with reference to molecular theory.
9.6 Define angle of contact and capillarity and write formula for Surface Tension.
9.7 Explain the concept of viscosity, give examples, write Newton’s formula.
9.8 Define co-efficient of viscosity and write its units and dimensional formulaand
State Poiseulle’s equation for Co-efficient of viscosity.
9.9 Explain the effect of temperature on viscosity of liquids and gases.
10. Concepts of Electricity and Magnetism

10.1 E xplain Ohm’s law in electricity a n d w r i t e t h e f o r m u l a .
10.2 Define specific resistance, conductance and state their units.
10.3 Explain Kichoff’s laws.
10.4 Describe Wheatstone’s bridge with legible sketch.
10.5 Describe Meter Bridge for the determination of resistivity with a circuit diagram.
10.6 Explain the concept of magnetism. State the Coulomb’s inverse square law of
Magnetism.
10.7 Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force and write the properties of magnetic lines
of force.
10.8 Derive an expression for the moment of couple on a bar magnet placed in a uniform magnetic field.
10.9 Derive equations for Magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line
and on the equatorial line of a bar magnet.
10.10 Solvet h e r e l a t e d n u m e r i c a l problems
66
11.0 Concepts of modern physics
11.1 State and explain Photo-electric effect and Write Einstein‘s photo electric
Equation.
11.2 State laws of photo electric effect.
11.3 Explain the Working of photo electric cell, write its applications.
11.4 Recapitulation of refraction of light and its laws, critical angle, total Internal
Reflection.
11.5 Explain the principle and working of Optical fiber, mention different types of
Optical fiber, state the applications.
11.6 Define super conductor and super conductivity and mention examples.
11.7 State the properties of super conducting materials and list the applications.
11.8 Nanotechnology definition, nano materials, applications.
COURSECONTENT
1. Units and Dimensions:

Introduction, Physical quantity, Fundamental and Derived quantities, Fundamental and Derived
units, SI units, Multiples and Sub multiples, Rules for writing S.I. units, Advantages of SI units.
Dimensions and Dimensional formulae, Dimensional constants and Dimensionless quantities,
Principle of homogeneity, Advantages and limitations of dimensional analysis, Errors in
measurement, Absolute error, relative error, percentage error, significant figures, Problems.
2. Elements of Vectors:
Scalars and Vectors, Types of vectors (Proper Vector, Null Vector, Unit Vector, Equal, Negative Vector,
Like Vectors, Co-Initial Vectors, Co-planar Vectors and Position Vector).Addition of vectors,
Representation of vectors, Resolution of vectors, Parallelogram, Triangle and Polygon laws of
vectors, Subtraction of vectors, Dot and Cross products of vectors-Problems.
3. Dynamics
Introduction-Concept of acceleration due to gravity-Equations of motion for a freely falling body and
for a body thrown up vertically- Projectiles- Horizontal and Oblique projections- Expressions for
maximum height, time of flight, range-Define force, momentum, angular displacement, angular
velocity, angular acceleration, angular momentum, moment of inertia, torque–problems.
4. Friction:
Introduction to friction- Causes- Types of friction- Laws of friction- Angle of repose-Angle of friction-
rough inclined plane- Advantages and disadvantages of friction-Methods of reducing friction–
Problems.
5. Work, Power and Energy:

Work, Power and Energy- Definitions and explanation- potential energy- kinetic energy-Derivations
of Potential and Kinetic energies-K.E and Momentum relation - Work-Energy theorem- Law of
Conservation of energy- Problems.
6. Simple Harmonic Motion:

Introduction- Conditions of SHM- Definition- Examples- Expressions for displacement, velocity,
acceleration, Time period, frequency and phase in SHM- Time period of a simple pendulum- Laws of
simple pendulum-seconds pendulum-Problems.
67
7. Heat and Thermodynamics:
Expansion of Gases, Boyle’s law, absolute scale of temperature- Charles laws- Ideal gas equation-
Universal gas constant- Differences between gas constant(r) and universal gas
constant(R),Isothermal and adiabatic processes, Laws of thermodynamics, Specific heats - molar
specific heats of a gas -Different modes of transmission of heat ,laws of thermal conductivity,
Coefficient of thermal conductivity-Problems.
8. Sound:
Sound- Nature of sound- Types of wave motion -musical sound and noise- Noise pollution – Causes
&effects- Methods of reducing noise pollution- Beats- Doppler effect- Echo- Reverberation-
Reverberation time-Sabine ‘s formula-Conditions of good auditorium- Problems.
9. Properties of matter
Definition of Elasticity –Definition of stress and strain -th e u n i t s a n d d i m e n s i o n a l f o r m u l a e
f o r s t r e s s a n d s t r a i n - T he Hooke’s law-Definitions of Modulus of elasticity, Young’s modulus(Y),
Bulk modulus(K), Rigidity modulus ( n),Poisson’s ratio (), relation between Y, K, n and (equations
only no derivation)
Definition of surface tension-Explanation of Surface tension with reference to molecular theory -
Definition of angle of contact -Definition of capillarity -The formula for surface tension based on
capillarity - Explanation of concept of Viscosity - Examples for surface tension and Viscosity -
Newton’s formula for viscous force- Definition of co-efficient of viscosity- The effect of temperature
on viscosity of liquids and gases - Poiseuille’s equation for Co-efficient of viscosity- Th e r e l a t e d
n u m e r i c a l problems.
10. Electricity & Magnetism:

Ohm’s law and explanation, Specific resistance, Kirchoff’s laws, Wheatstone’s bridge, Meter
bridge, Coulomb’s inverse square law, magnetic field, magnetic lines of force, magnetic induction
field strength- magnetic induction field strength at a point on the axial line - magnetic induction
field strength at a point on the equatorial line–problems.
11. Modern Physics;

Photoelectric effect –Einstein’s photoelectric equation-laws of photoelectric effect-photoelectric
cell–Applications of photo electric effect- Total internal reflection- fiber optics- -principle and working
of an optical fiber-types of optical fibers - Applications of optical fibers- superconductivity–
applications-Nanotechnology definition, nano materials, applications
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Telugu Academy ( English version ) Intermediate physics Volume-I & 2
2. Dr. S. L. Guptha and Sanjeev Guptha Unified physics Volume 1,2,3 and 4
3. Resnick& Holiday Text book of physics Volume I
4. Dhanpath Roy Text book of applied physics
5. D.A Hill Fiber optics
6. XI & XII Standard NCERT Text Books
68
 Model Blue Print with Weightage for Blooms category and questions for chapter and Cos
mapped
Marks wise Question wise
Mapped
Weight distribution of distribution of
S. No of with CO
Unit Title/Chapter age of Weightage Weightage
No Periods
marks
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Units and 0 0
1 08 03 3 0 0 1 0 0 CO1
Dimensions
Elements of 0
2 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 CO1
Vectors
3 Dynamics 12 11 3 8 0 0 1 1 0 * CO2
4 Friction 10 11 3 0 8 0 1 0 1 0 CO2
Work, Power and 0 0
5 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 0 CO3
Energy
Simple harmonic 0 *
6 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 0 CO3
motion
Heat and 0 *
7 12 11 0 8 3 0 1 1 CO4
Thermodynamics
8 Sound 10 11 0 8 3 0 0 1 1 0 CO4
Properties of 0 0
9 10 08 0 8 0 0 1 0 CO5
matter
Electricity and 0 0
10 12 14 6 0 8 2 0 1 CO5
Magnetism
0 0
11 Modern physics 10 08 0 8 0 0 1 0 CO5
*
Total 120 110 24 64 22 0 8 8 4
10
*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 3 or 6 or 7
 Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests
Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit Test – 1 From 1.1 to 4.9
 Model question paper for Unit Tests I,II,III with COs mapped
69
UNIT TEST–I
Model Question Paper (C-20)
ENGINEERING PHYSICS (MNG-103)
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks: 40
PART-A 16 Marks
(2) First question carries 4 marks and others carry 3 marks each.
(3) Answers for the Question numbers 2 to 5 should be brief and
straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.
1. i) The dimensional formula of force is ___________ (CO1)

ii) Which of the following is a scalar [ ] (CO1)
a) force b) work c) displacement d) velocity
iii) We can add a scalar to a vector (Yes / No) (CO1)
iv) Friction is a self-adjusting force. [True / False] (CO2)
2. Define dot product. Give one example. (CO1)
3. A force of 150 N acts on a particle at an angle of 30° to the horizontal. Find
the horizontal and vertical components of force. (CO1)
4. Define projectile. Give two examples. (CO2)
5. It is easier to pull a lawn roller than to push it. Explain (CO2)
PART—B 3x8=24
Instructions:(1) Answer all questions. Each question carries 8marks.
(2) Answer should be comprehensive and the criteria for
evaluation is content but not the length of the answer.
6) (A) Derive an expression for magnitude and direction of resultant of two

Vectors using parallelogram law of vectors (CO1)
OR
(B) Write any four properties of dot product and any four properties of
Cross product (CO1)
7) (A) Show that path of a projectile is a parabola in case of oblique

Projection. (CO2)
OR
(B) Derive the expression for range and time of flight of a projectile (CO2)
8) (A) State and explain polygon law of vector addition with a neat diagram (CO1)
OR
(B) Derive the equation for acceleration of a body on a rough inclined plane (CO2)
***
70
UNIT TEST –II
ENGINEERING PHYSICS (MNG–103)
PART –A 16 Marks
Straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.
1) i) The value of 1000 C is equal to ___________ in Kelvin scale of temperature (CO4)

ii) Write the S.I unit of power (CO3)
iii) A simple pendulum be used in artificial satellite (Yes / No) (CO3)
iv) Specific heat of a gas is constant for all gases in nature [True / False] (CO4)
2. Derive the relation between momentum and kinetic energy (CO3)
3. A girl is swinging by sitting in a swing, how the frequency changes if she
stands in the swing. (CO3)
4. Write the physical significance of universal gas constant. (CO4)
5. A body is projected in to the air in the vertically upward direction, find the
height at which its potential and kinetic energies are equal. (CO3)
PART—B 3x8=24 Marks

6) (A) State the law of conservation of energy and verify it in case of a freely
falling body. (CO3)
OR)
(B) State and prove work energy theorem. (CO3)
7) (A) Define ideal simple pendulum and derive the equation for time period
of a simple pendulum (CO3)
(OR)
(B) State the conditions for S.H.M, derive the equation for velocity for a
Particle in S.H.M. (CO3)
8) (A) Define ideal gas, show that for an ideal gas the difference in specific heats is equal to
universal gas constant (CO4)
(OR)
(B) State gas laws and derive the ideal gas equation (CO4)
***
71
UNIT TEST –III
ENGINEERING PHYSICS (MNG–103)
PART –A 16 Marks
straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences.
1) i) Photo electric cell converts light energy in to __________ energy (CO5)

ii) What is elastic limit ? (CO5)
iii) SI unit of Specific resistance is ------------ (CO5)
iv) Inside a bar magnet magnetic line of force will travel from North pole to South pole
[True / False] (CO5)
2. Distinguish between Musical sound and Noise (CO4)
3. What is the effect of temperature on Viscosity of liquids and gases (CO5)
4. The values of resistances P, Q, R are 50 Ω, 10Ω, 15 Ω respectively in the
balanced condition of Wheatstone bridge, find the unknown
resistance (CO5)
5. What is nanotechnology and write any two uses. (CO5)
PART—B 3x8=24 Marks

6) (A) Explain Surface Tension based on the molecular theory (CO5)

(OR)
(B) Define Reverberation and Reverberation Time. Derive Sabine formula
for reverberation time. (CO4)
7) (A) Derive the balancing condition of Wheatstone bridge with neat circuit
Diagram. (CO5)
(OR)
(B) Derive an expression for the magnetic induction field strength at a
point on the equatorial line of a bar magnet. (CO5)
8) (A) Describe an experiment to determine the specific resistance of a wire using meter
bridge. (CO5)
(OR)
(B) Explain the principle and working of an optical fiber. (CO5)
***
72
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–20)
FIRST YEAR EXAMINATION
MNG–103, ENGINEERING PHYSICS
Time : 3 hours ] [ Total Marks : 80M

PART—A 3×10=30

(2) Each question carries three marks.
(3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple
Sentences.
1. Write the dimensional formula of the following physical quantities (CO1)

(a) Velocity (b) Force (c) Angular momentum
2. Write any three properties of scalar product. (CO1)
3. Define projectile. Give two examples. (CO2)
4. It is easier to pull a lawn roller than to push it. Explain. (CO2)
5. Define potential energy and kinetic energy. (CO3)
6. For a body in simple harmonic motion velocity at mean position is 4m/s, if the time period is
3.14 s, find its amplitude. (CO3)
7. State first and second laws of thermodynamics. (CO4)
8. Write any three conditions of good auditorium (CO4)
9. Define ohmic and non-ohmic conductors. (CO5)
10. State Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism. (CO5)
PART—B 8 ×5= 40
Instructions: (1) Each question carries eight marks.
(2) Answers should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
But not the length of the answer.
11. A) Derive an expression for magnitude and direction of the resultant of two vectors using
Parallelogram law of vectors. (CO1)
OR
B) Show that path of a projectile is parabola in case of oblique projection and derive expression
for maximum height. (CO2)
12. A) Derive expression for acceleration of a body sliding downwards on a rough inclined
plane. (CO2)
OR
B) Verify the law of conservation of energy in case of a freely falling body. (CO3)
73
13. A) Derive an expression for velocity and acceleration of a particle performing simple harmonic
Motion. (CO3)
OR
B) Define ideal gas and derive ideal gas equation. (CO4)
14. A) Two tuning forks A and B produce 4 beats per second. On loading B with wax 6 beats are
produced. If the quantity of wax is reduced the number of beats drops to 4. If the frequency
of A is 326 Hz, find the frequency of B. (CO4)
OR
B) Explain surface tension based on molecular theory. Write three examples of surface tension.
(CO5)
15. A) Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheat stone’s bridge with a neat circuit
diagram. (CO5)
OR
B) Explain principle and working of optical fibers. Write any three applications . (CO5)
PART C 1 x 10 = 10
16) Derive relationship between molar specific heat of a gas at constant pressure Cp and molar
specific heat of a gas at constant volume Cv and hence show that Cp is greater than Cv. (CO4)
***
74
Course code Course Title No. of Periods Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
per week Periods
Engineering
Chemistry and
MNG-104 4 120 20 80
Environmental
Studies
S.No Unit Title/Chapter No of Periods COs Mapped
Fundamentals of
1 18 CO1
Chemistry
2 Solutions 10 CO1
3 Acids and bases 10 CO1
Principles of
4 8 CO1
Metallurgy
5 Electrochemistry 16 CO2
6 Corrosion 8 CO2
7 Water Treatment 10 CO3
8 Polymers 12 CO4
9 Fuels 6 CO4
Chemistry in daily
10 6 CO4
life
Environmental
11 16 CO5
Studies
Total 120
 Course Objectives
Course Title: Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies
1. To familiarize with the concepts of chemistry involved in the process of

various Engineering Industrial Applications.
2. To know the various natural and man-made environmental issues and
Course Objectives concerns with an interdisciplinary approach that include physical,
chemical, biological and socio cultural aspects of environment.
3. To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises
75
 Course outcomes
Explain Bohr`s atomic model, chemical bonding, mole concept, acids and
CO1
bases, PH metallurgical process and alloys
CO2 Explain electrolysis, Galvanic cell, emf and corrosion
Explain the chemistry involved in the treatment of water by advanced
Course CO3
method
Outcomes
Synthesise of Plastics, rubber and applications of fuel chemical compounds
CO4
used in our daily life.
Explain the causes, effects and control methods of air and water pollution
CO5
and measures to protect the environment
Course code Engg. Chemistry and Environmental studies No Of periods 120

MNG-104 No of Cos;5
POs Mapped with CO CO periods addressing Level remarks
No PO in Col 1 1,2,3
NO %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3, 60 50% 3 >40% level 3 (highly
CO4,CO5 addressed) 25% to 40%
PO2 CO1,CO2 13 10.8% 1 level2(moderately
PO3 CO2,CO3 10 8.3% 1 addressed 5% to 25% level1
PO4 CO1 10 8.3% 1 (Low addressed < 5%(not
PO5 CO4,CO5 15 12.5 1 addressed)
PO6
PO7 CO4 12 10% 1
 COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)
CO1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 1 2 1 1
CO3 3 2
CO4 3 1 2
CO5 3 3 1
3 = strongly mapped
2= moderately mapped
1= slightly mapped
Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit vii) Tech
Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books
76
 Model Blue Print with Weightage for Blooms category and questions for each chapter and
COs mapped
Marks wise Question wise
Weight distribution of distribution of
Unit No of Mapped with
S.No age of Weightage Weightage
Title/Chapter Periods CO
marks
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Fundamentals of
1 18 19 8 8 3 1 1 1 CO1
Chemistry
2 Solutions 10 11 0 0 8 3 1 1 CO1
3 Acids and bases 10 11 0 8 0 3 1 1 CO1
Principles of
4 8 8 8 0 0 1 CO1
Metallurgy
5 Electrochemistry 16 11 8 3 0 1 1 * CO2
6 Corrosion 8 8 0 8 0 1 CO2
7 Water Treatment 10 11 8 3 0 1 1 CO3
8 Polymers 12 11 3 8 0 1 1 * CO4
9 Fuels 6 3 3 0 0 1 CO4
Chemistry in daily
10 6 3 0 0 3 1 CO4
life
Environmental
11 16 14 3 11 0 1 2 CO5
Studies
*
Total 120 110 12 6 6 6 20 35 5 10
*One question of HOTs for 10 marks from any of the unit title 5 or 8
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to learn out
ENGINEERINGCHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
1.0 Atomic structure

1.1 Explain the charge, mass of fundamental particles of an atom (electron, proton and neutron) and the
concept of atomic number and mass number.
1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations.
1.3 Explain t h e s i g n i f i c a n ce o f f o u r Quantum numbers.
1.4 Explain 1 . Aufbau principle, 2 Pauli’s exclusion principle 3 Hund’s rule.
1.5 Define Orbital of an atom and draw the shapes of s, p and d- Orbitals.
1.6 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30
1.7 Explain the significance of chemical bonding
1.8 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency
1.9 Define and explai n Ionic and Covalent bonds with examples of NaCl , MgO, *H2,*O2 and *N2. (*
Lewis dot method)
1.10 List out the Properties of Ionic compounds and covalent compounds and distinguish between their
properties.
1.11 Structures of ionic solids-define a) Unit cell b) co-ordination number and the structures of NaCl and
CsCl unit cells.
77
2.0 Solutions
2.1 Define the terms 1.Solution, 2.Solute and 3.Solvent
2.2 Classify solutions based on physical state and solubility
2.3 Define mole and problems on mole concept.
2.4 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2.Molecular weight and 3. Equivalent weight and
calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of the given acids.(HCl,H2SO4,H3PO4)Bases (NaOH,
Ca(OH)2, Al(OH)3 ) and Salts (NaCl, Na2CO3, CaCO3)
2.5 Define molarity and normality and numerical problems on molarity and normality
a) Calculate the Molarity or Normality if weight of solute and volume of solution are given
b) Calculate the weight of solute if Molarity or normality with volume of solution are given
c) Problems on dilution to convert high concentrated solutions to low concentrated
Solutions
3.0 Acids and bases

3.1 Explain Arrhenius theory of Acids and Bases and give the limitations of Arrhenius theory of Acids and
Bases.
3.2 Explain Bronsted–Lowry theory of acids and bases and give the limitations of Bronsted–Lowry theory
of acids and bases.
3.3 Explain Lewis theory of acids and bases and give the limitations of Lewis theory of acids and bases.
3.4 Explain the Ionic product of water
3.5 Define pH and explain PH scale and solve the Numerical problems on pH(Strong Acids and Bases)
3.6 Define and explain buffer solution and give the examples of buffer solutions.
3.7 State the application of buffer solutions
4.0 Principles of Metallurgy

4.1 List out the Characteristics of Metals and non-metals
4.2 Distinguish between Metals and Non-metals
4.3 Define the terms 1.Mineral, 2.Ore, 3. Gangue, 4.Flux5.Slag
4.4 Describe the methods of concentration of Ore; 1.Handpicking, 2.Levigation and 3. Froth
Floatation
4.5 Describe the methods involved in extraction of crude metal- Roasting, Calcination and Smelting.
4.6 Explain the purification of Copper by Electrolytic Refining
4.7 Define an Alloy and Write the composition and uses of the following alloys. 1. Brass 2. Germen silver
3. Nichrome.
5.0 Electrochemistry
5.1 Define the terms1. Conductor 2. Semiconductor 3.Insulator, 4.Electrolyte5.Non–electrolyte.Give
two examples each.
5.2 Distinguish between metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction
5.3 Explain electrolysis by taking example fused NaCl
5.4 Explain Faraday’s laws of electrolysis
5.5 Define 1 . C hemical equivalent (E) 2 . E lectrochemicalequivalent (e) and their relation.
5.6 Solve the Numerical problems on Faraday’s laws of electrolysis and applications of electrolysis
(Electro plating)
5.7 Define Galvanic cell and explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell.
5.8 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell
5.9 Explain the electrode potentials and standard electrode potentials
5.10 Explain the electrochemical series and its significance
5.11 Explain the emf of a cell and solve the numerical problems on emf of the cell based on standard
electrode potentials.
78
6.0 Corrosion
6.1 Define the term corrosion.
6.2 state the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion
6.3 Describe the formation of a) composition cell b) stress cell c)concentration cell during corrosion.
6.4 Define rusting of iron and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron.
6.5 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion
a)Protective coatings (anodic and cathodic coatings)
b) Cathodic pro tectio n (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed–voltage process)
7. 0 Water Treatment
7.1 Define soft water and hard water with respect to soap action.
7.2 Define and classify the hardness of water.
7.3 List out the salts that causing hardness of water (with Formulae)
7.4 State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
7.5 Define Degree of hardness and units of hardness (mg/L) or( ppm).
7.6 Explain the methods of softening of hard water: a) Ion-exchange process, b)Permutit process or
zeolite process
7.7 State the essential qualities of drinking water.
7.8 Chemistry involved in treatment of water (Coagulation, Chlorination, deflouridation)
7.9 Explain Osmosis and Reverse Osmosis with examples.
7.10 State the applications of Reverse Osmosis.
8.0 Polymers
8.1 Explain the concept of polymerisation
8.2 Describe the methods of polymerization a)addition polymerization of ethylene b)condensation
polymerization of Bakalite(Only flow chart)
8.3 Define thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics with examples.
8.4 Distinguish between thermo plastics and thermosetting plastics
8.5 List the Characteristics of plastics and state the disadvantages of using plastics.
8.6 State the advantages of plastics over traditional materials.
8.7 Explain the methods of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. PVC, 2.Teflon, 3. Polystyrene 4. Nylon 6,6
8.8 Explain processing of Natural rubber and write the structural formula of Natural rubber.
8.9 List the Characteristics of raw rubber
8.10 Define and explain Vulcanization and List out the Characteristics of Vulcanized rubber.
8.11 Define the term Elastomer and describe the preparation and uses of the following synthetic rubbers
a) Buna-s and b)Neoprene rubber.
9.0 Fuels
9.1 Define the term fuel
9.2 Classify the fuels based on physical state and based on occurrence.
9.3 List the characteristics of good fuel.
9.4 State the composition and uses of gaseous fuels.
a)water gas b) producer gas, c) natural gas, d) Coal gas, e)Biogas.
10.0 Chemistry in daily life

10.1 Give the basic chemical composition, applications, health aspects and pollution impacts of
a) soaps, and detergents b) vinegar c) Insect repellents d) activated charcoal e) Soft drinks
79
11.0 ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
11.1 Define the term environment and explain the scope and importance of environmental studies
11.2 Define the segments of environment 1).Lithosphere, 2).Hydrosphere, 3).Atmosphere,
4).Biosphere,
11.3 Define the following terms 1)Pollutant, 2).Pollution, 3).Contaminant, 4)receptor, 5)sink, 6)
particulates, 7)dissolved oxygen (DO), 8)Threshold limit value (TLV), 9).BOD,10).COD 11) eco
system1 2 ) Producers1 3 ) C onsumers 14) Decomposers with examples
11.4 State the renewable and non renewable energy sources with examples.
11.5 Explain biodiversity and threats to biodiversity
11.6 Define air pollution and classify the air pollutants-based on origin and physical state of matter.
11.7 Explain the causes, effects of air pollution on human beings, plants and animals and control methods
of air pollution.
11.8 State the uses of forest resources.
11.9 Explain causes and effects of deforestation
11.10 Explain the causes and effects of the following
1) Greenhouse effect, 2) Ozone layer depletion and 3) Acid rain
11.11 Define Water pollution, explain the causes, effects and control methods of Water pollution.
COURSE CONTENT
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
1. Fundamentals of Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory – Quantum numbers –
Aufbau principle - Hund’s rule - Pauli’s exclusion Principle- Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d orbitals -
Electronic configurations of elements
Chemical Bonding: Introduction – types of chemical bonds – Ionic and covalent bond with examples–
Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds- structures of ionic crystals (NaCl and CsCl).
2. Solutions
Introduction of concentration methods – mole concept, molarity and normality – Numerical problems
on mole, molarity and normality.
3. Acids and Bases

Introduction – Theories of acids and bases and limitations – Arrhenius theory- Bronsted –Lowry
theory – Lewis acid base theory – Ionic product of water- pH related numerical problems–Buffer
solutions, action of buffer and its applications.
4. Principles of Metallurgy
Characteristics of Metals and non-metals –Distinguish between Metals and Non-metals, Define the
terms i) Metallurgy ii) ore iii) Gangue iv) flux v) Slag - Concentration of Ore –Hand picking,
Levigation, Froth floatation – Methods of Extraction of crude Metal – Roasting, Calcination,
Smelting – Alloys – Composition and uses of brass, German silver and nichrome.
5. Electrochemistry
Conductors, semiconductors, insulators, electrolytes and non-electrolytes – electrolysis –
Faraday’s laws of electrolysis-application of electrolysis(electroplating) -numerical problems on
Faraday’s laws – Galvanic cell – standard electrode potential – electrochemical series–emf and
numerical problems on emf of a cell .
80
6. Corrosion
Introduction - factors influencing corrosion - composition, stress and concentration cells–rusting of
iron and its mechanism – prevention of corrosion by coating methods, cathodic protection methods.
7. Water technology
Introduction–soft and hard water–causes of hardness–types of hardness
–disadvantages of hard water – degree of hardness (ppm and mg/lit) – softening methods –
permutit process – ion exchange process– qualities of drinking water –Chemistry involved in
treatment of water (Coagulation, Chlorination, defluoridation ) - Osmosis, Reverse Osmosis –
Applications of Reverse osmosis.
8. Polymers
Introduction – polymerization – types of polymerization – addition, condensation with examples
– plastics – types of plastics – advantages of plastics over traditional materials-Disadvantages of
using plastics – Preparation and uses of the following plastics i).PVC ii) Teflon iii) Polystyrene iv)
.Nylonn 6,6 –Processing of natural rubber - Vulcanization – Elastomers- Preparation and applications
of Buna-s, Neoprene rubbers.
9. Fuels
Definition and classification of fuels–characteristics of good fuel-composition and uses of gaseous
fuels.
10. Chemistry in daily life

Basic composition, applications, health aspects and pollution impacts of soaps and detergents,
vinegar, insect repellents, soft drinks, activated charcoal.
11. ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
Introduction– environment –scope and importance of environmental studies – important terms
related to environment– renewable and non-renewable energy sources–Concept of ecosystem –
Biotic components –Forest resources – Deforestation -Biodiversity and its threats-Air pollution –
causes-effects–Global environmental issues – control measures – Water pollution – causes – effects –
control measures.
REFERENCEBOOKS
1. Telugu Academy Intermediate chemistry Vol 1&2
2. Jain & Jain Engineering Chemistry
3. O.P. Agarwal, Hi- Tech. Engineering Chemistry
4. Sharma Engineering Chemistry
5. A.K. De Engineering Chemistry
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit test 1, unit test 2 and unit test 3

Model question paper for Unit Test with Cos mapped
81
UNIT TEST –I
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (MNG-104)
PART-A 16 Marks
(2) First question carries 4 marks and each of rest carries 3 marks.
(3) Answers for Q.No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
not exceed five simple sentences.
1. a. Number of neutrons in 11Na23 is ---------- (CO1)

b. The molarity and normality of HCl is the same (True or False) (CO1)
c. What is the pH range of base? (CO1)
d. Graphite is a good conductor of electricity (Yes or No) (CO1)
2. Distinguish between orbit and orbital. (CO1)
3. Define Covalent bond. Explain the formation of covalent bond in Oxygen and Nitrogen molecules.
(CO1)
4. Define mole. Calculate the number of moles present in 50 gm of CaCO3 and 9.8 gm of H2SO4.
(CO1)
5. Define PH. Calculate the PH of 0.001M HCl and 0.01M NaOH solution. (CO1)
PART – B 3x8M = 24M

Answer either (A) or (B) from each questions from Part-B.Each question carries 8 marks.
6. A) Explain Postulations of Bhor’s atomic theory. Give its limitations. (CO1)

(OR)
B) Explain the significance of Quantum numbers. (CO1)
7. A) Express molarity normality with mathematical equation. Calculate the molarity and normality
of 10gm of NaOH present in 500 ml solution. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Classify solutions based the physical state of solute and solvent and give an example each.
(CO1)
8. A) What is buffer solution? Classify with examples and give it`s applications. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain Bronsted-Lowry theory of acids and bases. Give its limitations. (CO1)
***
82
UNIT TEST –II
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY & ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES (104)
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks:40Marks
PART-A 16 Marks
Instructions:(1) Answer all questions.
(3) Answers for Q.No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
1. a) Bauxite is the ore of ............ metal (CO2)
b) What is the unit of electrochemical equivalent? (CO2)
c) CaSO4 is the permanent hardness causing salt. (True or False) (CO3)
d) Write the Chemical formula of rust. (CO2)
2. Write any three differences between metallic conduction and electrolytic conduction.(CO2)
3. Write the composition and applications of German silver and Nichrome. (CO1)
4. Mention any three disadvantages of using hard water in industries. (CO3)
5. Define electro chemical equivalent and chemical equivalent. Give the relation between them.
(CO2)

6. A) What is galvanic cell? Explain construction and working of galvanic cell with neat diagram
(CO2)
(OR)
B) State and explain Faraday`s laws of electrolysis. (CO2)
7. A) Explain different types of galvanic cells formed during the corrosion of metals.(CO2)
(OR)
B) What is hard water? Explain zeolite process of softening of hard water. (CO3)
8. A) Explain Froth floatation process. (CO1)

(OR)
B) Explain Electrolytic refining processing of copper. (CO1)
***
83
UNIT TEST –III
TIME: 90 minutes Total Marks:40
PART-A 16 Marks
(3) Answers for Q. No. 2 to 5 should be brief and straight to the point and shall
1. a) The monomer of PVC................ (CO4)

b) Sulphur is the vulcanising agent. (True/False) (CO4)
c) Give an example for secondary pollutant. (CO5)
d) Presence of ozone in stratosphere is a pollutant.( Yes/No) (CO5)
2. List any three characteristic properties of vulcanised rubber. (CO4)
3. Define primary fuel and secondary fuels give an example each. (CO4)
4. Mention the basic chemical composition and applications of vinegar. (CO4)
5. Write any three threats to the biodiversity. (CO5)

6. A) A) Explain addition and condensation polymerisation with an example each. (CO4)

(OR)
B) Give a method of preparation and applications of the following
i) Buna-S ii) Neoprene (CO4)
7. A) What is air pollution? Explain any three causes of air pollution. (CO5)
(OR)
B) Briefly explain ozone layer depletion and greenhouse effect. (CO5)
8. A) What is water pollution? Explain any three controlling methods of water pollution.(CO5)
(OR)
B) What are thermoplastics and thermo setting plastic? Write any four differences between
these two plastics. (CO4)
***
84
MODEL QUESTION PAPER (C-20)
TIME: 3hrs Total Marks:80
PART-A
Instructions: (1) Answer all questions. Answer all questions. 3x10=30M
(2) Each question carries 3 marks.
1. Draw the shapes of s and p orbitals. (CO1)
2. Define mole. Find the mole number of 10 g of CaCO3 (CO1)
3. Define Buffer solution. Give any two examples. (CO1)
4. Define chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent. Give their relation. (CO2)
5. State name of the salts and their formulae that cause hardness. (CO3)
6. Write any three disadvantages of using plastics. (CO4)
7. Classify the fuels based on their occurrence. (CO4)
8. Mention the basic chemical composition and applications of vinegar. (CO4)
9. List out any three threats to biodiversity. (CO5)
10. Define pollutant and contaminant. Give an example each. (CO5)
PART – B
Each question carries eight marks. 8x5=40M
11. A) Explain Bhor’s atomic theory and give its limitations. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain ionic bond formation and covalent bond formation with one example each (CO1)
12. A) Calculate the molarity and normality of 250 ml of sodium carbonate solution
that contains 10.6 gm of sodium carbonate. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain Bronstead and Lowry theory of acids and bases. Give its limitations. (CO1)
13. A) Explain froth floatation and electrolytic refining of copper with neat diagrams.(CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the construction and working of galvanic cell. (CO2)
14. A) Explain Cathode protection methods. (CO2)

(OR)
B) Explain ion-exchange of softening of hard water with a neat diagram. (CO3)
15. A) Explain addition and condensation polymerisation with an example each. (CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain the causes and effects of air pollution. (CO5)
PART –C
Question carries ten marks 10x1 =10M
16. Analyse the products formed at cathode and anode with electrode reactions during
the Electrolysis of aqueous NaCl in compare with fused NaCl. (CO2)
***
85
ELEMENTS OF MINING
No of periods / Total no of
Course Code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
week periods
Elements of
MNG-105 6 180 20 80
Mining
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. Major Topics Periods CO’s Mapped
1 Introduction& stages of Mining 20 CO1

2 Concepts of Mining Methods 20 CO1, CO2
3 Drilling Methods 40 CO1, CO2,CO3,CO5
4 Explosives 40 CO2,CO3.CO4
5 Blasting practice in mines 30 CO3,CO4,CO5
6 Shaft sinking 30 CO3.CO4,CO5
Total 180
Course Objectives and Course Outcomes
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to:
i) To familiarize the various methods of accessing the deposits

and different mining activities
Course Objectives ii) To familiarize various Mining methods
iii) Explain Different methods of drilling
iv) Explain Various types of explosives and their field use
v) Describe various methods of shaft sinking and their field
applicability
Fundamental concepts of mining, Mining methods, drilling

CO1
methods, methods of shaft sinking
Explain Pre-mining, post mining operations, various types of
CO2
explosives
Explain Different types of drilling methods, blasting practices in
CO3
Course outcomes mines
Determination of efficiency of blasting operations, Mining
CO4 methods under various conditions, usage of explosives in a
given conditions
Computation of powder factor, Shaft sinking methods under
CO5
various mining conditions
86
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: MNG-105 Course Title: Elements of Mining No of Periods: 180
CO Periods
Mapped with addressing PO in Level
PO No Col 1 Remarks
CO no (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3 78 44 3
>40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO 2 CO3 35 19 1
25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
PO 3
Addressed
PO 4
5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO 5 CO2,CO3 67 37 2
<5% Not addressed
PO 6
PO 7
CO1 3 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 3 1 2 1 1
CO4
CO5
3: High, 2: Moderate,1: Low
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, student shall be able to:

1.0 Know the various Fundamental concepts of Mining and stages/phases in Mining
1.1 Explain the contribution of Mining activity in the cause of human civilization, national
economy.
1.2 Status of mineral resources in India and in the world.
1.3 State the role of Mining engineer in the industry
1.4 List the various Mining industries in the state and in the country
1.5 Define the terms mine, mining, mining engineering, ore, ore deposits, waste/gangue,
mineral, mineral deposits, Shaft, Incline and Adit, Haul road
1.6 List the various stages of mining operations: Pre- mining, Mining and Post-mining.
87
1.7 List the various pre-mining operations-Exploration, land acquisition, prospecting licence, de-
vegetation, and initial ground treatment for future (Next stage) of Mining operations –
Forming approach Roads.
1.8 List the various mining operation (Entry to deposit, development, exploitation,
stopping/depillaring.)
1.9 List the various ancillary mining operations – (Strata control, transportation, ventilation,
drainage, lighting, reclamation, soil or back filling.)
1.10 List the various post mining operations (beneficiation of mineral, concentration techniques,
assaying and metallurgical operations.)
1.11 List different types of mode of entry to mineral deposits, and state applicability, limitations
of the above
2.0 Know the concepts of Mining Methods.

2.1 Define the following terms with sketches
2.2 Out crop, Cover, overburden, back, vein, lode, ore shoot, coal measures, pit top, pit-bank,
pit-bottom, shaft station, reserve station, rest station, mineral reserves, tunnel, cross cut,
level, drive, staple pit, inset, gallery, heading, blind heading, face, dip, closures, slice, split,
stook, barrier, sump, shaft, auxiliary shaft.
2.3 Give the classification of coal seams based on the thickness, depth, inclination, gassiness and
wateriness.
2.4 Give the classification of methods of working coal in respect of underground and open cast
mining
2.5 Compare underground mining vs opencast mining
2.6 Compare Shaft vs Incline
3.0 Know the Drilling methods.

3.1 State the purpose of drill holes in Mining.
3.2 Give the classification of drilling methods, selection criteria of each method and limitations
3.3 State the applicability of percussive and rotary drilling methods.
3.4 List the drilling tools and accessories used in percussive and rotary drilling and their purpose
3.5 Explain methods of percussive drilling, rotary drilling with sketches.
3.6 Describe the feed mechanism – Screw Feed and Hydraulic feed with sketches.
3.7 Define the terms mud flushing, sludge and core.
3.8 State the purpose of mud flushing and core recovery.
3.9 List the different methods of core recovery.
3.10 Explain principle of working of single tube, double tube and wire line core barrel with sketch
3.11 Explain wire-line tube barrel and its working with sketch
3.12 State the reasons for deviation of bore holes.
4.0 Understand the explosives
4.1 Define the term explosive, low explosive, high explosive, booster, primer, Permitted
explosive and detonator.
4.2 State the uses of explosives for mining industry.
4.3 List and explain the characteristics of explosives
4.4 Classify the explosives based on strength, density
4.5 State the composition of low explosives and high explosives.
4.6 List the properties of low explosives and high explosives.
88
4.7 State their field of applications of low explosives and high explosives.
4.8 Compare the Low explosive vs High explosive.
4.9 Classify the Permitted explosives, the tests that a permitted explosive should pass through
and state their applicability
4.10 Give the composition of permitted explosives with the examples un- sheathed, sheathed,
ultra safe, and Blasting off the Solid (BOS) explosives.
4.11 List the types of initiation of explosives.
4.12 Describe the safety fuse and mention the field application of Safety fuse and Cordtex
4.13 Classify the detonators and state the composition of different detonators.
4.14 Describe the constructional details of a) Ordinary b) electric c) delay d) Nonel detonators and
field application
5.0 Blasting practice in mines
5.1 Define solid blasting and state field of application
5.2 Define the term blasting
5.3 Explain the solid blasting and state rules and provisions related to solid blasting
5.4 Define the term induced blasting
5.5 Explain different blasting patterns for underground excavations
5.6 List the blasting tools used in the fuse and electric blasting and state their functions
5.7 Explain direct and inverse initiation with sketches
5.8 Define Blown-out shot, Socket, Misfire, Powder factor, Drilling ratio, Yield / Kg
5.9 State the causes, remedial measures, procedure for treating misfires
5.10 List the dangers associated with underground blasting
5.11 List precautions to be taken before and after blasting
5.12 Simple numerical problems to calculate a) Power factor b) yield per Kg of explosive.
6.0 Know the Method of shaft sinking.

6.1 List the factors to be considered for the selection of a shaft as a mode of entry
6.2 State the factors consider for selection of a site for shaft sinking.
6.3 List the necessary equipment required for sinking a shaft
6.4 List the different stages of shaft sinking.
6.5 Explain the different stages of sinking through normal strata.
6.6 Explain temporary supporting while sinking shaft.
6.7 List different permanent supporting methods of sinking shaft.
6.8 Explain the permanent supporting of the shaft sides by a) brick walling b) Concrete curbing c)
Tubbing
6.9 Classify the special methods of shaft sinking and their applicability’s.
6.10 Explain the RCC piling method of shaft sinking
6.11 Define the terms a) Pre-Silicatization b) Silicatization c) Product holes d) Thawing e) Water
garland f) Weep holes
6.12 Explain the Cementation and freezing methods of shaft sinking
6.13 List the modern techniques used in shaft sinking
89
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Introduction and stages of Mining
Contribution of Mining activities of civilization-Definitions of terms –Mining Industries in the state
and in the country.– Pre mining, mining and post-mining – ancillary mining operations, Types of
entries to mineral deposits – Shaft, Incline, Adit –applicable conditions- limitations, compare shaft vs
incline.
2. Concepts and Definition of terms commonly used in coal and non-coal mining
Classification of the mineral deposits basing on various factors, shallow, deep, very deep, steeply
inclined, moderately inclined, inclined vein, massive deposits. Classification of coal seams- Thick,
moderately thick, thin seams, I, II, III degree gassy seams. Classification of methods of working coal-
opencast, underground-Bord and Pillar/ longwall-Advancing and retreating.
3. Drilling methods
Use of drill holes – (Classification) methods – applicable conditions – tools used for drilling –
percussive and rotary, feed mechanism – Screw feed and hydraulic feed mechanism – mud flushing –
sludge and core, core recovery methods of core recovery – reasons for deviation of bore holes.
Single tube, double tube and wire line core barrel.
4. Explosives
Uses of explosives in mining industry, characteristics classification basing on strength, speed and
application, low and high explosives, their composition, properties – explosives used in underground
in opencast workings including LOX, slurries, boosters, primer – their composition application
permitted explosives – tools, applicability, examples with their composition. Selection of explosives –
factors, Initiation of explosives – fuses – safety fuse, cortex fuse. Detonators – types, composition,
constructional details and applications.
5. Blasting practice in mines

Solid blasting- rules and provisions related-induced blasting-different types of blasting practice-
different types of drill bits- tools –Reconditioning-Dangers and precaution measures of blasting, fuse
and electric blasting and misfire dealing.
6. Shaft Sinking
Uses, factors for selection of site, different stages of sinking through subsoil, temporary, permanent
supporting, special methods .Purpose of widening and deepening- special methods- modern trends
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Elements of Mining : D.J.DeshmukhVol-I
2. Winning and working coal : R.T.Deshmukh&D.J.DeshmukhVol-I
3. Explosives & Blasting Practice : Samir Kumar Das
4. Elements of Mining : D.J.Deshmukh Vol.-II
5. Explosives and Blasting practice : G.K.Pradhan
6 UMS. : VOLUME-I,II, III
90
Blue Print of Question Paper
Marks Wise Question Wise

Periods Weightag
S. Distribution of Distribution of CO’s
Chapter Name Allocate e
No Weightage Weightage Mapped
d Allocated
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Introduction&
1 20 06 03 03 01 01 CO1
stages of Mining
Concepts of
2 20 11 03 08 01 01 CO2,CO3
Mining Methods
3 Drilling Methods 40 11 03 08 01 01 CO2,CO3
4 Explosives 40 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO3
Blasting practice CO2,CO3,C
5 30 14 03 03 08 01 01 01
in mines O4,CO5
CO3,CO4,C
6 Shaft sinking 30 14 03 03 08 01 01 01
O5
Higher order question CO2,CO4,C
10 10 01
from any chapters O5
TOTAL 180 80 15 15 32 18 05 05 04 02
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap-Application; An- Analylising
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests
Unit Test Learning outcomes to covered
Unit Test –I From 1.1 to 3.5
Unit Test –II From 3.6 to 5.3
Unit Test -III From 5.4 to 6.13
91
Model Paper for Unit Test-I :
State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.

Diploma in Mining Engineering (DMNGE)
First Year :: MNG-105 ELEMENTS OF MINING
Time: 90 Minutes Unit Test –I Maximum Marks : 40
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions: (i) Answer all questions
(ii) First question carries FOUR marks, each question of remaining carries THREE marks.
1. (a) An ore is the aggregate of mineral and gangue.

– True/False (CO1)
(b) Mining is the art of excavation of wood from the earth’s crust.
---- True/False (CO1)
(c) The mineral deposit is exposed at the surface is known as ___________ (CO3)
(d) ___________ are used for blasting of ore deposit in mining activity. (CO2)
2. List the various pre-mining operations (CO1)
3. Define the terms mine and mining (CO1)
4. Define the terms shaft station and reserve station (CO2)
5. List the tools used in drilling (CO3)
PART- B 3x8=24 Marks

Instructions:(i) Answer all questions
(ii) Each question carries EIGHT marks
(iii) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.
6. (A) Explain the contribution of Mining activity in the cause of human civilization and national
economy (CO1)
(OR)
(B) State the role of Mining engineer in the industry (CO1)
7. (A) Compare underground mining with opencast mining (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Compare Shaft with Incline (CO2)
8. (A) Explain methods of percussive drillingwith sketches (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain methods of rotary drilling with sketches (CO3)
oOo
92
Model Paper for Unit Test-II :

First Year :: MNG-105ELEMENTS OF MINING
Time: 90 Minutes Unit Test –II Maximum Marks : 40
PART- A 16 Marks
1. (a) Mud flushing is the process of filling cracks of drill holes

(b) Sheathed explosives doesn’t come under permitted explosives.
(c) VOD stands for ___________ (CO3)
(d) Shaft, adit and incline are the types of ___________ (CO2)
2. State the reasons for deviation of bore holes (CO2)
3. List the characteristics of explosives (CO3)
4. List the types of initiation of explosives (CO5)
5. Define the term induced blasting (CO4)
PART- B 3 x 8 = 24 Marks
Instructions:(i) Answer all questions
(iii) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content but
not the length of the answer.
6. (A) Describe the Screw Feed mechanism with sketch (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Explain principle of working of single tube with sketch (CO3)
7. (A) Compare the Low explosive with High explosive (CO3)

(OR)
(B) Describe the safety fuse and mention the field application of Safety fuse (CO3)
8. (A) Explain different blasting patterns for underground excavations (CO5)

(OR)
(B) Explain direct and inverse initiation with sketches (CO4)
oOo
93
Model Paper for Unit Test-III :

First Year :: MNG-105 ELEMENTS OF MINING
Time: 90 Minutes Unit Test –III Maximum Marks : 40
PART- A 16 Marks
1. (a) Consumption of entire explosive by blasting without doing any useful work is called as misfire.
(b) Powder factor determines the quantity of explosive required to break one cubic meter of
strata. ---- True/False (CO3)
(c)RCC in RCC piling method stands for ___________ (CO4)
(d) The location for sinking shaft must be above ___________ (CO3)
2. List the blasting tools used in the fuse and electric blasting (CO3)
3. List the dangers associated with underground blasting (CO4)
4. List the different stages of shaft sinking (CO2)
5. List the modern techniques used in shaft sinking (CO3)
(iii) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content
but not the length of the answer.
6. (A) Explain direct and inverse initiation with sketches (CO4)

(OR)
(B) State the causes, remedial measures, procedure for treating misfires (CO3)
7. (A) Explain the different stages of sinking through normal strata (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain the permanent supporting of the shaft sides by brick walling (CO5)
8. (A) Explain temporary supporting while sinking shaft (CO4)

(OR)
(B) Explain the Cementation methods of shaft sinking (CO3)
oOo
94
C20-MNG-105
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION,
D.MNG.E. – IYEAR EXAMINATION
ELEMENTS OF MINING
Time : 3 Hours Total Marks: 80
PART – A
10X3 = 30
Instructions: Part A consists of 10 questions. Answer all questions and each question carries three marks.
1. Define the terms: a) Mine b) Mining (CO1)
2. List the various stages of mining operations (CO2)
3. Define the terms a) Out crop b) Sump (CO1)
4. List the uses of drill holes (CO2)
5. Define the terms a) explosive b) low explosive (CO1)
6. State the uses of explosives for mining industry (CO2)
7. Define solid blasting and state field of application (CO4)
8. Define Blown-out shot, Socket (CO2)
9. List the different stages of shaft sinking (CO4)
10. List the modern techniques used in shaft sinking (CO5)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
Instructions: Part B consists of 5 Units. Answer any one full question from each unit. Each question
carries 8 marks and may have sub questions.
11. A) Compare underground mining vs open cast mining. (CO2)

(OR)
B) Compare Shaft vs Incline (CO2)
12. A) Explain method of rotary drilling with sketches. (CO2)

(OR)
B) Explain method of percussive drilling with sketches (CO2)
13. A) Describe the constructional details electric detonator with sketch (CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain the characteristics of explosives (CO3)
14. A) Explain different blasting patterns for underground excavations (CO2)

(OR)
B) Explain direct and inverse initiation with sketches (CO4)
95
15. A) Explain the different stages of sinking through normal strata. (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain the freezing method of shaft sinking (CO5)
PART – C
1 X 10 = 10 Marks
Instructions: Part C consists of 1 question which carries 10 marks.
16. The management of the mine proposed to carry out the mining operations by sinking shaft. The
location of mine site is associated with fractured and fissured strata, without running sand. Which
method of shaft sinking is used and explain. (CO5)
***
96
FUNDAMENTALS OF GEOLOGY
Course Code Course Title No of periods / Total no of Marks for FA Marks for SA
week periods
MNG-106 Fundamentals 05 150 20 80

of Geology
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. Major Topics Periods CO’s Mapped
1 Introduction 06 CO1
2 Physical Geology 42 CO1, CO2
3 Mineralogy 30 CO2, CO3,CO5
4 Petrology 36 CO3,CO4, CO5
5 Structural Geology 36 CO4,CO5
Total 150

Understand the scope and importance of Geology in mining
Explain the formation of earth and its internal structure

Course Objectives
Understand various types of minerals and their composition
Understand the formation of minerals and their mode of formation
Explain the structural formation of minerals such as faults, folds, joints etc.
CO1 Explain the Scope of geology, branches of Geology, applicability in

Mining
CO2 Explain Internal structure of earth, and nature of formation. Different

methods of formation of minerals and their composition
Course Outcomes CO3 Describe the Categorization of various minerals, nature of formation,
and their composition
CO4 Explain Formation of minerals under various conditions
CO5 Describe the Structural formation of minerals such as faults, folds.

Dykes, sill discontinuity,
97
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: MNG 106 Course Title: Fundamentals of Geology No of Periods: 150
CO Periods
addressing PO in Level
PO No Mapped with CO no Remarks
Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 71 47 3 >40% Level 3 Highly
PO 2 CO3,CO5 39 26 2 addressed
PO 3 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
PO 4 Addressed
PO 5 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO 6 <5% Not addressed
PO 7 CO3,CO5 40 27 2
CO1 3 1
CO2 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 2 1
CO4 3 1
CO5 2 2 2
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Know the scope and uses of Geology

1.1 Define the term Geology
1.2 Explain the scope of Geology
1.3 Mention the different branches of Geology
1.4 State the uses of geology in Mining field.
1.5 Define the terms Erosion, Deflation, Abrasion, Attrition and Denudation
1.6 Define the terms Weathering
1.7 Explain types of Weathering ( Mechanical and Chemical Weathering)
2.0 Understand the physical Geology

2.1 Define the physical Geology
2.2 Explain the origin of the Earth
2.3 Explain the Nebular hypothesis of Kant and Laplace
2.4 Name the important methods to determine the age of the Earth.
2.5 Explain the Age of the earth.
2.6 List the common radio metric methods – Potassium-Argon, Rubidium-Strontium, Uranium-
Lead and Radiocarbon method
98
2.7 Describe the internal structure of the Earth
2.8 Explain different factors responsible for Weathering.
2.9 Describe the Geological work of wind, River.
2.10 Define the Earthquakes and related terms
2.11 Explain the formation of an earth quake
2.12 State the different types and effects of earth quakes
2.13 Define the Volcanoes and related terms
2.14 State the classification of Volcanoes.
3.0 Develop the Fundamental concepts of Mineralogy

3.1 Define the terms Mineral and Mineralogy
3.2 Explain the Physical properties of minerals- Form, Colour, Streak, Cleavage, Luster, Fracture,
Specific Gravity and Hardness
3.3 List the important Minerals of Quartz, Olivine, Amphiboles, Pyroxenes, Feldspar and Mica
family
3.4 Explain the megascopic properties of Minerals viz., Form, Colour, Streak, Cleavage, Lustre,
Fracture, Specific gravity, Hardness with suitable examples.
3.5 List the industrial uses of following Metallic Minerals: Corundum,Chromite, Hematite,
Magnetite, Bauxite, Chalcopyrite, Malachite, and Kyanite.
3.6 List the industrial uses of following Non-Metallic Minerals.
Mica, Barites, Graphite, Calcite, Gypsum, Apatite, Ball clay, China clay, Fire clay, Quartz
3.7 List the industrial uses of following Precious and Atomic Minerals: Diamond, Topaz, Uranium,
Zirconium Monazite, Beryllium.
3.8 State the occurrence and distribution of important Minerals in India and A. P.
3.9 List the various mineral based Industries in India and A.P.
4.0 Develop the fundamental concepts of Petrology

4.1 Define the terms Petrology, lava and magma
4.2 State the characteristics of Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic rocks.
4.3 Explain the origin of Igneous Rocks.
4.4 Explain Forms, Textures and structures of Igneous rocks.
4.5 State the classification of Igneous rocks
4.6 Describe the following rocks 1) Granite 2) Rhyolite 3) Gabbros 4) Basalt 5) Dolerite 6)
Pegmatite
4.7 State the classification of Sedimentary rocks and explain the structure , formation of
Sedimentary rocks.
4.8 Describe the following Sedimentary rocks
1) Breccia 2) Conglomerate 3) Sand stone 4) Shale 5) Lime stone 6) Dolomite
4.9 Define the terms Metamorphism and Metamorphic rocks.
4.10 State the different kinds of Metamorphism and metamorphic agents
4.11 Describe important textures and structures of metamorphic rocks.
4.12 Describe the following Metamorphic rocks
i) Gneisses ii) Schist iii) Phyllite iv) Slate v) Quartzite vi) Charnockite
99
5.0 Develop the Fundamental concepts of structural Geology
5.1 Define the term Structural Geology.
5.2 Describe the primary structures of rock formations.
5.3 State the terms Bedding, Dip, True Dip, Apparent Dip, Strike, Overlap, Inlier, Outlier.
5.4 Explain the Fold and it’s components with sketches.
5.5 Describe different kinds of Folds
5.6 Describe the Fault and it’s components with sketches.
5.7 Describe different kinds of Faults with sketches.
5.8 Define the term Joints and Unconformities.
5.9 Explain various kinds of Unconformities
5.10 State the significance of Unconformities.
COURSE CONTENT:
1. Introduction: Definition, Scope, Classification & Uses of Geology in Mining field.

2. Physical Geology: Definition, Origin, Nebular hypothesis of Kant and Laplace, Age of earth, its
determination internal structure of earth, weathering, erosion denudation, Attrition, Erosion –
Geological work of wind, river and their products, Earth quakes, volcanoes.
3. Mineralogy: Terms-Minerals-Mineralogy-Important Minerals- Quartzite-Olivine, Amphiboles,
Pyroxenes, Feldspar, Mica Group. Megascopic Properties of minerals, Form, Colour, Streak,
Clearage, Lustre, Fracture, Specific Gravity, Hardness. Industrial Uses of Metallic Minerals:
Corundum, Chromite, Hematite, Magnetite, Bauxite, Barites Chalcopyrite, Malachite, Kyanite.
Industrial uses of Non-Metallic Minerals: Mica, Graphite, Calcite, Gypsum, Apatite, Ball clay, China
clay, Fire clay, Quartz. Industrial uses of Precious and Atomic Minerals viz.,Diamond, Topaz, Uranium,
Zirconium Monazite, and Beryllium. Occurrence and Distributions of Minerals in Andhra Pradesh.
Minerals based industries in A.P. Occurrence and Distributions of Minerals India. Minerals based
industries in India.
4. Petrology: Lava, Magma, Petrology. Classification of Rocks-Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic
.Forms, textures and structures of Igneous Rocks-Granite, Rhyolite, Gabbros, Basalt, Dolomite,
Pegmatite. Formation of Sedimentary Rocks – Classification – Breccia, Conglomeration, Sandstone,
Shale, Limestone, Dolomite- Metamorphosis – Metamorphic Rocks – Gneiss, Schist, Phyllite, Slate,
Quartzite, Charnockite
5. Structural Geology: Primary and secondary structure of rock formation, terms-bedding, Dip, True
Dip, Apparent Dip, Strike, Overlap, Inlier, and Outlier. Fold and its components.Types of
Folds.Different Kinds of faults, joints, Unconformities and their types.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Physical Geology : A.K.Datta.
2. Engg. Geology : Parbinsingh.
3. Introduction to Geology : A.K. Mukharjee.
4. Principles of petrology : G.W. Tyrell
100
Blue Print of a Question Paper

Periods
S. Weightage Distribution of Distribution of CO’s
Chapter Name Allocate
No Allocated Weightage Weightage Mapped
d
R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Introduction 06 03 3 1 CO1
Physical Geology CO3,CO
2 42 25 9 8 8 3 1 1
4
Mineralogy CO4,CO
3 30 14 3 3 8 1 1 1
5
Petrology CO3,CO
4 36 14 6 8 2 1
4
Structural Geology CO2,CO
5 36 14 3 3 8 1 1 1
5
Higher order question
10 10 1 CO3
from any chapters
TOTAL 150 80 24 19 3 34 8 3 1 4
Unit Test –I From 1.1 to 2.10
Unit Test –III From 4.4 to 5.10
101

First Year :: MNG-106 FUNDAMENTALS OF GEOLOGY
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
(i) Answer all questions
1.(a) Tidal hypothesis was formulated by Georges Buffon

(b) The Nebular hypothesis was propounded by Kant and Laplace
(c) Age of the earth is ___________ (CO3)
(d) Physical geology is a branch of ___________ . (CO2)
2. Define the term Geology (CO1)
3. Define the physical Geology (CO1)
4. Define the terms Erosion, Deflation (CO1)
5. Define the physical Geology (CO1)
Instructions :
iii) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content but not the length
of the answer.
6. (A) Explain the scope of Geology (CO1)

(OR)
(B) Explain types of Weathering (CO2)
7. (A) Explain the origin of the Earth (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Explain the Nebular hypothesis of Kant and Laplace (CO2)
8. (A) Describe the internal structure of the Earth (CO4)

(OR)
(B) Describe the Geological work of wind and River (CO5)
oOo
102

PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Rose colour owes its colour by presence of Fe

(b) Andhra Pradesh state is the second largest producer of mica in the country
---- True/False
(CO1)
(c) P, S and L-waves together are called as ___________ (CO3)
(d) The purple varieties of Quartz is___________ . (CO2)
2. State the classification of Volcanoes (CO2)
3. Define the terms Mineral and Mineralogy (CO1)
4. Define the terms lava and magma (CO2)
5. State the characteristics of Igneous rocks (CO3)
Instructions :
(iii) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content but not the
length of the answer.
6. (A) Explain the formation of an earth quake (CO4)
(OR)
(B) Explain the megascopic properties of Minerals (CO2)
7. (A) List the industrial uses of following Metallic Minerals: Corundum,Chromite, Hematite,
Magnetite, Bauxite (CO3)
(OR)
(B) List the industrial uses of following Non-Metallic Minerals Mica, Barites, Graphite, Calcite,
Gypsum (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the origin of Igneous Rocks (CO2)

(OR)
(B) List the various mineral based Industries in India and A.P (CO3)
oOo
103
Model Paper for Unit Test-III :

Time: 90 Minutes Unit Test –III Maximum Marks : 40
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) The most powerful natural weathering agent is Running Water

(b) Dynamo thermal metamorphism produced by combination of Heat and Uniform pressure
(c) The dip of a bed is alway___________ (CO3)
(d) Folds in which an incompetent bed lies between two competent beds are called___________
(CO2)
2. State the classification of Igneous rocks (CO4)
3. Define the terms Metamorphism and Metamorphic rocks (CO1)
4. Define the term Structural Geology (CO1)
5. Define the term Joints and Unconformities (CO1)
Instructions :
(iii) Answer should be comprehensive and the criterion for valuation is the content but not the length of the
answer.
6. (A) Explain Forms, Textures and structures of Igneous rocks (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Describe the following rocks 1) Granite 2) Rhyolite 3) Gabbros (CO2)
7. (A) Describe important textures and structures of metamorphic rocks (CO3)

(OR)
(B) Describe the following Metamorphic rocks
i) Gneisses ii) Schist iii) Phyllite (CO2)
8. (A) Describe different kinds of Folds with sketch (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Describe different kinds of Faults with sketches (CO3)
oOo
104
MNG-106
D.MNG.E. – IYEAR EXAMINATION
FUNDAMENTALS OF GEOLOGY
PART – A
10 X3 = 30
Instructions: Part A consists of 10 questions. Answer all questions and each question carries three
marks.
1. Define the term Geology (CO1)

2. Draw the figure of Nebular hypothesis regarding origin of earth (CO4)
3. List out different kinds of weathering (CO3)
4. Distinguish between iso seismal lines and coseismal lines (CO3)
5. Define the terms mineral and mineralogy (CO1)
6. Write a short note on magma (CO1)
7. List out various agents of metamorphism (CO1)
8. State the moh’s scale of hardness (CO1)
9. Define the terms strike and dip of rock beds with a neat sketch (CO1)
10. State the significance of unconformities in the field (CO4)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Explain the various radiometric methods of determining the age of earth (CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain the origin of earth (CO4)
12. A) Describe the various factors responsible for weathering (CO2)

(OR)
B) Describe the geological work carried by running water (CO2)
13. A) State the occurrence and distribution of economic minerals in India (CO1)
(OR)
B) Describe the different physical or megascopic properties of minerals with suitable
examples (CO1)
105
14. A) Explain the formation of igneous rocks (CO4)
(OR)
B) State the classification of sedimentary rocks (CO2)
15 A) Describe the various primary structures of rock formations (CO4)

(OR)
B) Describe the different kinds of unconformities (CO5)
PART – C
Instructions:Part C consists of 1 question which carries 10 marks. 1X 10 = 10
16) Discuss the characteristics of igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks (CO1)
***
106
Course Course Title No. of Periods Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Code per Week Periods Formative Summative
Assessment Assessment
ENGINEERING
MNG-107 DRAWING 06 180 40 60
S.No Major Topics Periods COs Mapped
1 Importance of Engineering Drawing 01 CO1
2 Engineering Drawing Instruments 05 CO1
3 Free hand lettering & Numbering 06 CO1
4 Dimensioning Practice 09 CO1

Geometrical constructions CO2
5 21
Projections of points, Lines, Planes & Solids CO3
6 21
Auxiliary views CO3
7 6
Sections of Solids CO3
8 27
Orthographic Projections CO3
9 33
Isometric Views CO4
10 30
Development of surfaces CO5
11 21
Total 180
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to

Course understand the basic graphic skills and use them in preparation of engineering drawings,
Objectives their reading and interpretation
107
COURSE OUTCOMES:
Practice the use of engineering drawing instruments and Familiarise
CO1 MNG-107.1
with the conventions to be followed in engineering drawing as per BIS
Construct the i) basic geometrical constructions ii) engineering curves
CO2 MNG-107.2
Course Visualise and draw the orthographic projections of i) Points ii) Lines
Outcomes CO3 MNG-107.3
iii) Regular Planes iv) Regular Solids V) Sections of Regular Solids .
CO4 MNG-107.4 Visualise and draw the isometric views of objects .
Draw the developments of surfaces of regular solids and thereby the
CO5 MNG-107.5
components used in daily applications
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Learning Outcomes 1.0 Understand the basic concepts of Engineering Drawing

1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering
communication medium
1.2 State the necessity of B.I.S. Code of practice for
Engineering Drawing.
1.3 Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing and other
subjects of Mechanical Engineering
2.0 Use of Engineering Drawing Instruments
2.1 Select the correct instruments to draw the different lines /
curves
2.2 Use correct grade of pencil to draw different types of lines and for
different purposes
2.3 Select and use appropriate scales for a given application.
2.4 Identify different drawing sheet sizes as per I.S. and
Standard Lay- outs.
2.5 Prepare Title block as per B.I.S. Specifications.
2.6 Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean
and tidy.
Drawing Plate 1: (Having two exercises)
3.0 Write Free Hand Lettering and Numbers
3.1 Write titles using sloping lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and
14mm height
3.2 Write titles using vertical lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm and
14mm height
3.3 Select suitable sizes of lettering for different layouts and
applications
Drawing plate 2: (Having 5 to 6 exercises)
108
4.0 Understand Dimensioning Practice
4.2 Acquaint with the conventions, notations, rules and methods of
dimensioning in engineering drawing as per the B.I.S.
4.5 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and
desiredsystem of dimensioning.
Drawing Plate 3: (Having 08 to10 exercises)
5.0 Apply Principles of Geometric Constructions
5.1 Practice the basic geometric constructions like
i) dividing a line into equal parts
ii) exterior and interior tangents to the given two circles
iii) tangent arcs to two given lines and arcs
5.2 Draw any regular polygon using general method when
i) side length is given
ii) inscribing circle radius is given
iii) describing circle radius is given
2.2 Draw the conics using general and special methods,
2.3 Draw the engineering curves like i) involute
ii) cycloid
iii) helix
5.4 Identify the applications of the above constructions in
engineering practice.
Drawing Plate -4: Having problems up to construction of polygon
Drawing Plate -5: Having problems of construction of conics
Drawing Plate -6: Having problems of construction of involutes, cycloid and helix
6.0 Apply Principles of Projection of points, lines, planes &auxiliary planes
6.1 Explain the basic principles of the orthographic projections
6.2 Visualise and draw the projection of a point with respect to
reference planes (HP&VP)
6.3 Visualise and draw the projections of straight lines with
respect to two referencePlanes (up to lines parallel to one
plane and inclined to other plane)
6.4 Visualise and draw the projections of planes (up to planes
perpendicular to one plane and inclined to other plane)
6.5 Identify the need of Auxiliary views for a given engineering
drawing.
6.5 Draw the auxiliary views of a given engineering component
Drawing Plate -7: Having problems up to projection of points and Lines (15
exercises)
Drawing Plate -8: Having problems of projection of planes (6 exercises)
Drawing Plate -9: Having problems on auxiliary planes (Having 4 exercises)
7.0 Draw the Projections of Solids
7.1 Visualise and draw the projections of solids (up to axis of solids
parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
Drawing plate No.10: Having problems of projection of solids (10 exercises)
109
8.0 Appreciate the need of Sectional Views
8.1 Identify the need to draw sectional views.
8.4 Differentiate between true shape and apparent shape of section
8.5 Draw sectional views and true sections of regular solids by applying
the principles of hatching.
Drawing Plate–11: Having problems of section of solids (6 exercises)
9.0 Apply principles of orthographic projection

9.1Draw the orthographic views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
9.2 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent a given
object fully.
Drawing Plate 12 : (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
10.0 Prepare pictorial drawings

10.1 identify the need of pictorial drawings.
10.2 Differentiate between isometric scale and true scale.
10.3 Prepare Isometric views for the given orthographic drawings.
Drawing plate 13: (Having 10 to 12 exercises)
11.0 Interpret Development of surfaces of different solids

11.1 State the need for preparing development drawing.
11.2 Draw the development of simple engineering objects (cubes,
prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid) using parallel line and radial line
method.
11.3 Prepare development of surface of engineering components
like i) funnel ii) 900 elbow
Drawing plate No. 14: (Having 05 exercises)
110
PO-CO Mapping
Course
Course Title ENGINEERING DRAWING No. of Periods
Code :
Number of Course Outcomes: 06 180
MNG-107
CO Periods
POs Mapped with CO No. Remarks
Column 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 12 7 1 >40% Level.3
(Highly addressed)
PO2 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 12 7 1
25% - 40% Level.2
PO3 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 72 40 3 (Moderately
addressed)
PO4 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 72 40 3
PO5 5% - 25% Level.1
(Low
PO6 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5 12 6 1 addressed)
PO7 <5% Not
addressed
CO-PO Mapping
CO No. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 2 3 3 2 1 2 2
CO2 2 3 3 3 2 1 2 2
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2
Average 2.6 2.2 3 3 2.6 1.4 2 2
Note : The gaps in CO-PO mapping will be met by one or more appropriate activities from the following:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest lectures (v) Group discussions (vi) Quiz
(vii) Industrial visits (viii) Tech fests (ix) Mini project works (x) Library visits etc
111
Key competencies to be achieved by the student
S.No Major topic Key Competency
 Explain the linkages between Engineering

1. Importance of Engineering Drawing drawing and other subjects of study in Diploma
course.
 Select the correct instruments to draw various
2. Engineering Drawing Instruments
entities in different orientation
 Write titles using sloping and vertical lettering
3. Free hand lettering & Numbering and numerals as per B.I.S (Bureau of Indian
standards)
 Dimension a given drawing using standard
4. Dimensioning Practice notations and desired system of dimensioning
 Construct ellipse, parabola, rectangular

5. Geometrical construction hyperbola, involute, cycloid and helix from the
given data.
Projection of points, Lines, Planes &  Draw the projections of points, straight lines,
6. planes & solids with respect to reference planes
Solids
(HP& VP)
 Draw the auxiliary views of a given Engineering
component
7. Auxiliary views
 Differentiate between Auxiliary view and
apparent view
 Differentiate between true shape and apparent
shape of section
8. Sections of Solids
 Apply principles of hatching.
 Draw simple sections of regular solids
 Draw the minimum number of views needed to
9. Orthographic Projection represent a given object fully.
 Differentiate between isometric scale and true

10. Pictorial Drawings scale.
 Draw the isometric views of given objects,.
 Prepare development of Surface of regular
11. Development of surfaces solids and other components like i) funnel ii)
900 elbow
112
COURSE CONTENT
NOTES: 1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.
2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.
1.0 The importance of Engineering Drawing
Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing Its importance as a
graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – SP-46 –1988 – Mention B.I.S
- Role of drawing in -engineering education – Link between Engineering drawing and other subjects
of study.
2.0 Engineering drawing Instruments
Classifications: Basic Tools, tools for drawing straight lines, tools for curved lines, tools for measuring
distances and special tools like mini drafter & drafting machine – Mentioning of names under each
classification and their brief description -Scales: Recommended scales reduced & enlarged -Lines:
Types of lines, selection of line thickness - Selection of Pencils -Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5,
Layout of drawing sheets in respect of A0, A1, A3 sizes, Sizes of the Title block and its contents - Care
and maintenance of Drawing Sheet, Drawing plate: Lay out of sheet – as per SP-46-1988 to a
suitable scale - Simple Exercises on the use of Drawing Instruments. Importance of Title Block.
3.0 Free hand lettering & numbering
Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering - Practicing of letters
&numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm) -Advantages of single stroke or simple style of
lettering - Use of lettering stencils
4.0 Dimensioning practice
Purpose of engineering Drawing, Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape description of an
Engineering object -Definition of Dimensioning size description -Location of features, surface finish,
fully dimensioned Drawing -Notations or tools of dimensioning, dimension line extension line, leader
line, arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed in the use of above tools -Placing
dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional system ( SP-46-1988)-Arrangement of dimensions
Chain, parallel, combined progressive, and dimensioning by co-ordinate methods-The rules for
dimensioning standard, features “Circles (holes) arcs, angles, tapers, chamfers, and dimension of
narrow spaces.
5.0 Geometric Construction
Division of a line: to divide a straight line into given number of equal parts -Construction of tangent
lines: to draw interior and exterior tangents to two circles of given radii and centre distance -
Construction of tangent arcs: -i) To draw tangent arc of given radius to touch two lines inclined at
given angle (acute, right and obtuse angles)-ii)Tangent arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc
and a given line-iii)Tangent arcs of radius R, touching two given circles internally and externally -
Construction of polygon: construction of any regular polygon by general method for given side
length, inscribing circle radius and describing/superscribing circle radius - Conics: Explanation of
Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, as sections of a double cone and a loci of a moving point, Eccentricity of
above curves – Their Engg. Applicationsviz.,Projectiles, reflectors, P-V Diagram of a Hyperbolic
process - Construction of any conic section of given eccentricity by general method -Construction of
ellipse by concentric circles method, Oblong Method and Arcs of circles method -Construction of
parabola by rectangle method and Tangent method -Construction of rectangular hyperbola - General
Curves: Involute, Cycloid and Helix, explanations as locus of a moving point -their engineering
application, viz., Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. –their construction
113
6.0 Projection of points, lines and planes & solids
Classification of projections,Observer, Object, Projectors, Projection,ReferencePlanes, Reference
Line, Various angles of projections –Differences between first angle and third angle projections -
Projections of points in different quadrants -Projections of straight line –(a)Parallel to both the
planes (b)Perpendicular to one of the planes (c)Inclined to one plane and parallel to other planes -
Projections of regular planes - (a) Plane parallel to one of the reference planes - (b) Plane
perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa - Projections of regular solids - (a) Axis
perpendicular to one of the planes (b)Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and vice versa.
7.0 Auxiliary views
Need for drawing auxiliary views -Explanation of the basic principles of drawing an auxiliary views
explanation of reference plane and auxiliary plane -Partial auxiliary view.
8.0 Sections of Solids
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Hatching – Section of regular solids
inclined to one plane and parallel to other plane
9.0 Orthographic Projections
Meaning of orthographic projection -Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views obtained
on the six faces of the box, - Legible sketches of only 3 views for describing object -Concept of front
view, top view, and side view sketching these views for a number of engg objects - Explanation of
first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in First angle projection - Projection of points
as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces of an object – Use of miter line in drawing a third
view when other two views are given -Method of representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum
number of views to describe an object fully.
10.0 Pictorial Drawings
Brief description of different types of pictorial drawing viz., Isometric, oblique, and Perspective and
their use - Isometric drawings: Iso axis, angle between them, meaning of visual distortion in
dimensions - Need for an isometric scale, difference between Isometric scale, and ordinary scale
difference between Isometric view and Isometric projection - Isometric and non-Isometric lines -
Isometric drawing of common features like rectangles, circular - shapes, non-isometric lines - Use of
box and offset methods.
11.0 Development of Surfaces
Need for preparing development of surface with reference to sheet metal work-Concept of true
length of a line with reference to its orthographic projection when the line is (i) parallel to the plane
of projection (ii) inclined to one principal and parallel to the other -Development of simple solids like
cubes, prisms, cylinders, cones, pyramid and truncation of these solids-Types of development:
Parallel line and radial line development -Procedure of drawing development of funnels, 900 elbow
pipes.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. P I Varghese : Engineering Graphics – ( McGraw-hill)
2. Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal : Engineering Drawing - ( McGraw-hill)
3. N.D.Bhatt : Engineering Drawing .
4. T.S.M. & S.S.M on “ Technical Drawing” : T.T.T.I., Madras.
5. SP-46-1998 : Bureau of Indian Standards.
114
MODEL BLUE PRINT
S. No. of Weightage Marks wise Question wise CO’s
No Major Topics periods of marks Distribution of Distribution of Mapped
Weightage Weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Importance of
1 01 - CO1
Engineering Drawing
Engineering Drawing
2 05 - CO1
Instruments
Free hand lettering &
3 06 5 5 1 CO1
Numbering
Dimensioning Practice
4 09 5 5 1 CO1
Geometrical CO2
5 21 15 5 10 1 1
constructions
Projections of points, CO3
6 21 10 10 1
Lines, Planes & Solids
Auxiliary views CO3
7 6 5 5 1
Sections of Solids CO3
8 27 10 10 1
Orthographic CO3
9 33 10 10 1
Projections
Isometric Views CO4
10 30 10 10 1
Development of CO5
11 21 10 10 1
surfaces
Total 180 80 20 60 4 6
Note : Students have to write four out of six 10 marks questions.
115
Model Paper for End Examination:
MODEL PAPER – BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C–20)
DCE—FOURTH SEMESTER EXAMINATION
ENGINEERING DRAWING (MNG-107)
Time: 3 hours] ____ [Total Marks: 80
PART—A ( 5 X 4 = 20 Marks)
Instructions:(1) Answer all questions.
(2) Eachquestioncarriesfivemarks.
(3) All dimensions are inmm.
1. Write the following in single-stroke vertical lettering of size 10 mm in capital letters:“CLEAN AND
GREEN IS OUR PERFECT DREAM” (CO1)
2. Redraw the following figure to full-scale and dimension it according to SP : 46—

1988byusingalignedsystem: (CO1)
3. Drawacommonexternaltangenttotwocirclesofradii25 mm and 20
mm.Thedistancebetweenthecentresofcirclesis75mm.
(CO2)
4.Draw theauxiliaryviewoftheobjectshowbelow: (CO3)
116
PART—B ( 10 x 4=40)
Instructions:(1) Answer any four questions.
(2) Each question carries ten marks.
(3) All dimensions are in mm.
5. Drawahelixofcylinderdiameter50mmandpitch70mm. (CO2)
6. Draw the top view and front view of a circular plane, if the surfaceof the
planeisperpendiculartoHPandinclinedat30ºtoVP. (CO3)
7. A hexagonal pyramid of base side 30 mm and axis 75 mm long is resting on its base in HP having a base
side parallel to VP. It is cut by a section plane which is inclined at 30º to HP, perpendicular to VP and
passing through a point on the axis at a distance of 35 mm from the vertex. Draw its sectional front view
and sectional top view. (CO3)
8. Draw the Front view, top view and side view of the given figure: (CO3)
9. Draw the isometric view of the object for the views given below. (CO4)
10. A right circular cone of diameter 50 mm and axis 75 mm long is resting on its base in HP. It is cut by a
section plane which is perpendicular to VP, inclined at 60º to HP and passing through a point on the axis
at a height of 40 mm from the base. Draw the surface development of the bottom position of
truncatedcone. (CO5)
***
117
Course code Course title No. of Total no.of Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods/week periods
MNG-108 Workshop 6 180 40 60
practice
S.No. Major Topics No. of periods

1. Carpentry 24
2. Fitting and welding 36
3. Basic machine operations 22
4. Plumbing 08
TOTAL 90
Course title : Workshop Practice

(i) To familiarize with the knowledge different materials tools used in
general Engineering processes
(ii) To use various basic implements used in general Engineering
Course Objectives processes
(iii) To know the etiquette of working with the fellow workforce
(iv) To reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/excercises
C01 Demonstrate the skill of planning and organizing experimental set up for
a desired purpose
C02 Perform precise operations/tasks with Engineering equipment or
instrument for investigation of Engineering problems
C03 Observe various parameters, their variations and graphically represent
Course Outcomes
the same
C04 Analyse the experimental results to draw inferences to make
recomendations
C05 Practice ethics & etiquette while working in a group and display
professionalism while communicating as a member and leader in a group
Learning outcome
1.0 Use of different tools in Carpentry, Fitting, Welding and Turning section of workshop.
2.0 Prepare various carpentry joints, panel boards and cabinet boxes.
3.0 Hacksaw cutting, grinding, thread cutting for metal conduit; G.I. Pipes and roads etc, in fitting section.
4.0 Handle welding transformer and make lap and butt joints.
5.0 Exercise on lathe like simple turning, step turning, taper turning and knurling.
6.0 Exercise on thread cutting for pipes and rods on Lathes.
7.0 Hand drilling machines and grinding machine.
8.0 Know the basics of plumbing work and applications.
8.1 Know the types of pipe joints.
Understand the symbols.
Know the materials used pipes.
Assembling, threading, joining of pipes.
Able to understand cross, T, L joints etc.
118
COURSE CONTENT
Following list of experiments are to be made by every student in the workshop
1. CARPENTRY
1. Exercises on planning, sawing and chiseling
2. Prepare a half lap joint
3. Prepare a Dovetail joint.
4. Prepare a Mortise joint.
5. Prepare a 20 cm X 15 cm Teakwood switch board with hinges and bottom hook.
6. Fix the laminate sheet to the above box and cut suitable holes to mount tone flush type switch, socket.
2. FITTING AND WELDING

1. Exercises to cut a metal conduit, G.I. Pipe and solid rod using hack saw.
2. 3 & 4 Thread cutting of G.I.pipe, metal conduit and solid rod using Die set.
5. & 6. Internal thread cutting using Tap set and cleaning the threads using reamers and make a hexagonal
nut from a round rod.
WELDING
1. Prepare a job and to make a lap joint and finish it using grinder.
2. Prepare a job and make a butt joint and finish it with grinder.
3. Prepare the job and make ‘T’ joint.
3. MACHINE SHOP
Exercise on turning the given rod to get three different diameters using lathe.
Make a bolt and cut threads using lathe.
Cut the threads to G.I. Pipe using lathe.
Prepare a centre punch and knurl its head.
Make a square plate using power hack saw, remove sharp edges using grinder, make triangle and drill three
holes of different diameters at the vertices.
4. PLUMBING
Plumbing work and applications
1. Types of pipe joints.
2. Symbols
3. Materials used for pipes
4. Assembling, Threading, Joining of pipes.
5. Different fittings such as cross, L, T etc.,
Scheme of Valuation for end Lab Practical Examination :
A. Writing Aim, Apparatus, Formula, Graph, Precautions carries 10 (Ten) Marks

B. For Drawing the table, taking Readings, Calculation work,
Drawing the graph, finding result carries 15 (Fifteen) Marks
C. Viva Voice 05 (Five) Marks
Total 30 (Thirty) Marks
119
 Course outcomes
Experiments with Vernier calipers, Screw gauge, Parallelogram law and Triangle
CO1
law
Experiments with Simple pendulum, Resonance apparatus (Velocity of sound in
CO2
air )
Course
Experiments with Convex lens, Refractive index of solid by travelling
Outcomes CO3
microscope
Experiments with quill tube (Boyles law verification), Meter bridge, Mapping of
CO4
magnetic lines of force
CO5 Experiments with Surface tension and Viscosity
 COs-PO mapping strength (as per given table)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

CO1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 1 2
120
EE
Subject Code Subject Title Periods per week Total periods per year
MNG-109 A Physics Laboratory 03 45
TIMESCHEDULE
S.No Name of the Experiment No.of
1. Hands on practice on Vernier Calipers Periods

03
2. Hands on practice on Screw gauge 03
3. Verification of Parallelogram law of forces and Triangle law of forces 03
4. Simple pendulum 03
5. Velocity of sound in air – (Resonance method) 03
6. Focal length and Focal power of convex lens (Separate & Combination) (Single lens 03
7. only)
Refractive index of solid using traveling microscope 03
8. Boyle’s law verification 03
9. Meter bridge 03
10. Mapping of magnet lines of force and locate null points 03
DEMONSTRATION EXPERIMENTS
11. Surface tension of liquid using traveling microscope 03
12. Coefficient of viscosity by capillary method 03
Revision 06
Test 03
Total 45
Objectives:
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Practice with Vernier calipers to determine the volumes and areas of a cylinder and sphere
and their comparison etc.
2.0 Practice with Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate, cross sectional area
of a wire and volumes of sphere and also their comparison etc
3.0 Verify the parallelogram law and Triangle law
4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity using Simple Pendulum
5.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and its value at zero degree
centigrade.
6.0 Calculate the Focal length and focal power of convex lenses using distant object method, U-V
method, U-V graph and 1 / U – 1 / V graph methods and their comparison.
7.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope.
8.0 Verify the Boyle’s law employing a Quill tube.
9.0 Determine the specific resistance of material of a wirel using Meter Bridge.
10.0 Drawing magnetic lines of force under N-S and N-N methods and locate null points.
11.0 Determine the surface tension of a liquid using travelling Microscope (Demo)
12.0 Determine the viscosity of a liquid using capillary method (Demo)
121
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the Experiment Competencies Key competencies
(Noon
1. Hands of practice
Periods) on  Find the Least count  Read the scales
Vernier Calipers(03)  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate the requisite
 Read the scales physical quantities of
 Calculate the physical given objects
quantities of given object
2. Hands on practice on  Find the Least count  Read the scales
Screw gauge(03)  Fix the specimen in posit  Calculate thickness of
 Read the scales given glass plate
 Calculate thickness of glass  Calculate cross section of
place and cross section of
wire and other quantities
wire and other quantities
3. Verification of  Fix suitable weights  Find the angle at

Parallelogram law of forces  Note the positions of threads equilibrium point
and Triangle law of on drawing sheet  Constructing
forces(03)  Find the angle at equilibrium parallelogram
point
 Construct parallelogram  Construct triangle
 Compare the measured  Compare the ratios of
diagonal force and length
 Construct triangle
 Find the length of sides
 Compare the ratios
4. Simple pendulum(03)  Fix the simple pendulum to  Find the time for number
the stand of oscillations
 Adjust the length of  Find the time period
pendulum  Calculate the acceleration
 Find the time for number of due to gravity
oscillations  Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
 Find the time period
 Calculate the acceleration
due to gravity
 Draw l-T and l-T2 graph
5. Velocity of sound in air  Arrange the resonance  Adjust the reservoir level
apparatus  Find the first and second
–Resonance method  Adjust the reservoir level for resonanting lengths
(03) booming sound
 Calculate velocity of
 Find the first and second
resonanting lengths sound at room
 Calculate velocity of sound temperature
 Calculate velocity of
sound at 00 C
122
6. Focal length and Focal  Fix the object distance  Calculate the focal length
power of convex lens  Find the Image distance and power of convex lens
(Separate & Combination)  Calculate the focal length  Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
(03) and power of convex lens graphs
and combination of convex
lenses
 Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
graphs
7. Refractive index of solid  Find the least count of  Read the scale
using traveling vernier on microscope  Calculate the refractive
microscope(03)  Place the graph paper below index of glass slab
microscope
 Read the scale
 Calculate the refractive index
of glass slab
8. Boyle’s law verification  Find the length of air

(03)  Note the atmospheric column
pressure
 Find the pressure of
 Fix the quill tube to retort enclosed air
stand  Find the value P x l
 Find the length of air column
 Find the pressure of
enclosed air
 Find and compare the
calculated value P x l
9. Meter bridge(03)  Make the circuit connections  Find the balancing length
 Find the balancing length  Calculate unknown
 Calculate unknown resistance
resistance  Calculate the specific
 Find the radius of wire resistance
 Calculate the specific
resistance
123
10. Mapping of magnet lines  Draw magnetic meridian
of force(03)  Placed the bar magnet in
NN and NS directions  Draw magnetic lines of
 Draw magnetic lines of force
force
 Locate the neutral  Locate the neutral
points along equatorial points
and axial lines along equatorial and
11. Surface tension of liquid  Find the least count of  Read the
axial scale
lines
using traveling vernier on microscope  Calculate height of liquid
microscope(03)  Focus the microscope to the rise
lower meniscus & bent pin  Calculate the surface
 Read the scale tension of water
 Calculate height of liquid rise
 Calculate the surface tension
of water
12.. Coefficient of viscosity  Find the least count of  Find the pressure head
by capillary method(03) vernier  Calculate rate of volume
 Fix the capillary tube to of liquid collected
aspiratory bottle
 Find the radius of
 Find the mass of collected
water capillary tube
 Find the pressure head  Calculate the viscosity of
 Calculate rate of volume of water
liquid collected
 Find the radius of capillary
tube
 Calculate the viscosity of
water using capillary method
Scheme of Valuation for end Lab Practical Examination :
D. Writing Aim, Apparatus, Formula, Graph, Precautions carries 10 (Ten) Marks

E. For Drawing the table, taking Readings, Calculation work,
Drawing the graph, finding result carries 15 (Fifteen) Marks
F. Viva Voice 05 (Five) Marks
Total 30 (Thirty) Marks
124
 Course outcomes
Experiments with Vernier calipers, Screw gauge, Parallelogram law and Triangle
CO1
law
Experiments with Simple pendulum, Resonance apparatus (Velocity of sound in
CO2
air )
Course
Experiments with Convex lens, Refractive index of solid by travelling
Outcomes CO3
microscope
Experiments with quill tube (Boyles law verification), Meter bridge, Mapping of
CO4
magnetic lines of force
CO5 Experiments with Surface tension and Viscosity
 COs-PO mapping strength (as per given table)
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

CO1 3 1 1 1 1
CO2 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 2
CO4 3 2 2
CO5 3 1 2 1 2
125
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
(C-20 curriculum common to all Branches)
Subject Subject Title Periods per week Total periods per year
Code
MNG- Chemistry 03 45
109B Laboratory
CO1 Operate and practice volumetric apparatus and preparation of standard

solution
CO2 Evaluate and judge the neutralization point in acid base titration
CO3 Evaluate the end point of reduction and oxidation reaction
CO4 Judge the stable end point of complex formation, stable precipitation
CO5 Judge operate and demonstrate and perform precise operations with
instrument for investigation of water pollution parameters
PO CO mapping
Course code C- Chemistry Laboratory No Of periods 45
109B No of Cos;5
POs Mapped with CO CO periods addressing Level remarks
No PO in Col 1 1,2,3
NO %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2 >40% level 3 (highly
CO4,CO5 addressed) 25% to 40%
PO2 CO1,CO2,CO3, 9 20 1 level2(moderately
CO4,CO5 addressed 5% to 25% level1
PO3 (Low addressed < 5%(not
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2 addressed)
CO4,CO5
PO5 CO2,CO3, 12 26.66 2
CO4,CO5
PO6
PO7
COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)
CO1 2 3 1 1
CO2 2 3 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 1
CO5 2 3 2 2 1
3=strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped
Note:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit vii) Tech
Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books
126
TIMESCHEDULE
S.No Name of the Experiment No.of Periods Mapped
with COs
1. a) Recognition of chemical substances and solutions used in the
laboratory by senses. CO1
b) Familiarization of methods for Volumetric analysis 03
2. Preparation of Std Na2CO3 and making solutions of different dilution 03 CO1

Estimation of HCl solution using Std.Na2CO3 solution
3. solution. 03 CO2
4. Estimation of NaOH using Std.HCl solution 03 CO2
5. Estimation of H 2 SO 4 usingStd.NaOH solution 03 CO2
6. Estimation of Mohr’s Salt using Std.KMnO4 03 CO3
7. Determination of acidity of water sample 03 CO2
8. Determination of alkalinity of water sample 03 CO2
9. Determination of total hardness of water using Std. EDTA solution 03 CO4
10. Estimation of Chlorides present in water sample 03 CO4
11. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O )in water sample 03 CO5
12. Determination of pH using pH meter 03 CO5
13. Determination of conductivity of water and adjusting ionic strength 03 CO5
required level.
14. Determination of turbidity of water 03 CO5
15. Estimation of total solids present in water sample 03 CO5
Total: 45
Objectives:
1.0 Practice volumetric measurements (using pipettes, measuring jars, volumetric flask, burettes) and
gravimetric measurements (using different types of balances), making dilutions, etc. To identify the
chemical compounds and solutions by senses.
2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighed salts and to make solutions of desired dilutions
using appropriate techniques.
3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. Na2CO3solutionfor estimation of HCl
4.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. HCl solution for estimation of NaOH
5.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. NaOH solution for estimation of
H 2 SO 4
6.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.KMnO4solution for estimation of
Mohr’s Salt
7.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of given samples of water
(One ground water and one surface / tap water, and rain water if available)
8.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of given samples of
water (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
127
9.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total hardness of given samples of
water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA solution
10.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chlorides present in the given
samples of water and wastewater (One ground water and one surface / tap water)
11.0 Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to determine Dissolved Oxygen (D.O) in
given water samples (One sample from closed container and one from open container / tap water)
12.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to determine
their pH using standard pH meter
13.0 Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions
a) To determine conductivity
b) To adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value
14.0 Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non coloured) to determine their
turbidity in NTU
15.0 To determine the total solids present in given samples of water (One ground water and one surface /
tap water)
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the Experiment

Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)
Familiarization of methods for
Volumetric analysis. Recognition of -
chemical substances And solutions --
(03)
 Weighing the salt to the  Weighing the salt to the

accuracy of .01 mg accuracy of .01 mg
Preparation of Std Na2CO3 and  Measuring the water with  Measuring the water with
making solutions of different volumetric flask, measuring jar, volumetric flask, measuring
dilution(03) volumetric pipette and jar, volumetric pipette and
graduated pipette graduated pipette
 Making appropriate dilutions  Making appropriate dilutions
 Cleaning the glassware and

Estimation of HCl solution using Std. rinsing with appropriate
Na2CO3solution (03)  Making standard solutions
solutions
 Measuring accurately the
Estimation of NaOH using Std.HCl  Making standard solutions
standard solutions and titrants
solution (03)  Measuring accurately the
 Effectively Controlling the flow
Estimation of H 2 SO 4 using standard solutions and titrants
Std.NaOH solution (03) of the titrant
 Filling the burette with titrant
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt using  Identifying the end point
 Fixing the burette to the stand
Std.KMnO4 (03)  Making accurate observations
 Effectively Controlling the flow
Determination of acidity of water
sample (03) of the titrant
128
Determination of alkalinity of  Identifying the end point
water sample (03)  Making accurate observations
 Calculating the results
Determination of total hardness of
water using Std. EDTA solution (03)
Estimation of Chlorides present in

water sample (03)
Estimation of Dissolved
Oxygen(D.O) in water sample (By
titration method) (03)
Determination of pH using pH  Familiarize with instrument

meter (03)  Choose appropriate ‘Mode’
/ ‘Unit’  Prepare standard
 Prepare standard solutions / solutions / buffers, etc.
Determination of conductivity of buffers, etc.  Standardize the
water and adjusting ionic strength  Standardize the instrument instrument with
to required level (03) with appropriate standard appropriate standard
solutions solutions
 Plot the standard curve  Plot the standard curve
 Make measurements  Make measurements
Determination of turbidity of water accurately accurately
(03)  Follow Safety precautions
 Measuring the accurate

volume and weight of  Measuring the accurate
sample volume and weight of
 Filtering and air drying sample
Estimation of total solids present in without losing any filtrate  Filtering and air drying
water sample (03)  Accurately weighing the without losing any filtrate
filter paper, crucible and  Accurately weighing the
filtrate filter paper, crucible and
 Drying the crucible in an filtrate
oven
SCHEME OF VALUATION
A) Writing Chemicals, apparatus ,principle and procedure 5M
B) Demonstrated competencies 20M
Making standard solutions
Measuring accurately the standard solutions and titrants
Effectively controlling the flow of the titrant
Identifying the end pointMaking accurate observations
C) Viva-voce 5M
---------------
Total 30M
129
Course No. of Total No. of
Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods
MNG-110
(common Computer
3 90 40 60
to all Fundamentals Lab
branches)
Time schedule:
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of sessions each No.of Periods
of 3 periods duration
1. Computer hardware Basics 2 6
2. Windows Operating System 2 6
3. MS Word 8 24
4. MS Excel 7 21
5. MS PowerPoint 5 15
6. Adobe Photoshop 6 18
Total periods 30 90
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Computer hardware Basics 6 CO1
2. Windows Operating System 6 CO1
3. MS Word 24 CO2
4. MS Excel 21 CO3
5. MS PowerPoint 15 CO4
6 Adobe Photoshop 18 CO5
Total periods 90
Course i)To know Hardware Basics

Objectives ii)To familiarize operating systems
iii)To use MS Office effectively to enable to students use these skills in future
courses
iv) To use Adobe Photoshop in image editing.
At the end of the course students will be able to

CO1 MNG-110.1 Identify hardware and software components
CO2 MNG-110.2 Prepare documents with given specifications using word
processing software
Course CO3 MNG-110.3 Use Spread sheet software to make calculation and to draw
Outcomes various graphs / charts.
CO4 MNG-110.4 Use Power point software to develop effective presentation for a
given theme or topic.
CO5 MNG-110.5 Edit digital or scanned images using Photoshop
130
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
C-110.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
C-110.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
C-110.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
C-110.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
C-110.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
Average 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped
Learning Outcomes:
I. Computer Hardware Basics
1. a).To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware connections
b).To Start and Shut down Computer correctly
c).To check the software details of the computer
2. To check the hardware present in your computer
II. Windows’s operating system
3. To Explore Windows Desktop
4. Working with Files and Folders
5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint
III. Practice with MS-WORD
6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word
Home – Insert- Page layout – References – Review- View.
7. To practice Word Processing Basics
8. To practice Formatting techniques
9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns
10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks
11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word
12. To use Equations and symbols features
IV.Practice with MS-EXCEL
13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout

14. To access and enter data in the cells
15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells
16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data
17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells
18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations
19. To sort and filter data in table.
20. To present data using Excel Graphs and Charts.
21. To develop lab reports of respective discipline.
22. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print
131
V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT
23. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.
24. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation
25. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint
26. To insert Text and Objects
27. To insert a Flow Charts
28. To insert a Table
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs
30. To insert video and audio
31. To practice Animating text and objects
32. To Review presentation
VI. Practice with Adobe Photoshop

33.To familiarize with standard toolbox
34. To edit a photograph.
35. To insert Borders around photograph.
36. To change Background of a Photograph.
37. To change colors of Photograph.
38. To prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.
39. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an elegant look.
40. To type a word and apply the shadow emboss effects.
Key competencies:
Expt No Name of Experiment Competencies Key competencies
1 (a). To familiarize with a. Identify the parts of a Connect cables to
Computer system and Computer system: i). CPU ii). external hardware and
hardware connections Mother Board iii) Monitor iv) operate the computer
CD/DVD Drive v) Power Switch
vi) Start Button vii) Reset
Button
b. Identify and connect various
peripherals
c. Identify and connect the
cables used with computer
system
d. Identify various ports on CPU
and connect Keyboard &
Mouse
1 (b). To Start and Shut down a. Log in using the password a. Login and logout as
Computer correctly b. Start and shut down the per the standard
computer procedure
c. Use Mouse and Key Board b. Operate mouse
&Key Board
1 (c). To Explore Windows a. Familiarize with Start Menu, a. Access application
132
Desktop Taskbar, Icons and Shortcuts programs using
Start menu
b. Access application programs b. Use taskbar and

using Start menu, Task Task manager
manager
c. Use Help support
2. To check the software a. Find the details of Operating Access the

details of the computer System being used properties of
b. Find the details of Service computer and find
Pack installed the details
3. To check the hardware a. Find the CPU name and clock a. Access device
present in your computer speed manager and find
b. Find the details of RAM and the details
Hard disk present b. Type /Navigate the
c. Access Device manager using correct path and
Control Panel and check the Select icon related
status of devices like mouse to the details
and key board required
d. Use My Computer to check
the details of Hard drives and
partitions
e. Use the Taskbar
4. Working with Files and a. Create folders and organizing a. Create files and
Folders files in different folders folders Rename ,
arrange and search
b. Use copy / paste move for the required
commands to organize files folder/file
and folders
c. Arrange icons – name wise, b. Restore deleted files

Working with Files and size, type, Modified from Recycle bin
Folders d. Search a file or folder and find
Continued.... its path
e. Create shortcut to files and
folders (in other folders) on
Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use of
My Documents
g. Familiarize with the use of
Recycle Bin
133
5. To use Windows a. Familiarize with the use of a. Use windows
Accessories: Calculator accessories and
Calculator – Notepad – b. Access Calculator using Run select correct text
WordPad – MS Paint command editor based on the
c. Create Text Files using situation.
Notepad and WordPad and
observe the difference in file b. Use MS pain to
size create /Edit pictures
d. Use MS paint and create and save in the
.jpeg, .bmp files using MS required format.
Paint
6. To familiarize with Ribbon a. Create/Open a document a. Create a Document

layout of MS word. – b. Use Save and Save as features and name
Home – Insert- page c. Work on two Word appropriately and
layout- References-Review- documents simultaneously save
View d. Choose correct Paper size and b. Set paper size and
Printing options print options
7. To practice Word a. Typing text a. Use key board and

Processing Basics b. Keyboard usage mouse to enter/edit
c. Use mouse (Left click / Right text in the
click / Scroll) document.
d. Use Keyboard shortcuts b. Use shortcuts
e. Use Find and Replace c. Use spell check/
features in MS- word Grammar features
f. Use Undo and Redo Features for auto corrections.
g. Use spell check to correct
Spellings and Grammar
8. To practice Formatting a. Formatting Text a. Format Text and

techniques b. Formatting Paragraphs paragraphs and use
c. Setting Tabs various text styles.
d. Formatting Pages b. Use bullets and
e. The Styles of Word numbers to create
f. Insert bullets and numbers lists
g. Themes and Templates c. Use Templates
h. Insert page numbers, header /Themes
and footer d. Insert page numbers
date, headers and
footers
9. To insert a table of a. Edit the table by adding the a. Insert table in the
required number of rows fields – Deleting rows and word document and
and columns columns –inserting sub table – edit
marking borders. Merging and b. Use sort option for
splitting of cells in a Table arranging data.
b. Changing the background
colour of the table
c. Use table design tools
134
d. Use auto fit – fixed row/
column height/length – Even
distribution of rows / columns
features
e. Convert Text to table and
Table to Text
f. Use Sort feature of the Table
to arrange data in
ascending/descending order
10. To Insert objects, clipart a. Create a 2-page document. a. Insert hyperlinks

and Hyperlinks &Insert hyperlinks and t &Bookmarks
Bookmarks. b. Create organization
b. Create an organization chart charts/flow charts
c. Practice examples like
preparing an Examination
schedule notice with a
hyperlink to Exam schedule
table.
11. To Use Mail merge feature a. Use mail merge to prepare Use Mail merge
of MS Word individually addressed letters feature
b. Use mail merge to print
envelopes.
12. To use Equations and a. Explore various symbols Enter Mathematical
symbols features. available in MS Word symbols and
b. Insert a symbol in the text Equations in the word
c. Insert mathematical equations document
in the document
13. To Practice with MS-EXCEL a. Open /create an MS Excel a. Familiarize with
spreadsheet and familiarize excel layout and
with MS Excel 2007 layout like use
MS office Button- b. Use various
b. Use Quick Access Toolbar- features available
Title Bar- Ribbon-Worksheets- in toolbar
Formula Bar-Status Bar
14. To access and Enter data in a. Move Around a Worksheets- a. Access and select
the cells Quick access -Select Cells the required cells
b. Enter Data-Edit a Cell-Wrap by various
Text-Delete a Cell Entry-Save a addressing
File-Close Excel methods
b. Enter data and edit
15. To edit spread sheet Copy, a. Insert and Delete Columns and Format the excel
Cut, Paste, and selecting Rows-Create Borders-Merge sheet
cells and Center
b. Add Background Color-Change
the Font, Font Size, and Font
Color
135
c. Format text with Bold,
Italicize, and Underline-Work
with Long Text-Change a
Column's Width
16. To use built in functions a. Perform Mathematical Use built in functions
and Formatting Data Calculations verify -AutoSum in Excel
b. Perform Automatic
Calculations-Align Cell Entries
17. To enter a Formula for a. Enter formula
automatic calculations b. Use Cell References in Enter formula for
Formulae automatic calculations
c. Use Automatic updating
function of Excel Formulae
d. Use Mathematical Operators
in Formulae
e. Use Excel Error Message and
Help
18. To Create Excel Functions, a. Use Reference Operators a. Create Excel sheets
Filling Cells b. Work with sum, Sum if , involving cross
Count and Count If Functions references and
c. Fill Cells Automatically equations
b. Use the advanced
functions for
conditional
calculations
19. To sort and filter data in a. Sort data in multiple columns a. Refine the data in a
table b. Sort data in a row worksheet and
c. Sort data using Custom order keep it organized
d. Filter data in work sheet b. Narrow a
worksheet by
selecting specific
choice
20. To Practice Excel Graphs a. Produce an Excel Pie Chart a. Use data in Excel
and Charts b. Produce sheet to Create
c. Excel Column Chart technical charts and
graphs Produce
Excel Line Graph
b. Produce a
Pictograph in Excel
21. To develop lab reports of Create Lab reports using MS a. Insert Practical
respective discipline Word and Excel subject name in
Header and page
numbers in Footer
22. To format a Worksheet in a. Shade alternate rows of data a. Format Excel sheet
Excel, page setup and print b. Add currency & percentage symbols b. Insert headers
c. Change height of a row and &footers and print
width of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and Footers
f. Set Print Options and Print
136
23. To familiarize with Ribbon Use various options in Access required
layout &features of PowerPoint options in the tool bar
PowerPoint 2007. a. Home
b. Insert
c. Design
d. Animation
e. Slideshow
f. View
g. Review
24. To create a simple a. Insert a New Slide into a. Create simple
PowerPoint Presentation PowerPoint PowerPoint
b. Change the Title of a presentation with
PowerPoint Slide photographs/ClipAr
c. PowerPoint Bullets t and text boxes
d. Add an Image to a PowerPoint b. Use bullets option
Slide
e. Add a Textbox to a
PowerPoint slide
25. To Set up a Master Slide in a. Create a PowerPoint Design a. Setup Master slide
PowerPoint and add notes Template and format
b. Modify themes b. Add notes
c. Switch between Slide master
view and Normal view
d. Format a Design Template
Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a Design
Template
f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
g. Add Notes to a PowerPoint
Presentation
26. To Insert Text and Objects a. Insert Text and objects Insert Text and
b. Set Indents and line spacing Objects
c. Insert pictures/ clipart Use 3d features
d. Format pictures
e. Insert shapes and word art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects
27. To insert a Flow Chart / a. Create a Flow Chart in Create organizational
Organizational Charts PowerPoint charts and flow charts
b. Group and Ungroup Shapes using smart art
c. Use smart art
28. To insert a Table a. PowerPoint Tables Insert tables and
b. Format the Table Data format
c. Change Table Background
d. Format Series Legend
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in Create charts and Bar
PowerPoint graphs, Pie Charts and
b. Work with the PowerPoint format.
Datasheet
137
c. Format a PowerPoint Chart
Axis
d. Format the Bars of a Chart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart Background
30. To Insert audio & video, a. Insert sounds in the slide and a. Insert Sounds and
Hyperlinks in a slide hide the audio symbol Video in
Add narration to the slide b. Adjust the volume in the appropriate
settings format.
c. Insert video file in the format b. Add narration to
supported by PowerPoint in a the slide
slide c. Use hyperlinks to
d. Use automatic and on click switch to
options different slides
e. Add narration to the slide and files
f. Insert Hyperlinks
31. To Practice Animation a. Apply transitions to slides Add animation effects
effects b. To explore and practice
special animation effects like
Entrance, Emphasis, Motion
Paths &Exit
32. Reviewing presentation a. Checking spelling and a. Use Spell check
grammar and Grammar
b. Previewing presentation feature
c. Set up slide show b. Setup slide show
d. Set up resolution c. Add timing to the
e. Exercise with Rehearse slides
Timings feature in PowerPoint d. Setup automatic
f. Use PowerPoint Pen Tool slide show
during slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Hand-out
33 To familiarize with a. Open Adobe Photoshop Open a photograph
standard toolbox b. Use various tools such as and save it in
i. The Layer Tool Photoshop
ii. The Color & Swatches Tool
iii. Custom Fonts & The Text Tool
iv. Brush Tool
v. The Select Tool
vi. The Move Tool
vii. The Zoom Tool
viii. The Eraser
ix. The Crop Tool
x. The Fill Tool
138
34 To edit a photograph a. Use the Crop tool a. Able to edit image
b. Trim edges by using
c. Change the shape and size of a corresponding tools.
photo
d. Remove the part of
photograph including graphics
and text
35 To insert Borders around a. Start with a single background Able to create a
photograph layer border or frame
b. Bring the background forward around an image to
c. Enlarge the canvas add visual interest to
d. Create a border color a photo
e. Send the border color to the
back
f. Experiment with different
colors
36 To change Background of a a. open the foreground and Able to swap
Photograph background image background elements
b. Use different selection tools to using the Select and
paint over the image Mask tool and layers.
c. Copy background image and
paste it on the foreground.
d. Resize and/or drag the
background image to
reposition.
e. In the Layers panel, drag the
background layer below the
foreground image layer.
37 To change colors of a. Change colors using: Able to control color
Photograph i) Color Replacement tool saturation
ii) Hue/Saturation adjustment
layer tool
38 To prepare a cover page for a. open a file with height 500 and Able to prepare cover
the book in subject area width 400 for the cover page. page for the book
b. apply two different colors to
work area by dividing it into
two parts using Rectangle tool.
c. Copy any picture and place it
on work area→ resize it using
free transform tool.
d. Type text and apply color and
style
e. Apply effects using blended
options
39 To adjust the brightness a. open a file. Able to control
and contrast of picture to b. Go to image→ adjustments→ brightness/contrast.
give an elegant look Brightness/Contrast.
c. adjust the brightness and
contrast.
d. Save the image.
139
40 To type a word and apply a. open a file Able to apply shadow
the shadow emboss effects b. Select the text tool and type emboss effects
text.
c. Select the typed text go to
layer→ layer style→ blended
option→ drop shadow, inner
shadow, bevel and emboss→
contour→ satin→ gradient
overlay
d. Save the image.
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit test-1 From 1 to 8
140
I YEAR INTERNAL LAB EXAMINATION
UNIT TEST - I
COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS LAB
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: MNG-110

MAX MARKS:40 Time:90Min
1. Identify the internal hardware components of a PC and assemble them.
2. Identify the external components or peripherals of a PC and connect them.
3. Identify the components on motherboard.
4. Perform the process of placing processor on CPU slot.
5. Perform the process of removing and placing the RAM in the corresponding slot.
6. Identify the CMOS battery and test whether it is working it or not.
7. Find details of following:
a) Operating System being used.
b) Processor name
c) RAM
d) Hard disk
8. Create a folder by your name, search a file or folder and find its path.
9. Draw the National Flag using MS Paint.
10. Create a word document that contains TEN names of your classmates (boys-5 & girls-5) and
perform the following tasks:
a) Save the document to your desktop.
b) Sort the names in each list alphabetically.
c) Set line spacing to 1.15.
d) Use bullet points for the names in both lists separately.
***
141
I Year Internal Lab Examination
UNIT TEST - II
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:MNG-110
1. Write individually addressed letters to your friends about the Republic Day celebration
using Mail Merge.
2. Create a Word document about your college and insert page numbers in footer and College Name in
header.
3. Create your class time table using Tables in MS Word.
4. Create a 2-page document about your College& insert hyperlinks for courses offered in the college and
insert Bookmarks next to College Name.
5. Write individually addressed letters to your friends (at least 5 members) to intimate the External
Examination time table using Mail Merge.
(𝑥+𝑦)2 𝑥 2 +2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2
6. Write an equation = in MS word.
(𝑥−𝑦)2 𝑥 2 −2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2
7. Create the organizational structure of your college in MS Word.

8. Create a spreadsheet by totaling marks of 3 or more subjects, then calculate percentage and hence find
grade based on boundary conditions of FIVE students:
Grades O >= 90%, A >=80%, B >=70%, C >=60%, D >=50%, E >=40%, F <40%
9. Create a Excel spreadsheet for the following data, making sure that the cell marked with Category (A1) is
pasted in cell A1 in the spreadsheet and perform the questions below.
Category (A1) Product Name Quantity Inventory Price per Unit Total Price
Office Supplies Binder 2 20 12.99 25.98
Office Supplies Pencil 20 20 0.99
Electronics Samsung 4K Smart TV 1 5 399.00
Electronics Bluetooth Speakers 4 5 44.49
Computers Lenovo X230 12in Laptop 2 2 279.90

a) Change the format of the “Total Price” column to “Currency” format.
b) Calculate Total Price by writing formula.
c) Turn on filtering for the table.
d) Sort the table by column “Category” from A to Z.
10. Create a spreadsheet to calculate Cumulative monthly attendance for a period of Three months.
142
Year Internal Lab Examination
UNIT TEST - III
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE: MNG-110
1. Create a PowerPoint Presentation about your College in 5 slides only.
2. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on Computer Hardware in minimum 5 slides.

3. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on Computer Fundamentals with Entrance, Emphasis effects in
minimum 5 slides.
4. Create a PowerPoint Presentation on any topic with special animation effects like Entrance, Motion Paths
&Exit.
5. Resize the image using Photoshop.
6. Change the background of a Photograph.
7. Edit an image by using
a) Crop tool.
b) Resize the image
c) Save the new image with new name keeping original image as it is.
8. A Picture of two parrots (parrots.jpg) is given to you. Make anyone of one of the parrots in Black & White.
9. Convert a color image to monochrome and improve quality of photograph.
10. Copy three pictures and fit into the empty frames.
***
143
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATIONS
DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING
MODEL PRACTICAL QUESTION PAPER-YEAR END EXAM
SCHEME: C-20 SUBJ CODE:MNG-110
MAX MARKS:60 TIME: 3HOURS
1. Identify the internal hardware components of a PC and assemble them.

2. Identify the external components or peripherals of a PC and connect them.
3. Write the procedure to create the files and folders
4. Write the procedure to access Calculator, Paint and Notepad application
5. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word
(a) Change the Font Size
(b) Change the Font Style
(c) Change the Text Size
6. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word
(a) Change the Font Color. (b)Use Various Text Alignment Options.
(c)Format text in Bold, Italic and Underline.
7. Create the hierarchy of your family in MS Word.
8. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Word:
(a) Insert a Table (b) Add a Row (c) Add a column
(d) Delete a Row (e) Delete a column
(𝑥+𝑦)2 𝑥 2 +2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2
9. Write the procedure to use Equation(𝑥−𝑦)2 = 𝑥 2 −2𝑥𝑦 +𝑦 2 and Symbols.
10. Write the procedure to perform the following in MS Excel
(a) To Modify Column Width (b) To Modify Row Height
(c) Format text in Bold, Italic, and Underline.
11. Write the procedure to create charts and Graphs in MS Excel.
12. Write the procedure to create simple Power Point Presentation on your college in Three slides.
13. Write the procedure to perform Animation on Text and Objects in your presentation.
14. Take a photographic image. Give a title for the image. Put the border. Write your names. Write the
Name of Institution and Place.
15. Prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area. Plan your own design.
16. You are given a picture of a flower and associated background (Extract.jpg).Extract the Flower only
from that and organize it on a background. Select your own background for organization.
17. You are given a picture (BrightnessContrast.jpg). Adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so
that it gives an elegant look.
18. You are given a picture (position.jpg). Position the picture preferably on a plain background of a
color of your choice - Positioning include rotation and scaling.
19. Remove the arrows and text from the given photographic image(Filename: photo.jpg).
20. Type a word; apply the following effects. Shadow Emboss.
***
144
III SEMESTER
145
III SEMESTER( SECOND YEAR)
Instruction
period / week Total
Subject Name of the
Period End
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Engineering
MNG- Mathematics – 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
301 II
MNG- Basic Electrical
5 - 75 3 20 80 100
302 Engineering
Basic
MNG-
Mechanical 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
303
Engineering
Underground
MNG-
Coal Mining 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
304
Methods
MNG- Mine
5 - 75 3 20 80 100
305 Surveying-I
MNG-
Mining Geology 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
306
PRACTICAL
Basic Electrical
MNG- Engineering
- 3 45 3 40 60 100
307 Laboratory
Practice
Basic
MNG- Mechanical
Engineering - 3 45 3 40 60 100
308
Laboratory
Practice
MNG- Mine Surveying
- 4 60 3 40 60 100
309 Practice –I
MNG- Mining Geology

Laboratory - 3 45 3 40 60 100
310
Practice
TOTAL 29 13 630 280 720 1000
146
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Code Periods/week periods
Engineering
MNG-301 4 60 20 80
Mathematics-II

1 Indefinite Integration 22 CO1
2 Definite Integration and its applications 24 CO2
3 Differential Equations of first order 14 CO3
Total Periods 60
Course Objectives (i) To understand the concepts of indefinite integrals and definite integrals with
applications to engineering problems.
(ii) To understand the formation of differential equations and learn various
methods of solving them.
CO1 Integrate various functions using different methods.

Course Outcomes CO2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.
CO3 Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of first order
and first degree.
147
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
Learning Outcomes
Unit-I
C.O. 1 Integrate various functions using different methods.
L.O.1.1. Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2. State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of Integrals  (u + v) dx and  ku
dx where k is constant and u, v are functions of x.
1.3. Solve integration problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4. Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of substitution.
i)  f(ax + b) dx where f(x)dx is in standard form.
ii)  [f(x)]n f (x) dx
iii)  f (x)/[f(x)] dx
iv)  f {g(x)} g (x) dx
1.5. Find the integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x using the above.
1.6. Evaluate the integrals of the form sinmx cosn x dx where m and n are suitable positive
integers.
1.7. Evaluate integrals of suitable powers of tan x and sec x.
1.8. Evaluate the Standard integrals of the functions of the type
z
1.9. Evaluate the integrals of the type
e x  e x
sinh x  .
2
1.10. Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
1.11. Solve problems using integration by parts.
1.12 Use Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form .
1.13. Evaluate the integrals of the form ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.
Unit-II
C.O.2 Evaluate definite integrals with applications.
L.O.2.1. State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
2.2. Explain the concept of definite integral.
2.3. Solve problems on definite integrals over an interval using the above concept.
2.4. State various properties of definite integrals.
2.5. Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.
2.6. Explain definite integral as a limit of sum by considering an area.
2.7. Find the areas under plane curves and area enclosed between two curves using integration.
2.8. Obtain the mean value and root mean square value of the functions in any given interval.
2.9. Obtain the volumes of solids of revolution.
2.10. Solve some problems using Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule for approximation of integrals.
148
Unit -III
C.O. 3 Form differential equations and solve differential equations of first order and first degree.
L.O. 3.1 Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
3.2 Find order and degree of a given differential equation.
3.3 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
3.4 Solve the first order and first degree differential equations by variables separable method.
3.5 Solve Homogeneous differential equation of first order and first degree.
3.6 Solve exact differential equation of first order and first degree.
3.7 Solve linear differential equation of the form dy/dx + Py = Q, where P and Q are functions of x or
constants.
3.8 Solve Bernoulli’s differential equation reducible to linear form.
3.9 Solve simple problems arising in engineering applications.
C-20
Engineering Mathematics – II
CO/PO – Mapping
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 1 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.6 2.6 2.6 3 2.3 2.6
3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)
teacher.
conducted.
PSO1: An ability to understand the concepts of basic mathematical techniques and to apply them in various
areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and electronic systems and
all concerned engineering disciplines.
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tools, along with analytical skills to
arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.
PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a successful
career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological applications.
149
CO periods addressing PO in column
I
Mapped with CO Level
PO no Remarks
no (1,2 or 3)
Number %
1 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 >40% Level 3
2 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 Highly addressed
3 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3
4 CO2, CO3 38 63.3% 3 25% to 40% Level
5 2 Moderately
6 addressed
7
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, CO3 60 100% 3 5% to 25% Level 1
Low addressed
PSO 2 CO1, CO2, CO3 40 66.6% 3
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, CO3 48 75% 3 <5% Not

addressed
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
COURSE CONTENTS
Unit-I
Indefinite Integration.
1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integrals of standard functions. Properties of indefinite
integrals. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x. Integrals of
the form a  ib where at least one of m and n is odd positive integers. Integrals of suitable powers of tanx.
secx and cosecx.cotx by substitution.
Evaluation of integrals which are reducible to the following forms:
(1,1)
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational, algebraic functions.
Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule and integrals of the form  ex [f(x) + f (x)] dx.
Unit-II
Definite Integral and its applications:
2. Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,
evaluation of simple definite integrals. Definite integral as the limit of a sum. Area under plane curves –
Area enclosed between two curves. Mean and RMS values of a function on a given interval Volumes of solids
of revolution. Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 rule to evaluate an approximate value of a define integral.
Unit -III
Differential Equations:
3. Definition of a differential equation-order and degree of a differential equation- formation of differential
equations-solutions of differential equations of first order and first degree using methods, variables
separable, homogeneous, exact, linear differential equation, Bernoulli’s equation.
150
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-II, a textbook for third semester diploma courses, prepared & prescribed by SBTET,
AP.
Reference Books:
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.
2. Schaum’s Outlines Differential Equations, Richard Bronson & Gabriel B. Costa
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers, Moscow.
BLUE PRINT
S. Chapter/Unit No of Weight Marks wise Question wise COs

No title Periods age distribution of weight distribution of weight mapped
allotted age age
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Unit – I:
1 Indefinite 22 28 11 11 06 0 2 2 2 0 CO1
Integration
Unit – II:
Definite
2 Integration 24 33 11 03 11 08 2 1 2 1 CO2
and its
applications
Unit – III:
Differential
3 14 19 03 03 03 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
Equations of
first order
Total 60 80 25 17 20 18 5 4 5 2
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O 1.1 to L.O 2.5
Unit Test-II From L.O 2.6 to L.O 3.9
151
C –20, MNG-301
UNIT TEST MODEL PAPERS
Unit Test I
First Year
Subject Name: Engineering Mathematics-II
Sub Code: MNG-301
Time : 90 minutes Max.marks:40
Part-A 16Marks
(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks each.
Evaluate 2 x  3 y  1  0 (CO1)
Evaluate 2 x  y  3  0 (CO1)
x  y  2  0 is true/false (CO1)
a. Evaluate x  y  2 x  4 y  4  0
2 2
(CO2)
sin 2  sin 4  sin 6
2. Evaluate  tan 4 (CO1)
cos 2  cos 4  cos 6
1 1 1 
3. Evaluate tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  (CO1)
2 5 8 4
4. Evaluate 2sin   sin   1  0
2
(CO1)
5. Evaluate ABC (CO2)
Part-B 3×8=24
6. A) Evaluate B  600 (CO1)
OR
c a
B) Evaluate  1 (CO1)
ab bc
7. A) Evaluate (2,3) (CO1)
OR
B) Evaluate (6,9) (CO1)
8. A) Evaluate (1, 1) (CO2)

OR
B) Evaluate x  y  3  0 (CO2)
-o0o-
152
Unit Test II C –20, MNG-301
First Year
Sub Code: MNG-301
Part-A 16Marks
(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three marks each.
x2  1 sin 2
a. Volume of the curve lim over the interval lim  2 when rotated about X-axis
x 1 x5  0 
is ____________ (CO2)
b. Mean value of
d
dx
3tan 1 x   ? over the interval x is____________ (CO2)
x5  32
c. Order of differential equation lim is__________ (CO3)
x 2 x2  4
d. Integrating factor of 3tan x  4log x  7 x is________________ (CO3)
2. Find the mean value of x 2 sin x over the interval x (CO2)
2x  3
3. Find the area enclosed by curve between the lines sin 1  2 x 2  and tan 1  2 x 2 
3x  4  1 x   1 x 
(CO2)
dy
4. Form the differential equation by eliminating the arbitrary constants from (CO3)
dx
Solve y  x
cos x
5. (CO3)
153
Part-B 3×8=24
x4  y 4
A) Find the area bounded between the curve u ( x, y )  and the line 3 y  x  6 x  17
2
6.
x y
(CO2)
OR
B) Find the R.M.S value of (4,3) between the lines 8 sqcm / min to 5cm (CO2)
A) Find the volume of the solid obtained by revolving the ellipse f ( x)  x  6 x  9 x  15. about x
3 2
7.
axis (CO2)
OR
    
B) Calculate the approximate value of A  0, , , ,  by taking f : A  B using Trapezoidal
 6 4 3 2
rule (CO3)
8. A) Solve f ( x)  cos x, (CO3)

OR
B) Solve f . (CO3)
-o0o-
154
END EXAM MODEL PAPERS
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS MNG-301
PART-A
x
1. Evaluate CO1
 x 1 x  2
3 9 0 
2. Evaluate A    CO1
1 8  2
4 0 2
3. Evaluate B  
4
, CO1
7 1
4. Evaluate A  B CO1
5. Evaluate A  B. CO2
cos160  sin160 sin 2  1 i 

6. Find the mean value of  tan 610
. from  cot . to  2  i .
cos160  sin160 1  cos2  
CO2
7. Find the area of the region bounded by the curve x  2 y  3  0 from x  2 y  8  0. to
lim sin77 x . CO2

x0 sin11x
8. Find the order and degree of the differential equation 3tan x  4log x  7 x
2
CO3
9. Solve x. CO3
10. Solve x  at , y  2at ,

2
CO3
PART-B

dy
11. A) Evaluate . CO1
dx
OR
3 3 4
B) Evaluate  2 3 4  . CO1

0 1 1 
155
12. A) Evaluate x  y  z  6, x  y  z  2 CO1
Or
B) Evaluate 2x  y  3z  9 CO1
3
13. A) Evaluate cos x  cos y  CO2
5
Or
2
B) Evaluate cos x  cos y  , CO2
7
 x y  x y
14. A) Find the area of the region bounded by the curves 21tan   10cot    0.
 2   2 
1 x  tan 1 y  tan 1 z  
and tan . CO2
Or
B) Find the R.M.S values of x  y  z  xyz. from 3cos  sin 1. to  ABC,
CO2
15. A) Find the volume of the solid generated by revolution of the ellipse
cot A  cot B  cot C  s . about X-axis

2
CO2
2 2 2 
Or
B) Calculate the approximate value of  4,2 by using Simpson’s 1/3 rd

rule by dividing the
range into 10 equal parts. CO2

PART-C
16. Solve 1,5 CO3
***
156
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER-II MAX.MARKS : 80M
PART-A
1. Evaluate 4 x
2
16 y2  1. CO1
1  2x 
2. Evaluate sin  2 CO1
 1 x 
1  2x 
3. Evaluate tan  2 CO1
 1 x 
 x3  y 3 
4. Evaluate u  tan 
1
, CO1
 x  y 
u u
5. Evaluate x y  sin 2u. CO2
x y
6. Find the mean value of f : R  R over the complete wave. CO2
1
7. Find the volume generated by revolving the circle f ( x)  ax  b, from f ( x). to
1
about x-axis CO2
 x  1 x  2
8. Obtain the differential equation by eliminating the arbitrary constants A and B
 0 1 3 
 
from the curve A   1 0 7  CO3
 3 x 0 
9. Solve x. CO3
0 0
1 1
10. Solve sin 82  sin 2 22 .
2
CO3
2 2
157
PART-B
cos3 A
11. A) Evaluate  cos A. CO1
2cos 2 A  1
Or
B) Evaluate 3  2i  . 4  7i  CO1
12. A) Evaluate 1,2 CO1
OR
B) Evaluate 3, 4. CO1
x5  32
13. A) Evaluate lim . CO2
x2 x2
OR
B) Evaluate x  sec x  log x CO2
14. A) Find the area bounded between the curves x. and the line u( x, y)  x  3axy  y , .
3 3
CO3
OR
1 1 1
u between the lines u . to a b c  a  b b  c c  a .
B) Find the R.M.S value of    
x y 2 2 2
a b c
CO2
15. A) Find the volume of right circular cone using integration. CO2
OR
B) Find the approximate value of x  2 y  3z  6,3x  2 y  4z  5 from x  y  z  1

sin 2  sin 4  sin 6
using Trapezoidal rule by dividing  tan 4 . into 5 equal sub-intervals.
cos 2  cos 4  cos 6
CO2
PART-C

1 1 1 1 
16. Solve tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  tan 1  . CO3
3 5 7 8 4
***
158
Course No. of periods / Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course Title
Code Week Periods FA SA
BASIC ELECTRICAL
MNG302 5 75 20 80
ENGINEERING
COURSE OUTCOMES MAPPING
CO’s
S.No Major Topics No. of periods
Mapped
1. Electrical Engineering Fundamentals 12 CO1
2. Electrical Circuits 14 CO2
3. Electrical Machines 22 CO3
4 Electrical Measuring Instruments 15 CO4
5. Electrical Safety Procedures 12 CO5
Total 75
To familiarize the basic concepts and working principles of electrical

engineering to solve various electrical circuits.
COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the construction and working of different electrical machines
and measuring instruments.
To acquire the knowledge to operate different electrical equipment with
safety.
Recognizing the basic concepts of electrical engineering and

CO1 MNG302.1
their applications.
Analyse the various parameters of electrical circuits to know
CO2 MNG302.2
COURSE their importance in electrical engineering.
OUTCOMES Analyzing the usage of various electrical machines for different
CO3 MNG302.3
applications.
CO4 MNG302.4 Comparing various electrical measuring instruments.
Identifying and using suitable safety measures and tools at
CO5 MNG302.5
different situations.
159
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Electrical Engineering Fundamentals
1.1 Define electric current and state its properties.

1.2 Define Ohm‘s Law and state the laws of resistance.
1.3 Define the terms: (a) Magnetic Flux (b) Permeability and (c) Inductance.
1.4 Define the terms: (a) Electric Flux (b) Permittivity and (c) Capacitance.
1.5 State and explain (a) Faradays laws of Electro Magnetic Induction and (b) Lenz’s law.
1.6 State and explain dynamically induced EMF and statistically induced EMF.
1.7 State and explain Self inductance, Mutual inductance and Coefficient of coupling.
1.8 Define the terms
(a) Alternating Quantity (b) Instantaneous Value (c) Maximum Value
(d) Time Period (e) Frequency (f) Average Value
(g) R.M.S Value (h) Form Factor (i) Peak Factor
(j) Power (k) Power Factor
1.9 State power and power factor in
(a) Pure resistor (b) Pure inductor (c) Pure capacitor
1.10 State and explain (a) Fleming‘s right hand rule and (b) Fleming‘s left hand rule
Electrical Circuits
2.1 Explain the procedure to calculate equivalent resistance of DC series circuits and parallel circuits.
2.2 Solve simple problems on equivalent resistance of DC series circuits and parallel circuits.
2.3 State and explain Kirchhoff’s laws.
2.3 Solve simple problems on Kirchhoff’s laws.
2.4 Explain the procedure to calculate domestic monthly energy bill.
2.5 Solve simple problems on domestic monthly energy bill.
2.6 Explain single phase A.C. RL series circuit.
2.7 Explain single phase A.C. RC series circuit.
2.8 Explain single phase A.C. RLC series circuit.
2.9 Explain three phase system with voltage, current and power equations.
2.10 State the advantages of three phase system over single phase system.
Electrical Machines
3.1 Explain the construction and working of D.C. Generator.
3.2 List the type of D.C. Generators and draw the schematic diagram of each type.
3.3 Write the currents and voltages equations for different types of D.C. Generators.
160
3.4 Explain the construction and working of D.C. Motor.
3.5 List the type of D.C. Motors and draw the schematic diagram of each type.
3.6 Write the currents and voltages equations for different types of D.C. Motors.
3.7 Explain various methods of speed control of D.C. Motors.
3.8 List the applications of DC Motor.
3.9 Explain the construction and working of Transformer.
3.10 List the applications of Transformer.
3.11 Explain the construction and working of Three Phase Induction Motor.
3.12 List the applications of Three Phase Induction motor.
3.13 Explain the construction and working of Single Phase Induction Motor.
3.14 List the types of Single Phase Induction Motors.
3.15 List the applications of Single Phase Induction motor.
Electrical Measuring Instruments
4.1 List the types of electrical measuring instruments.
4.2 Explain the construction and working of Moving Coil Measuring Instrument.
4.3 Explain construction and working of Attraction Type Moving Iron Measuring Instrument.
4.4 Explain construction and working of Repulsion Type Moving Iron Measuring Instrument.
4.5 Explain the construction and working of Dynamometer Type Measuring Instrument.
4.6 Explain the construction and working of Induction Type Single Phase Energymeter.
Electrical Safety Procedures.
5.1 Explain the effects of electrical shock and burn.
5.2 Explain the procedures to be adopted to avoid electric shock.
5.3 Explain the first aid methods to be followed after electrocuted.
5.4 State the need of earthing of electrical equipment and machinery and mention its types.
5.5 Explain the procedure of pipe earthing with diagram.
5.6 Explain the procedure of plate earthing with diagram.
161
CO’S – PO’S – PSO’S MAPPING STRENGTH
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
MNG302.1 3 3
MNG302.2 3 2 1 3 2
MNG302.3 3 3 1
MNG302.4 3 2 3
MNG302.5 3 1 3 1
Average 3 2 1.5 1 3 1.3
3-Strongly Mapped 2- Moderately Mapped 1- Slightly Mapped
Note:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest Lectures (v) Group Discussions (vi) Quizzes (vii)
Industrial Visits (viii) Tech Fests (ix) Mini Projects (x) Library Visits
HYPONATED COURSE CONTENTS
Electric current and its properties - Ohm‘s Law and laws of resistance – Magnetic Flux, Permeability and
Inductance – Electric Flux, Permittivity and Capacitance - Faradays laws of Electro Magnetic Induction -
Lenz’s law - dynamically induced EMF and statistically induced EMF - Self inductance, Mutual inductance and
Coefficient of coupling - Alternating Quantity - Instantaneous Value - Maximum Value - Time Period -
Frequency - Average Value - R.M.S Value - Form Factor – Peak Factor - Phase Difference – Power - Power
Factor - Power and power factor in Pure resistor, Pure inductor and Pure capacitor - Fleming‘s right hand rule
- Fleming‘s left hand rule.
162
Electrical Circuits
Procedure to calculate equivalent resistance of DC series circuits and parallel circuits - simple problems on
equivalent resistance of DC series circuits and parallel circuits - Kirchhoff’s laws - simple problems on
Kirchhoff’s laws - procedure to calculate domestic monthly energy bill - simple problems on domestic
monthly energy bill - single phase A.C. RL series circuit - single phase A.C. RC series circuit - single phase A.C.
RLC series circuit - three phase system with voltage, current and power equations - advantages of three
phase system over single phase system.
Electrical Machines
Construction and working of D.C. Generator - type of D.C. Generators and the schematic diagram of each
type - currents and voltages equations for different types of D.C. Generators - construction and working of
D.C. Motor - type of D.C. Motors and schematic diagram of each type - currents and voltages equations for
different types of D.C. Motors - methods of speed control of D.C. Motors - construction and working of
Transformer - construction and working of Three Phase Induction Motor - construction and working of Single
Phase Induction Motor - types of Single Phase Induction Motors - application of the DC Motor, Three Phase
Induction motor, Single Phase Induction Motor.
Types of electrical measuring instruments - construction and working of Moving Coil Measuring Instrument -
construction and working of Attraction Type Moving Iron Measuring Instrument - construction and working
of Repulsion Type Moving Iron Measuring Instrument - Compare Moving Coil Measuring Instrument and
Moving Iron Measuring Instrument - construction and working of Dynamometer Type Measuring Instrument
- construction and working of Induction Type Single Phase Energymeter.
Electrical Safety Procedures
Effects of electrical shock and burn - procedures to be adopted to avoid electric shock - first aid methods to
be followed after electrocuted - need of earthing of electrical equipment and machinery - types of earthing
of electrical equipment and machinery - procedure of pipe earthing with diagram - procedure of plate
earthing with diagram.
163
BLUE PRINT
Questionwise
Markswise Distribution
No. of Weightage Distribution of CO’s
S.No Chapter / Unit Title of Weightage
periods Allocated Weightage Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Electrical Engineering
1 12 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO1
Fundamentals
2 Electrical Circuits 14 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO2

10
3 Electrical Machines 22 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 1 CO3
Electrical Measuring
4 15 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO4
Instruments
Electrical Safety
5 12 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO5
Procedures
Total 75 70 + 10 15 15 40 10 5 5 5 1
Note: 10 Marks Question may be given either from CO2 OR CO3.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Text Book of Electrical Engineering - JB Gupta

2. A Text Book of Electrical Engineering - BL Theraja & AK Theraja
3. Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering - DP Kothari & IJ Nagrath
4. Electrical Machinery - P.S. Bimbra
5. Electrical Power Systems - Chakrabarthy, Sony, Gupta
and Bhatnagar
SYLLABUS TO BE COVERED FOR UNIT TEST-I AND UNIT TEST-II
Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered
Unit Test-I From 1.1 to 3.8
Unit Test-II From 3.9 to 5.6
164
MODEL PAPER – FORMATIVE ASSESSMET – 1
C-20-MNG-302
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION, (C-20)
DMNGE – THIRD SEMESTER EXAMINATION
MNG-302 : BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Time: 90 Minutes Total Marks: 40
PART-A (1 x 4) + (4 x 3) = 16
Instructions:
1) Answer all five questions.
2) First question carries four marks and remaining each question carries three marks.
3) Answers should be brief and straight to the point and shall not exceed five simple sentences
1. (a) Electrical unit for permittivity is __________________________________ . CO1

(b) Formula for Form Factor = ______________________________________ . CO1
(c) Power factor of a pure inductor is unity : True / False CO1
(d) R.M.S. value stands for _________________________________________ . CO1
2. State Fleming’s Right Hand Rule. CO1
3. State Kirchhoff’s laws. CO2
4. State any three advantages of three phase system over single phase system. CO2
5. List the types of DC Generators. CO3
PART-B 3 X 8 = 24
Instructions:
1) Answer all three questions.
2) Each question carries eight marks.
3) The answers should be comprehensive and the criteria for valuation are the content but not the
6. State and explain Faraday’s Laws of Electromagnetic Induction with legible sketches. CO1
(OR)
State and explain Selfinductance, Mutual inductance and Coefficient of coupling. CO1
7. A circuit consists of five resistors: 10 ohm, 20 ohm, 30 ohm, 40 ohm and 50 ohm which are
connected in parallel to each other. Calculate the current passing through 30 ohm resistor, when a
DC voltage of 100 volt is applied across the circuit. CO2
(OR)
A domestic consumer uses two 100 watt lamps for 3 hours, three 60 watt fans for 8 hours, four 40
watt tube lights for 6 hours and one 300 watt pump for 2 hours, every day. Calculate the monthly
energy bill, if the cost per unit of energy is three rupees. CO2
8. List the type of D.C. Generators and draw the schematic diagram of each type. CO3
(OR)
Explain the construction and working of DC Motor. CO3
***
165
MODEL PAPER – FORMATIVE ASSESSMET – 2
C-20-MNG-302
Time: 90 Minutes Total Marks: 40
PART-A (1 x 4) + (4 x 3) = 16
Instructions:
2) First question carries four marks and remaining each question carries three marks.
1. (a) Working principle of Induction Motor is _____________________________. CO3

(b) Output side of a transformer is called as ____________________________. CO3
(c) Transformer converts electrical energy into mechanical energy : True / False CO3
(d) Type of motor used in wet grinder is _______________________________. CO3
2. List any three electrical measuring instruments. CO4
3. Compare moving coil measuring instrument with moving iron measuring instrument
in any three aspects. CO4
4. State any three effects of electric shock. CO5
5. State the need of earthing of electrical equipment and machinery. CO5
PART-B 3 X 8 = 24
Instructions:
1) Answer all three questions.
6. Explain the construction and working of Transformer. CO3

(OR)
Explain the construction and working of Three Phase Induction Motor. CO3
7. Explain construction and working of Repulsion Type Moving Iron Measuring Instrument.
CO4
(OR)
Explain the construction and working of Dynamometer Type Measuring Instrument. CO4
8. Explain the first aid methods to be followed after electrocuted. CO5

(OR)
Explain the procedure of pipe earthing with diagram. CO5
***
166
MODEL PAPER – SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT
C-20-MNG-302
Time: 3 hours Total Marks: 80
PART-A 10 X 3 = 30
Instructions:
1) Answer all questions.
2) Each question carries three marks.
1. Define Ohm’s law and state the laws of resistance. CO1

2. State Fleming’s Right Hand Rule. CO1
3. State Kirchhoff’s laws. CO2
4. State any three advantages of three phase system over single phase system. CO2
5. List the types of DC Generators. CO3
6. List any three applications of Single Phase Induction Motors. CO3
7. List any three electrical measuring instruments. CO4
8. Compare moving coil measuring instrument with moving iron measuring instrument
in any three aspects. CO4
9. State any three effects of electric shock. CO5
10. State the need of earthing of electrical equipment and machinery. CO5
PART-B 5 X 8 = 40
Instructions:
11. State and explain Faraday’s Laws of Electromagnetic Induction with legible sketches. CO1
(OR)
State and explain Self inductance, Mutual inductance and Coefficient of coupling. CO1
12. A circuit consists of five resistors: 10 ohm, 20 ohm, 30 ohm, 40 ohm and 50 ohm which are
connected in parallel to each other. Calculate the current passing through 30 ohm resistor, when a
DC voltage of 100 volt is applied across the circuit. CO2
(OR)
A domestic consumer uses two 100 watt lamps for 3 hours, three 60 watt fans for 8 hours, four 40
watt tube lights for 6 hours and one 300 watt pump for 2 hours, every day. Calculate the monthly
energy bill, if the cost per unit of energy is three rupees. CO2
13. Explain the construction and working of DC Motor. CO3

(OR)
Explain the construction and working of Three Phase Induction Motor. CO3
167
14. Explain construction and working of Repulsion Type Moving Iron Measuring Instrument.CO4
(OR)
Explain the construction and working of Dynamometer Type Measuring Instrument. CO4
15. Explain the first aid methods to be followed after electrocuted. CO5
(OR)
Explain the procedure of pipe earthing with diagram. CO5
PART-C 1 x 10 = 10
Instructions:
1) This question carries ten marks.
16. Analyse the current and voltage equations of different DC generators with circuit symbols. CO4
***
168
Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week Periods per Semester
Basic Mechanical MNG-303 05 75
Engineering
TIME SCHEDULE
Essay Essay
Short Answer Type Type
S Weightage of Questions
Major Topics Periods
No. Marks Questions Question
(3M)
(8M) (10 M )
1 Friction 05 11 1 1
Simple 05
2 14 2 1
Machines
Transmission 25
3 20 4 1
of the power
Simple stress 15
4 14 2 1
and strain
IC Engines & 25
5 21 1 1 1
Compressors
Total 75 70+10 10 5 1
Note: 10 Marks higher order question may be given from IC Engines and compressors.

Course
Objectives Understand the basic principles of Friction and simple Machines.
Calculate the power, forces and stresses during power transmission.
Understand the working of IC Engines and compressors.
169
Explain the basic concepts of Friction and its applications in various
CO1 MNG-303.1 fields
Course CO2 MNG-303.2 Illustrate working principles of simple machines and functioning of
Outcomes simple mechanisms used in day to day needs.
CO3 MNG-303.3 Calculate various problems on power developed and forces during
the power transmission.
CO4 MNG-304.4 Explain the basic concepts of stresses and strain.
CO5 MNG-305.5 Enumerate the concept of IC Engines and Compressors.
PO-CO Mapping
Course Course Title:

Code : No. of Periods:
Basic Mechanical Number of Course Outcomes: 05
MNG- Engineering 75
303
CO Periods addressing
Level
POs Mapped with CO No. PO in Column 1 Remarks
(1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5 32 43 3 >40% Level 3

Highly addressed
PO2 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5 25 34 2
25% to 40% Level 2
PO3 Moderately
Addressed
PO4
5 to 25% Level 1
Low addressed
PO5
<5% Not
PO6 addressed
PO7 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5 18 23 1
170
CO1 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO2 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO4 3 2 1 1 3 1
CO5 3 2 1 1 3 1
Note:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest Lectures (v) Group Discussions (vi) Quiz (vii)
Industry Visits (viii) Tech Fest (ix) Mini Projects (x) Library Visits.
171
BLUE PRINT OF QUESTION PAPER

S. Periods Weightage Distribution of Distribution of CO’s
Chapter Name Weightage Weightage
No Allocated Allocated Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Friction 05 11 3 - 8 - 1 - 1 - CO1
Simple 05
2 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO2
Machines
Transmission 25
3 20 6 6 8 - 2 2 1 - CO3
of the power
Simple stress 15
4 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO4
and strain
IC Engines & 25
5 21 3 - 8 10 1 - 1 1 CO5
Compressors
Total
75 70+10 18 12 40 10 06 04 05 1
R-Remembering; U-Understanding; Ap-Applying; An- Analylising
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Know the Phenomenon of friction

1.1 Explain the Phenomenon of friction
1.2 Identify the types of friction
1.3 State the laws of friction
1.4 Explain the effect of friction as applied to an inclined plane
1.5 Solve the problems on Horizontal and Vertical Plane.
1.6 Calculation of Tractive effort.
2.0 Understand function and working of simple machine

2.1 Define mechanical advantage, velocity ratio and efficiency
2.2 Identify the different types of levers and examples
2.3 Describe the simple machines like simple wheel and axle, differential wheel and axle,
2.4 Differential pulley block, single purchase crab winch, double purchase winch crab
2.5 Define ideal machine, self-locking machine
2.6 Distinguish between ideal machine and practical machine
2.7 Calculate the simple problems involving mechanical advantage, velocity ratio, law of
machine and efficiency
172
3.0 Comprehend the types of transmission of power in engine
3.1 Identify various powers transmitting media like belt, rope, chain and gears
3.2 Define the expression for velocity ratio for a belt drive
3.3 Explain the term Slip-in-belt and its effect on velocity ratio.
3.4 Explain the combined effect of belt thickness and slip and velocity ratio
3.5 Distinguish between open belt drive and Cross belt drive
3.6 Explain the formula to find the length of open belt and cross belt drive
3.7 Calculate the length of open belt and cross belt drive
3.8 Explain the tensions in tight and slack sides of a belt and also the initial tension
3.9 Explain the centrifugal tension and maximum tension in a belt drive
3.10 Explain the formula of ratio of tight side tension and slack side tension
3.11 Calculate the velocity ratio of tight side tension and slack side tension
3.12 Explain the rope drive
3.13 Select suitable materials for belt and rope
3.14 Explain the chain drive and its merits over belt drive
3.15 Categorises the gears
3.16 Discuss the simple and compound gear trains
3.17 Explain the nomenclature of spur gear and tooth
3.18 Explain the applications of the above drives in engineering
3.19 Explain chain drive
3.20 Advantages of chain drive over other drives
3.21 Simple problems on Gear drive
4.0 Know the behaviour of materials subjected to simple stresses and strains
4.1 Explain the meaning and significance of simple stresses and strain, shear stress and
strain, lateral strain and volumetric strain
4.2 State the need for working stresses and factor of safety
4.3 State and explain the Hooke’s law
4.4 Explain the terms Poisson’s ratio, Young’s modulus, shear modulus and Bulk
Modulus and relationship between them
4.5 Discuss the mechanical properties of materials
5.0 Understand the construction and working of IC engines
5.1 Distinguish diesel and petrol engine

5.2 Explain the construction and the working of two stroke and four stroke diesel engines.
5.3 Compare the two stroke and four stroke engines.
5.4 List the various types of solid, liquid and gaseous fuels and their calorific values
5.5 Define Higher calorific value and Lower calorific value
5.6 Explain the different systems in I.C Engines such as fuel system, Lubrication system.
5.7 Explain the working of diesel pump and atomiser.
5.8 Explain the uses of radiator and water pump.
5.9 Explain the method of governing adopted in Diesel Engine.
5.10 State the specification of Diesel engine.
5.11 State the uses of compressed air.
5.12 State the types of air compressors and their application.
173
COURSE CONTENTS:
1.0 Friction:
Definition of static friction limiting friction and sliding friction Co-efficient of friction -
Angle of friction, Laws of friction conditions of equilibrium on the -horizontal plane, up the
plane, down the plane, angle of repose-calculation of problems on the above simple problem
on screw jack
Simple Machines:
2.0 Introduction - Explanation of the terms-Mechanical advantage, Velocity ratio and efficiency,
Derive an expression giving the equations for the above Ideal machine self locking machine,
Reversibility of the machine practical machine, maximum efficiency of the machine-Linear Law
of the machine-Study of different types of levers-Wheel and Axle, differential wheel and axle,
work and work wheel, differential pulley block, single purchase winch crab, double purchase
winch crab, 1st system of pulleys and 2nd system of pulleys 3rd system of pulleys-simple problems
on the above.
3.0 Transmission of the power:

Introduction-Belt Drive - Velocity ratio- percentage slip and its effect on velocity ratio, thickness
of belt, length of open and cross belt drive (without proof)-Chain drive-Introduction, Types of
chain drives in power transmission-Gear drive-Introduction- Nomenclature-Types of gear drives-
simple problems on drives.
Simple stresses and strains

4.0 Definition and explanation of Tensile stress, Compressive stress, Shear stress and Linear strain-
Definition of elastic limit-Statement of Hooks law-stress-strain diagram- percentage of
contraction and elongation, Working stress, ultimate or maximum stress, factor of safety, Elastic
modulus and explanation of Young’s Modulus-Modulus of rigidity-Bulk modulus,, Mechanical
properties of materials-Definition and explanation of Lateral strain, Poisson’s ratio, Relation
between Young`s modulus, rigidity modulus, bulk modulus and Poisson’s ration (W/o proof) and
volumetric strain- problems on the above-Types of Beams - Types of Loading-Definition of
Shear force and Bending moment-Maximum bending moment formula in the case of cantilever
and simply supported beams for standard cases(without proofs)
IC Engines & Air Compressors

5.0 Construction and working principle of two stroke and four stroke petrol and diesel engines -
comparison of two stroke with four strokes –Types of fuels and their calorific values –HCV-
LCV-fuel injection system and lubrication system - Working of diesel pump and atomizer -
radiator and water pump - methods of governing in diesel engine - IHP, BHP and mechanical
efficiency of an engine - care and maintenance - specification of diesel engine-simple problems
on above-Types of Air Compressors and their applications - Uses of compressed air, Working
principle of single stage reciprocating air compressor - multistage air compressor-Applications
and advantages.
174
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1 Thermal Engineering : R.S.Khurmi

2 Hydraulics : R.S.Khurmi
3 Strength of Materials : I.B.Prasad
4 Engg. Mechanics : Ramamrutham
5 Thermal Engineering : R.K. Rajput
6 Strength to Materials : B.C.Punmia
7. Engineering Mechanics : Singer
Unit Test -I From 1.1 to 3.21
***
175
No of periods / Total no of Marks for
Course Code Course Title Marks for SA
week periods FA
Underground Coal
MNG-304 05 75 20 80
Mining Methods
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of Mapped CO’s

S. No Major Topics
Periods
1 Bord and Pillar - Development 14 CO1, CO2
2 Bord and Pillar - Depillaring 14 CO2, CO3
3 Longwall mining 15 CO1, CO3, CO4
4 Thick seam mining 20 CO2, CO3
5 Special methods 12 CO3, CO4, CO5
Total 75
Course Objectives and Course Outcomes:

- To familiarize the Bord and pillar development
Course - To explain the Bord and pillar Depillaring
Objectives - To explain the Longwall mining
- To familiarize thick seam mining
- To familiarize Special methods of mining
CO1 Explain the Bord and pillar development and Depillaring
CO2 Explain the methods of Depillaring
CO3 Describe the Longwall mining , Thick seam mining

Course Outcomes CO4 To familiarize the Thick seam mining
CO5 To Explain the Special methods of mining, Calculation of

percentage of extraction during development and Depillaring.
Production calculation from Longwall panel extraction
176
PO-CO Mapping:
Course Code: 304 Course Title: Underground Coal Mining Methods No of Periods: 75
CO Periods
Mapped
PO addressing PO in Col Level
with CO Remarks
No 1 (1,2,3)
no
No %
PO1 - - - - >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO2 CO2 CO3 9 12.1 1
PO3 - - - 25 to 40% Level 2 Moderately addressed
PO4 CO2 CO3 19 25.3 2
CO1 CO2 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO5 47 62.6 3
CO3
PO6 - - - - <5% Not addressed
PO7 - - - -
CO1 - - - - 3 - - - - -
CO2 - 1 - 2 3 - - - - -
CO3 - 1 - 2 3 - - - - -
CO4 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
Learning Outcomes
Upon on completion of the course the student shall be able to:
1.0 Bord and Pillar method of working - Development

1.1 Define the term Bord and Pillar mining method
1.2 List the applicable conditions, merits, demerits and limitations of Bord and Pillar method
1.3 Define the terms caving and stowing
1.4 Explain the term panel indicating the types, applicable conditions, merits and demerits
1.5 Define the terms local fall and main fall, induced methods local fall
1.6 Explain the term air-blast and state its dangers and precautions
1.7 List the factors influencing the size and number of openings of panel
1.8 List the different factors governing the selection of development method
1.9 List the factors to be considered while opening out a district or panel
1.10Explain the development stage of Bord and Pillar method with sketch
1.11Explain the method of development by blasting-off solid with five headings , development along dip
and strike
1.12 Explain the method of development with the help of cross-cuts in steeply dipping seams in Bord and
Pillar method
1.13 Explain the method of development in Bord and Pillar mining with side discharge loader and load
haul dumper
1.14 Calculate the percentage of extraction of development in Bord and Pillar mining by assuming your
own dimensions
177
2.0 Bord and Pillar method of working - Depillaring
2.1 Classifies the methods of depillaring
2.2 List the preparatory arrangements before commencement of depillaring operation.
2.3 Explain diagonal line of extraction and step diagonal line of extraction, Knife Edge line of extraction
and straight line of extraction
2.4 Define the terms split, rib, Chowkidar pillar, Goaf edge line of extraction
2.5 Explain the depillaring stage in Bord and Pillar mining with splitting, stoking and slice mining
2.6 Explain the method of extraction of pillar by caving under weak roof conditions using LHD and SDL
2.7 Define Air-blast, dangers due to air blast, precautions to prevent them
2.8 Calculate the percentage of extraction of depillaring in Bord and Pillar mining by assuming your own
dimensions
2.9 State the necessity of stowing and list the different methods of stowing practice and their
applicability conditions
2.10 Explain precautions against the dangers of water while working below goaved areas, precautions
against fire during and after depillaring
2.11 Explain hydraulic sand stowing methods
2.12 Explain the preparatory arrangements for depillaring by stowing.
2.13 Describe the method of extraction of contiguous seams.
3.0 Longwall mining
3.1 Define the terms Longwall mining, Gate roads, Main gate, Tail gate, Stable, Pack wall
3.2 State the applicable conditions, merits, demerits and limitations of longwall method
3.3 Explain the development of gate roads by drill and blast-by manual loading
3.4 Explain the development of gate roads by cut and load- by Road headers
3.5 Classify the methods of longwall mining, and various machinery employed in longwall mining
3.6 Explain the Longwall advancing and its applicable conditions
3.7 List the different factors governing the length of Longwall face
3.8 Explain the layout of Longwall face advancing with caving and stowing
3.9 Explain Longwall retreating with sketch and list its applicable conditions, merits , de-merits
3.10 Explain the layout of longwall face retreating with caving and stowing
3.11 Explain single unit and double unit layouts of Longwall mining.
3.12 Differences between Longwall advancing and Longwall retreating
3.13 Explain push-sumping, and inclined push-sumping in Longwall mining.
4.0 Thick seam mining
4.1 List the difficulties and principle of working thick seams
4.2 List the different thick seam workings and state its applicability
4.3 Define the term slicing and list its methods
4.4 State the applicable conditions, merits and demeritsof inclined slicing
4.5 Explain the method of inclined slicing in descending order with caving and ascending order with
stowing
4.6 State the applicable conditions,merits and demerits of horizontal slicing
4.7 Explain the horizontal slicing in ascending order with stowing and descending order with caving
4.8 List the applicable conditions, merits and demerits of sub-level caving
4.9 Explain the method of sub-level caving
4.10 List the applicable conditions, merits and demeritsof room and pillar mining
4.11 Explain the Room and Pillar method
4.12 List the applicable conditions, merits and demeritsof horizon mining
4.13 Explain the method of horizon mining
4.14 List the applicable conditions, merits, demerits and limitations of Blasting Gallery method
4.15 Explain the working of thick seam by Blasting Gallery method.
178
5.0 Special methods
5.1 List the applicable conditions for Hydraulic mining of coal

5.2 List the merits and demerits of hydraulic mining of coal
5.3 Explain hydraulic breaking of coal Explain hydraulic transport in hydraulic mining of coal
5.4 Explain hydraulic mining in thick seams and steeply inclined seams
5.5 List the applicable conditions for underground gasification of coal
5.6 List the merits and demerits of underground gasification
5.7 Explain the principle and process of underground gasification of coal
5.8 Explain opening up of coal seams for underground gasification
5.9 Explain the methods of establishing linkages between bore holes in underground coal gasification
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Bord and Pillar – Development
Bord and pillar system – applicability – merits – demerits – caving & stowing – panel - applicability of
panel system – types of panels –merits – demerits -local fall, main fall – air blast, dangers, precautions –
factorsinfluencing the size of panel system – factors influencing the no. of openings of panel – factors
governing the selection of development method – factors governed while opening of a district –
development stage – paneldevelopment with three headings and – different methods of development
systems along dip, along strike, side discharge loader, and load haul dumpers – percentage of extraction
calculation.
2.0 Bord and Pillar – Depillaring
Depillaring methods – preparatory arrangements – different terms – Pillarextraction under weak roof
condition -local fall, main fall – air blast, dangers, precautions – percentage of extraction calculation–
methodof stowing conditions required for adopting stowing – preparation arrangement for stowing –
contiguous seams extraction- depillaring LHD- SDL- Air blast –precautions
3.0 Longwall mining
Longwall –Related Terms –Applicability, merits, demerits, limitations – Gate roads development –
classification of Longwall methods –Longwall advancing indicating its applicability- machinery employed
on a mechanised Longwall face – different factors governing the length of longwall face – Longwall
advancing with caving and stowing – Longwall retreating and its applicability – merits and demerits –
Longwall retreating with caving and stowing – single unit and double unit layouts – differences –
comparison between Longwall advancing and Longwall retreating- Longwall-push sumping –inclined
sumping methods
4.0 Thick seam mining
Difficulties with thick seams – classification of thick seam working – principles – slicing methods –
applicability – inclinedslicing with caving and stowing – Horizontalslicing – applicability merits and
demerits – Horizontalslicing with caving and stowing – sub-level caving – applicability merits and
demerits – Room and pillar – applicability merits and demerits – Horizon mining – applicability merits
and demerits - Blasting Gallery method -applicability merits and demerits.
179
5.0 Special methods
Applicability merits and demerits of hydraulic mining of coal – hydraulicbreaking of coal –

hydraulictransport – layoutof hydraulic mining – applicable conditions of underground gasification of
coal – meritsdemerits of gasification of coal – principles and process underground gasification –
openingup of coal seams for underground gasification – establishing linkages between bore holes –
Hydraulic mining- thick seam- steep seam.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Elements of Mining, Vol. 1 : D.J. Deshmukh

2. Principle &Practices of
Coal Mining : R.D. Singh
3. Wining and working coal : R.T. Deshmukh &D.J.Deshmukh ,Vol. 1& 2
4. Longwall Mining : Samir Kumar das
5. Modern coal Mining Technology : Samir Kumar Das
6. Coal Mining practice ` : Stathum

CO’s
S. Periods Weightage Distribution of Distribution of
Chapter Name Mapped
No Allocated Allocated Weightage Weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Bord and Pillar
CO1 CO2
1 Method of working - 14 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 -
CO3
Development
Bord and Pillar
2 Method of working - 14 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO2 CO3
Depillaring
3 Longwall mining 15 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO2 CO3
4 Thick seam mining 20 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO2 CO3
5 Special methods 12 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO2 CO3
10 10 1 CO2
from any chapters
TOTAL 75 80 15 15 50 - 5 5 6 -
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap-Application; An-Analylising
180

Third semester :: MNG-304 UNDERGROUND COAL MINING METHODS
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions:
1.(a) Bord and Pillar Method is suitable for the seams 1.5m
(b) Generally the LHDs are used in 1 in 3 gradient
(c) The main advantage of panel system is ___________
(CO3)
(d)The portion robbed from stook is called ___________
(CO2)
2. Define the term Bord and Pillar mining method (CO1)
3. List the factors to be considered while opening out a district or panel (CO1)
4. Classifies the methods of depillaring (CO2)
5. Define the terms a) Long wall mining b) Gate roads (CO3)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A) Explain the method of development with the help of cross-cuts in steeply dipping seams in
Bord and Pillar method (CO1)
(OR)
(B) Explain the method of development in Bord and Pillar mining with side discharge loader
(CO1)
7. (A) Explain the preparatory arrangements for depillaring by stowing (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Describe the method of extraction of contiguous seams (CO2)
8. (A) State the applicable conditions, merits, demerits and limitations of long wall method (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain the development of gate roads by drill and blast-by manual loading (CO3)
oOo
181

Third semester :: MNG-304 UNDERGROUND COAL MINING METHODS
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) The inclines slicing method is used, Inclination is more than 300-350
(b) Hydraulic mining is possible in flat seams only
(c) In horizon mining method the lower level is called ___________
(CO3)
(d) The Coal plough is employed at ___________ .
(CO2)
2. List the different factors governing the length of Long wall face
(CO1)
3. List the different thick seam workings (CO1)
4. Define the term slicing and list its methods (CO2)
5. List the merits and demerits of underground gasification (CO5)
Instructions :
6. (A) Explain the layout of Long wall face advancing with caving (CO1)
(OR)
(B) Explain push-sumping, and inclined push-sumping in Longwall mining (CO1)
7. (A) Explain the method of horizon mining (CO3)

(OR)
(B) Explain the working of thick seam by Blasting Gallery method (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the principle and process of underground gasification of coal (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain opening up of coal seams for underground gasification (CO4)
oOo
182
C20-MNG-304
D.MNG.E. – III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
UNDERGROUND COAL MINING METHODS
PART – A
10 X3 = 30
1. Define the terms caving and stowing. (CO1)
2. List the factors influencing the number of openings to panel. (CO2)
3. Define the terms a) Split b) Chowkidar pillar. (CO1)
4. State the necessity of stowing. (CO2)
5. Classify the methods of longwall mining. (CO3)
6. List the merits of longwall retreating over Longwall advancing. (CO2)
7. State the principles of working thick seams. (CO3)
8. List the applicable conditions of sub-level caving. (CO2)
9. List the applicable conditions for underground gasification of coal. (CO4)
10. List the merits and demerits of hydraulic mining of coal (CO2)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
Instructions: Part B consists of 5 Units. Answer any one full question from each unit. Each question carries
8 marks and may have sub questions.
11. A) Explain the method of development in Bord and Pillar mining with side discharge loader
(CO5)
(OR)
B) Explain the term air-blast and state its dangers and precautions (CO3)
12. A) Explain diagonal line of extraction and step diagonal line of extraction with sketches. (CO5)
(OR)
B) Describe the method of extraction of contiguous seams with neat sketch. (CO3)
13. A) Explain the development of gate roads by cut and load- by continuous miner. (CO2)
(OR)
B) Tabulate the differences between Longwall advancing and Longwall retreating. (CO3)
14. A) Explain the method of inclined slicing in descending order with caving. (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain the horizontal slicing in ascending order with stowing. (CO2)
15. A) Explain the methods of establishing linkages between bore holes in underground coal gasification.
(CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain hydraulic breaking of coal Explain hydraulic transport in hydraulic mining of coal.
(CO3)
PART – C
1X 10 = 10
16. Why Blasting Gallery method is used in thick seams? Explain Blasting gallery method with sketch
(CO5)
183
MINE SURVEYING -I
Course Code Course Title No of periods / Total no of Marks for Marks for SA
week periods FA
MNG-305 Mine Surveying -I 05 75 20 80
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. Major Topics Periods Mapped CO’s
1 Introduction 04 CO1
2 Measurement of distances 14 CO1, CO2,CO4
3 Chain Surveying 15 CO2, CO3, CO4
4 Compass Surveying 15 CO3,CO4,CO5
5 Levelling 20 CO3,CO4,CO5
6 Contouring 07 CO4,CO5
Total 75

Apply the principles and concepts of chain surveying, compass surveying and
Course Objectives
levelling
CO1 Basic understanding of linear , angular measurements, level survey
CO2 Application of linear measurements, angular measurements,

principle of surveying, leveling
Course outcomes
CO3 Problems, limitations of linear, angular and level survey.
CO4 Leveling , Subsidence survey , application in mining
CO5 Numerical problems in linear, angular, leveling survey
184
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: 305 Course Title: Mine Surveying-I No of Periods: 75

CO Periods
addressing PO Level
in Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 32 50 3 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO 2 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5 33 44 3 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
PO 3 CO5 10 6 1 addressed
PO 4 5 to 25% Level 1 Low
PO 5 addressed
PO 7
CO1 3 1
CO2 3 3 1 1 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 1 1 2
CO5 3 3 1 1 2 2
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Know the fundamentals in Surveying

1.1 Define the term Surveying.
1.2 List the objectives of surveying.
1.3 State the principles of surveying.
1.4 List the primary divisions of surveying.
1.5 Give the broad classification of surveying.
1.6 Define the terms Geodetic survey and Plane survey.
2.0 Know the measurement of distances

2.1 Classifies the methods of measuring distances.
2.2 List the instruments for direct measurement of distances.
2.3 Describe the constructional details of chain and tape.
2.4 List the various types of chains and tapes.
2.5 List the reasons for incorrect length of chain.
2.6 Define the term ranging, different methods of ranging
2.7 Describe the method of direct ranging, in-direct ranging
185
2.8 Explain the method of measuring distances on level ground, sloping ground
2.9 List the sources of errors in measuring distances.
2.10 State the corrections to be applied to the measured length for obtaining true length.
2.11 Solve the problems to obtain true length, true area and true volumes.
2.12 List the common mistakes in measuring distances and permissible limits of error in linear
measurements
3.0 Know the chain Surveying

3.1 State the purpose of chain surveying.
3.2 State the principle of chain surveying.
3.3 List the steps in chain surveying.
3.4 Define the term Reconnaissance.
3.5 List the factors governing the selection of station in chain surveying
3.6 Explain the term Reference sketch.
3.7 List the types of survey stations.
3.8 Define the terms (a) Base line (b) Check line(c) Tie line (d) Offset.
3.9 List the types of Offsets and applicability of each.
3.10 Name the instruments for setting offsets.
3.11 Describe the method of chaining under following conditions
i) Vision is free but chaining is obstructed
ii) Vision is obstructed and chaining is free
iii) Vision and changing are obstructed
3.12 Describe degree of accuracy in chaining.
4.0 know the Compass Surveying

4.1 List the types of compasses and their field applications
4.2 State the parts of Prismatic compass, Surveyor’s compass with sketch.
4.3 Define the terms (a) True Meridian (b) Magnetic Meridian (c) Arbitrary meridian
(d) True bearing (e) Magnetic bearing (f) Arbitrary bearing
4.4 Classify the types of bearings (Whole circle bearing, Quadrental bearing, Fore bearing, Back
bearing) and conversion of WCB to QB –vice versa
4.5 Explain the method of measuring the magnetic bearing of line, with prismatic compass and
traversing of given area
4.6 Explain the terms (a) included angle (b) interior angle (c) exterior angle.
4.7 Define the terms ‘Traverse’,’ closed traverse’ and ‘Open Traverse’
4.8 Compute the included angles from the bearings of the lines.
4.9 Define the term local attraction, magnetic declination and dip.
4.10 List the reasons for local attraction,
4.11 Solves the problems on local attraction and magnetic declination
4.12 State the permissible limit of the error in (prismatic) compass survey.
186
5.0 Understand the Levelling
5.1 Define the term levelling , objective of Levelling, types of levelling instruments
5.2 Explain the principle of levelling.
5.3 Define of terms : level surface, level line, horizontal plane, Horizontal line, Vertical plane,
Vertical line, datum surface or datum line, Elevation bench mark, line of collimation, axis of
telescope, axis of bubble tube, Vertical axis, back sight, foresight, intermediate sight, Change
point, Station, Height of instrument, Reduced level.
5.4 Describe the Dumpy level.
5.5 List the temporary adjustments , fundamental lines of dumpy level and relation between
fundamental lines
5.6 List the types of levelling staves.
5.7 List the methods of Levelling
5.8 Explain the terms simple levelling, compound levelling, profile levelling , reciprocal levelling
5.9 Explain the methods of reducing levels from the observed staff readings.
5.10 Calculate the reduced levels by rise and fall methods, Height of the instrument
method
5.11 Describe the profile levelling method and its applicabilities.
5.12 Explain the effects of curvature and refraction in levelling.
5.13 State the correction for curvature and refraction and combined effect of both of
them.
5.14 Describe the method of reciprocal levelling, applicability and merits-demerits
5.15 State the permissible limits of error in ordinary levelling, rough levelling, precise
levelling, and underground levelling in establishing bench marks of important nature
6.0 Contouring and subsidence
6.1 State the purpose of subsidence levelling.
6.2 State the purpose of highest flood level.
6.3 Define the term contour
6.4 Define the term contour interval and horizontal equivalent of contour.
6.5 List the methods of contouring.
6.6 Describe the direct method of contouring.
6.7 Describe the square method of contouring.
6.8 List the uses of contour for mining engineer.
6.9 List the characteristics of contours.
6.10 Define the terms stratum contours Isopachyte and grade contour.
COURSE CONTENTS:
1. Introduction: Definition – Objectives – Classification – Principle – Surveying.
2. Methods of Measuring Distances:- Classification – Instruments – Constructional details – Reasons
for incorrect Length of Chain – Ranging – Direct – Indirect – Measuring Distances on level Ground –
Sloping Ground – Sources of Errors – Corrections – Problems – Mistakes – Permissible Limits.
3. Chain Surveying:- Purpose – Principle – Steps – Reconnaissance – Factors Governing Selection of
Stations – Definitions of offset – Baseline – Tie line – Reference sketch – Instruments for setting
offsets – Method of Chaining Vision Free Chaining Obstructed – Vision Obstructed Chaining Free –
Both Vision and Chaining Obstructed, Degree of accuracy in chaining, Triangulation survey,
Instruments, method of calculation of the area.
187
4. Compass Surveying:- Uses – Types – Sketch – Purpose of parts – Terms – True meridian – Magnetic
Meridian – Arbitrary Meridian – Bearing Whole Circle – Quadrantal – F. B – B. B – Methods of
Measuring Bearing- conversion W.C.B to Q.B, Q.B to W.C.B- Computes Included Angle – Local
Attraction – Reasons – solves Problems on Local Attraction – Magnetic Declination and Dip – Open &
Closed Traverse – Traversing with Compass and chain – Permissible errors.
5. Levelling :- Definitions – Type of Instruments - Adjustments – Fundamental Lines – Relations –
Principles of levelling – Methods –Effects of Curvature and Refraction Reciprocal Levelling – Merits –
Applicability – Problems – Permissible Errors
6. Contouring and Subsidence:-. Purpose of Subsidence Levelling-Purpose of H.F.L – Contouring –
Method of contouring, Interpolation of contours – Terms
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mine Surveying : S.Ghattak Vol. 1
2. Surveying and Levelling : T.P.Kanetkar&S.VKulkarni Vol. 1
3. Surveying and Levelling : B.C.Punmiya Vol. 1

Perio Marks Wise Question Wise
S. ds Weightage Distribution of Distribution of CO’s
Chapter Name
No Alloc Allocated Weightage Weightage Mapped
ated R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Introduction 04 03 03 01 CO1,
Measurement of
2 14 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO2
distances
3 Chain Surveying 15 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 C02
4 Compass Surveying 15 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 C02
Levelling C02, CO3,
5 20 14 03 03 08 01 01 01
CO4
Contouring and
6 07 11 03 08 01 01 CO4, CO5
Subsidence
Higher order question from
10 10 01
any chapters
TOTAL 75 80 15 15 24 26 05 05 04 02
Table Specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Tests
188

Third semester :: MNG-305 MINE SURVEYING-I
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) To work from whole to part

(b) Ranging is the process of measuring distance
(c) Whole circle bearing of a line AB is 12000’0’’ ,Quadrental bearing is ________ (CO3)
(d) Two toothed brass tag indicate___________ (CO2)
2. Classifies the methods of measuring distances (CO2)
3. Define the terms Geodetic survey and Plane survey (CO1)
4. State the principle of chain surveying (CO2)
5. List the types of compasses and their field applications (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) Describe the constructional details of 30 m chain (CO4)

(OR)
(B) Explain the method of measuring distances on sloping ground (CO2)
7. (A) Describe the method of chaining where Vision is obstructed and chaining is free (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Describe the method of chaining where Vision is free but chaining is obstructed (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the method of measuring the magnetic bearing of line, with prismatic compass (CO2)
(OR)
(B)Calculate the included angle P,Q and R of a triangle from the following data
Line Fore bearing Back bearing

PQ 370 2170
QR 1180 2980
RP 2590 790
(CO3)
oOo
189
Third semester :: MNG-305 MINE SURVEYING-I
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Contour lines used for earth work measurement

(b) Vertical axis is parallel to horizontal axis in levelling
(c) Fixed known reference point is known as ___________ (CO3)
(d) Freely suspended magnetic needle shows___________ . (CO2)
2. List the reasons for local attraction (CO1)
3. Define the terms a) level surface b) level line (CO1)
4. State the purpose of highest flood level (CO2)
5. Define the terms a) stratum contours b) Isopachyte contours (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) Following are the observed bearings of lines of a closed traverse ABCDEA
Line Observed bearing

F.B B.B
AB 191°45¹ 13°00¹
BC 39°30¹ 222°30¹
CD 22°45¹ 200°30¹
DE 242°45¹ 62°45¹
EA 330°15¹ 147°45¹
Correct the bearings for local attraction. Also calculate the included angle (CO5)
(OR)
(B) The magnetic bearing of a line AB is S 320 E and the magnetic declination is 8016' E. What is the true
bearing of the line (CO4)
190
7. (A) Explain the effects of curvature and refraction in levelling (CO3)
(OR)
(B) The following staff readings were observed successively with a level the instrument having been
moved after third, sixth and eight readings. 2.228; 1.606; 0.988; 2.090; 2.864; 1.262; 0.602;
1.982; 1.044; 2.684 meters. Enter the above readings in a page of a level book and calculate the R.L
of points by raise and fall method, if the first reading was taken with a staff held on a bench mark of
432.384 meters (CO2)
8. (A) Describe the direct method of contouring (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Describe the square method of contouring (CO3)
oOo
191
C20-MNG-305
D.MNG.E. –III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
MINE SURVEYING-I
PART – A
10X3 = 30
1. Define the term Surveying (CO1)
2. List the various types of chains and tapes (CO2)
3. List the sources of errors in measuring distances (CO3)
4. State the purpose of chain surveying (CO4)
5. List the steps in chain surveying (CO3)
6. State the uses of compass (CO3)
7. List the types of compasses (CO2)
8. Define of terms a) level surface b) level line (CO1)
9. List different types of levelling instruments (CO2)
10. List the methods of contouring (CO4)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Describe the constructional details of 30m chain (CO2)

(OR)
B) Explain the method of measuring distances on level ground (CO3)
12. A) Describe the method of chaining where vision is free but chaining is obstructed(CO3)
(OR)
B) Describe the method of chaining where both vision and chaining are obstructed (CO3)
13. A) State the parts of Prismatic compass with sketch (CO2)

(OR)
B) Describe the traversing with compass and chain (CO5)
192
14. A) Explain the effects of curvature and refraction in levelling (CO4)
(OR)
B) The following staff readings were observed successively with a level the instrument having been
moved after third, sixth and eight readings. 2.228; 1.606; 0.988; 2.090; 2.864; 1.262; 0.602;
1.982; 1.044; 2.684 meters. Enter the above readings in a page of a level book and calculate the R.L
of points by raise and fall method, if the first reading was taken with a staff held on a bench mark of
432.384 meters (CO5)
15. A) Describe the direct method of contouring (CO4)

(OR)
B)List the uses of contour for mining engineer (CO2)
PART – C
1X 10 = 10
Instructions:Part C consists of 1 question which carries 10 marks.
16. What is Magnetic declination and Dip?
The magnetic bearing of a line AB is S 320 E and the magnetic declination is 8016' E. What
is the true bearing of the line? (CO5)
***
193
MINING GEOLOGY
Course Code Course Title No of periods / Total no of Marks for Marks for SA
week periods FA
MNG-306 Mining Geology 05 75 20 80
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Stratigraphy 15 CO1, CO2

2 Economic Geology 20 CO2, CO3
3 Prospecting Techniques 15 CO2,CO3,CO4 ,CO5
4 Coal Geology 10 CO3,CO4 ,CO5
5 Petroleum Geology 5 CO2, CO3,CO4 ,CO5
6 Hydro geology 10 CO2, CO3,CO4 ,CO5
Total 75

Explain the concepts of stratigraphy
Course To familiarized economic geology
Objectives To discribe the prospecting techniques
Explain the coal geology
To familiarized petroleum geology.
Explain ground water table , Aquifier, Aquifuge
CO1 Explain Basic concepts of stratigraphy, economic geology,

prospecting
CO2 Explain Stratigraphy of geology, origin of earth, internal composition,
CO3 Describe the Stratigraphy of mineral , rock formations, oxidation and

Course outcomes
super gene enrichment
CO4 Explain Prospecting and their importance in mining
CO5 Explain Coal geology, formation petroleum geology, composition of

mineral and rocks
194
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: 306 Course Title: Mining Geology No of Periods: 75

CO Periods
Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO4,CO5 44 59 3 >40% Level 3 Highly
PO 2 CO4 8 11 1 addressed
PO 3 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
PO 4 Addressed
PO 5 CO4,CO5 8 10 1 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO 7 CO3 15 20 2
CO1 3 1
CO2 3 1
CO3 2 1
CO4 3 1 1 2 1
CO5 3 1 1 1
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Understand Basic concepts of Stratigraphy
1.1 Define the term Stratigraphy
1.2 State the objectives of Stratigraphy
1.3 Explain Geological Time Scale
1.4 State and explain the physiographic divisions of India.
1.5 Describe each of the following systems with their distribution and economic importance -
Archaean – Dharwar - Cuddapah - Vindhyan - Gondwana systems
1.6 Explain the stratigraphy of Andhra Pradesh.
2.0 Understand the Basic concepts of Economic Geology
2.1 Define Economic Geology
2.2 Define the terms Ore, Gangue, Tenor, Associated Minerals, Resource, Reserves, Proved,
Probableand Possible reserves.
2.3 Explain the term economic geology.
2.4 List the various processes of mineralization
2.5 Explain Magmatic Concentration process of mineralization and list the minerals formed in
the process.
2.6 Explain Sublimation and Metasomatic replacement of country rocks by invading magmas
processes of mineralization and list the minerals formed in the processes.
195
2.7 Explain the metamorphic process of mineralization and list the minerals formed in the
process.
2.8 Explain the sedimentation, evaporation and mechanical concentration processes of
mineralization and list the minerals formed in the processes.
2.9 Explain the Residual concentration and oxidation & secondary sulphide enrichment
processes of mineralization and list the minerals formed in the processes. Also list out the
favourable conditions of mineralization.
2.10 Explain the Hydrothermal and cavity filling processes of mineralization and list the minerals
formed in the processes with suitable examples and figures.
3.0 Know about Prospecting Techniques
3.1 State the objectives of Geological and Geophysical prospecting of minerals/ore deposits
3.2 List the equipment required for preliminary prospecting of minerals/ore deposits
3.3 List the various guides for location of mineral deposits in the field
3.4 List the different geophysical methods of prospecting
3.5 List the different electrical methods of geophysical prospecting
3.6 Explain the Self-potential, Resistivity, Potential drop ratio, Electromagnetic and Induced
polarization methods of geophysical prospecting for minerals/ore deposits.
3.7 Explain the Gravity methods of geophysical prospecting for minerals/ore deposits.
3.8 Explain the Seismic reflection and Seismic refraction methods of geophysical prospecting for
minerals/ore deposits.
3.9 Explain the Radiometric method of geophysical prospecting for minerals/ore deposits.
4.0 Know about the Coal Geology
4.1 State the Periods of coal formation
4.2 State the different Stages of coal formation
4.3 Explain the Origin of Coal Seams
4.4 Explain the In situ and Drift Theories of coal seams formation
4.5 Describe the various structural features of coal seams
4.6 Give the classification of coal based on formation and rank
4.7 Describe the coalfields of India
5.0 Know about the Petroleum Geology
5.1 List the uses of Petroleum
5.2 Describe the Origin of Petroleum
5.3 State the migration and accumulation of petroleum
5.4 State the distribution of major Oil fields in the world
5.5 State the distribution of Oil fields in India
6.0 Hydro geology
6.0 Importance of the Hydrogeology
6.1 Outline the Occurrence of ground water, vertical distribution of ground water
6.2 Explain the Water Table
6.3 Compare the different types of Ground water and explain Hydrological cycle
6.4 Classify the types of Precipitation
6.5 Function the Rain fall measurements and records.
6.6 What is Evaporation and Evapo-transpiration
6.7 Classify the factors controlling evapo-transpiration
6.8 Define Runoff, Infiltration
6.9 Function the different factors affecting infiltration
6.10 Distinguish the Zone of Saturation and Zone of Aeration
6.11 Elaborate the Water bearing properties of Rocks
6.12 Explain Aquifer, Aquifuge and Aquiclude
196
COURSE CONTENTS:
1.0 Stratigraphy: Definition –objectives of stratigraphy – Geological time scale – Physiographic divisions
of India - major Stratigraphical divisions of India – Archaean- Dharwar - Cuddapah – Vindhyan –
Gondwana systems – Stratigraphy of A.P state.
2.0 Economic Geology: Definition of terms – ore – gauge, tenor, associated mineral, resources, proved –
probable, possible reserves – different process of Mineralisation – important economic minerals
associated with each process.
3.0 Prospecting Techniques: Objectives – Guides for location of mineral deposits –Geophysical
methods–Electrical, Gravity, Seismic, and Radiometric.
4.0 Know about the Coal Geology: State the periods of coal formation, mention the different stages of
coal formation, explain the origin of coal seams, and explain the in situ theory and drift theory.
Describe the structural features of coal seams. Give the classification of Coal. List the world coal
fields. Describe the coalfields of India
5.0 Know about the Petroleum Geology: know the importance of Petroleum as Fuel. State the Origin of
Petroleum. State the Migration and Accumulation of Petroleum. State the distribution of Oil fields in
the world. State the distribution of Oil fields in India.
6.0 Hydro Geology : Introduction, Occurrence and source of ground water. Vertical distribution of ground
water. Water Table and Types of Ground water. Hydrological cycle. Types of Precipitation- Rain fall
measurements and records. Evaporation – Factors controlling evapo-transpiration. Runoff.
Infiltration and factors affecting infiltration. Zone of Saturation and Zone of Aeration. Water bearing
properties of rocks: Porosity and Permeability of Rocks Aquifer, Aquifuge and Aquiclude.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Text book of Geology : P.K.Mukharjee

2. Mining Geology : Arogyaswamy
3. Engineering Geology : Parbin Singh
4 Economic Geology : Batemen
5 Coal Geology : R.S.Sharma
6 Principles of Stratigraphy : A. Ravindra Kumar
7 Principles of Engineering Geology : K.M.Bangar
8 Geology of petroleum : Leverson
197

Periods Weightage Distribution of Distribution of CO’s
S. No Chapter Name
Allocated Allocated Weightage Weightage Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Stratigraphy 15 14 8 6 1 2 CO1,CO3
Economic 20 14 CO1,CO3,CO
2 8 3 3 1 1 1
Geology 4
Prospecting 15 14
3 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO5
Techniques
4 Coal Geology 10 11 3 8 1 1 CO4,CO5
Petroleum 5 3
5 3 1 CO4,CO5
Geology
6 Hydro Geology 10 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO4,CO5
Higher order question 10
10 1 CO5
from any chapters
TOTAL 75 80 28 23 16 13 6 6 2 2
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap-Application ; An- Analylising
198

Third semester :: MNG-306 MINING GEOLOGY
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Fossils are present in Sedimentary rocks

(b) The lowest admissible limit of metallic content of an ore is known as its tenor
(c) The Mahendragiri is present in which state ___________
(CO3)
(d) Dissemination, Segregation, Injection are the different kinds of ___________ . (CO2)
2. Define the term Stratigraphy (CO1)
3. List the various processes of mineralization (CO1)
4. List the different geophysical methods of prospecting (CO2)
5. Define Economic Geology (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) Explain Geological Time Scale (CO4)

(OR)
(B) Explain the stratigraphy of Andhra Pradesh (CO4)
7. (A) Explain Magmatic Concentration process of mineralization (CO3)

(OR)
(B) Explain the metamorphic process of mineralization (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the Self-potential method of geophysical prospecting for minerals/ore deposits (CO5)
(OR)
(B) Explain the Electromagnetic method of geophysical prospecting for minerals/ore deposits (CO5)
oOo
199

Third semester :: MNG-306 MINING GEOLOGY
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a)The widely used instrument in Radiometric Prospecting is Scintillation Counter

(b) The first stage in coal formation is Humification stage
(c) Horse backs are made up in ___________ (CO3)
(d)Crude oil refined by the processes of ___________ (CO2)
2. State the Periods of coal formation (CO1)
3. List the uses of Petroleum (CO1)
4. Classify the types of Precipitation (CO2)
5. Define Runoff, Infiltration (CO1)
Instructions :
6. (A) Explain the Gravity methods of geophysical prospecting for minerals/ore deposits (CO1)
(OR)
(B) Explain the Radiometric method of geophysical prospecting for minerals/ore deposits (CO1)
7. (A) Describe the various structural features of coal seams (CO3)

(OR)
(B) Describe the coalfields of India (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the Water Table (CO2)

(OR)
(B)Explain Aquifer, Aquifuge and Aquiclude (CO3)
oOo
200
C20-MNG-306
D.MNG.E. – III SEMESTER EXAMINATION
MINING GEOLOGY
PART – A
10 X3 = 30
1. Define the term Stratigraphy (CO1)
2. Give the physiographic divisions of India (CO2)
3. Give the economic importance of Gondwana system of rocks (CO2)
4. Define the terms Ore and Gangue (CO1)
5. Write a short note on fissure vein deposits (CO1)
6. What are hydrothermal deposits? (CO1)
7. State the objectives of geological prospecting. (CO2)
8. List the equipment required for field work in search of minerals or ores (CO4)
9. State the periods of coal formation (CO5)
10. Mention the uses of petroleum as fuel (CO2)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Explain the geological time scale in tabular form (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the formation of Archaean system of rocks and list out the important minerals
formed in the system (CO4)
12. A) Explain the term Economic Geology. (CO1)

(OR)
B) Describe the Oxidation and Secondary enrichment of sulphide ore mineralization
process. Write the favourable conditions of formation of deposits (CO5)
201
13. A) Explain the magmatic concentration process of mineralization with suitable examples (CO5)
(OR)
B) What are cavity filling deposits? Describe the various kinds of cavity filling deposits with
suitable diagrams. (CO1)
14. A)Explain the resistivity method of prospecting for ground water with a sketch. (CO3)
(OR)
B) Explain the Radiometric method of prospecting for ores or minerals (CO3)
15. A) Describe the various structural features of coal seams with sketches (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain the formation of coal. (CO4)
PART – C
1X 10 = 10
16. Justify the comment that Andhra Pradesh is in shield zone. (CO5)
***
202
BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
Course No. of periods / Total No. of Marks for Marks for

Course Title
Code Week Periods FA SA
BASIC ELECTRICAL
MNG307 ENGINEERING LABORATORY 3 45 40 60
PRACTICE
COURSE OUTCOMES MAPPING
S.No Major Topics No. of periods CO’s Mapped
1. Electrical Engineering Fundamentals 6 CO1
2. Electrical Circuits 6 CO2
3. Electrical Machines 18 CO3
4 Electrical Measuring Instruments 6 CO4
5. Electrical Safety Procedures 9 CO5
Total 45
To familiarize the basic concepts and working principles of electrical engineering

to solve various electrical circuits.
COURSE
To understand the working and performance of different electrical machines and
OBJECTIVES
measuring instruments.
To acquire the knowledge of operating electrical equipment with safety and
performing the first aid methods.
Recognizing the basic concepts of electrical engineering and

CO1 MNG307.1
their applications.
Calculating various parameters of electrical circuits to know
COURSE CO2 MNG307.2
their importance in electrical engineering.
OUTCOMES
CO3 MNG307.3 Operating various electrical machines for different applications.
CO4 MNG307.4 Examining errors in electrical measuring instruments.
Practicing safety measures and first aid methods in different
CO5 MNG307.5
situations.
203
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.1 Verification of Ohm‘s Law.
1.2 Finding Power and Power Factor in Resistive Load.
Electrical Circuits
2.1 Verification of Kirchhoff’s laws.
2.2 Finding Power and Power Factor in Single Phase RL Load..
Electrical Machines
3.1 Speed Control of D.C. Shunt Motor.
3.2 Load test on Single Phase Transformer.
3.3 Load test on Single Phase Induction motor.
4.1 Calibration of Dynamometer Type Wattmeter.
4.2 Calibration of Induction Type Single Phase Energymeter.
Electrical Safety Procedures.
5.1 Practice the procedures to be adopted to avoid electric shock.
5.2 Practice the first aid methods to be followed after electrocuted.
5.3 Practice the procedure of plate earthing.
204
KEY COMPETENCIES TO BE ACHIEVED BY THE STUDENT
S.No Major Topic Key Competency
 Identification of the usage of various measuring

instruments.
1 Electrical Engineering Fundamentals  Verification of Ohm’s law
 Finding the power and power factor in a resistive
load
 Verification of Kirchhoff’s laws
2 Electrical Circuits  Finding the power and power factor in a single
phase RL series load
 Identification of the terminals of a DC Shunt Motor.

 Controlling the speed of a DC Shunt Motor below
the rated speed using Armature Voltage control
method
 Controlling the speed of a DC Shunt Motor above
the rated speed using Field Flux control method
 Identification of the terminals of a single phase
3 Electrical Machines transformer.
 Finding efficiencies of a single phase transformer at
various conditions by conducting load test.
 Identification of the terminals of a single phase
induction motor.
 Finding efficiencies of a single phase induction
motor at various conditions by conducting load
test.
 Identification of the requirement of calibration of

measuring instruments.
 Finding the percentage of error in the readings of a
dynamometer type wattmeter by calibrating it.
4 Electrical Measuring Instruments
 Performing connections between the service mains
and load through Energymeter.
 Finding the percentage of error in the readings of
an induction type Energymeter by calibrating it.
205
 Practicing the procedures to be adopted to avoid
electric shock.
 Practicing the first aid methods to be followed
5 Electrical Safety Procedures after electrocuted.
 Performing pipe earthing to the electrical
machinery.
CO’S – PO’S – PSO’S MAPPING STRENGTH
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
MNG307.1 3 3
MNG307.2 3 2 1 3 2
MNG307.3 3 3 1
MNG307.4 3 2 3
MNG307.5 3 1 3 1
Average 3 2 1.5 1 3 1.3
3-Strongly Mapped 2- Moderately Mapped 1- Slightly Mapped
Note:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest Lectures (v) Group Discussions (vi) Quizzes (vii)
Industrial Visits (viii) Tech Fests (ix) Mini Projects (x) Library Visits
206
Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week Periods/Semester
Basic Mechanical MNG-308 03 45
Engineering labaratory
practice
TIME SCHEDULE
NO.OF
S.NO EXPERIMENT TITLE
PERIODS
1 Hooks Law verification 8
2 Study of Hydraulic Pumps 12
3 Determination of Flash and Fire points of Fuels and Lubricants 10
4 Determination of Calorific Values of Fuels 6
5 Performance of IC engines 9
TOTAL 45

COURSE Upon the completion of the course the student shall be able to understand the
OBJECTIVE working of various equipments.
MNG-
CO1 Operate the UTM to verify the Hooks law
308.1
MNG-
CO2 Conduct the tests on Hydraulic Pumps.
308.2
COURSE MNG- Determine the flash point and fire points of various fuels and
CO3
OUTCOMES 308.3 lubricants
MNG-
CO4 Determine the calorific values of various fuels
308.4
MNG-
CO5 Conduct the tests on IC Engines to study its performance.
308.5
207
PO-CO Mapping
Course
Code : Course Title: Basic Mechanical Engineering Laboratory practice No. of Periods
MNG- Number of Course Outcomes: 05 45
308
CO Periods addressing
Level
POs Mapped with CO No. PO in Column 1 Remarks
(1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1 – CO5 12 27 2 >40% Level 3
PO2 Highly addressed
25% to 40% Level 2

PO3
Moderately
PO4 CO1 – CO5 27 60 3 Addressed
5 to 25% Level 1
PO5
Low addressed
PO6
<5% Not addressed
PO7 CO1 – CO5 6 13 1
CO1 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO2 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO3 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO4 2 3 1 2 2 2
CO5 2 3 1 2 2 2
Note:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest Lectures (v) Group Discussions (vi) Quiz (vii)
Industry Visits (viii) Tech Fest (ix) Mini Projects (x) Library Visits.
208
LEARNING OUTCOMES
After the completion of these topics the student should be able to

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:
1.0 Hooks Law verification
1.1 Draw the stress and strain diagram for Mild Steel and verify Hooks Law
1.2 Conduct compression test on timber
1.3 Conduct bending test on timber
2.0 Study of Hydraulic Pumps

2.1 Study of reciprocating pumps
2.2 Study of centrifugal pumps
2.3 Study of jet pump
2.4 Determine the pump characteristics of centrifugal pump
2.5 Determine the pump characteristics of reciprocating pump
3.0 Determination of Flash and Fire points of Fuels and Lubricants

3.1 Determine the flash and fire points of kerosene and diesel oils using Able’s flash and
fire point tester
3.2 Determination of flash and fire points of given lubricating oil using Cleaveland’s
Flash and Fire point tester
4.0 Determination of Calorific values of fuels

4.1 Study of Bomb calorimeter and determine calorific value of a given fuel.
4.2 Study Junkers gas calorimeter to determine calorific value of gaseous fuel
5.0 Performance of IC engines

5.1 Study of given Petrol engine and determination of IHP, BHP and mechanical
efficiency
5.2 Study of given diesel engine and determination of IHP, BHP and mechanical
efficiency
COURSE CONTENTS:
1. Hooks Law verification

Draw the stress and strain diagram for Mild Steel specimen and verify Hooks Law-
compression test on timber- bending test on timber.
2. Study of Hydraulic Pumps

Reciprocating pumps-Study of centrifugal pumps- jet pump- pump characteristics of
centrifugal pump- pump characteristics of reciprocating pump
209
3. Determination of Flash and Fire points of Fuels and Lubricants
Determine the flash and fire points of kerosene and diesel oils using Ables flash and fire point
tester-Determination of given lubricating oil using Cleavelands Flash and Fire point tester
4. Determination of Calorific values of fuels

Bomb calorimeter and determine calorific value of a given fuel- Junkers gas calorimeter to
determine calorific value ``+of gaseous fuel
5. Performance of IC engines
Study of given Petrol engine and determination of IHP, BHP and mechanical efficiency-
diesel engine and determination of IHP, BHP and mechanical efficiency
Experiments Key Competences

1.Hooks law verification 1. Understand Regarding UTM
2. Understand size of specimen, calculation of
%elongation and contraction
3. Understand how to calculate stress and strain.
4. Understand to draw stress-strain diagram.
5. Understand marking various properties on stress-strain
diagram of mild steel specimen
6. Understand how to apply tensile load and compressive
load on timber.
2. Study of Hydraulic Pumps 1. Understand working principle of Reciprocating and
centrifugal pumps.
2. Understand various parts of pumps and their condition.
3. Understand working principle of jet pump.
4. Understand various characteristics of pumps and their
efficiency.
5. Understand to plot graph representing various
characteristics of pumps.
3. Determination of flash and 1. Understand various types of fuels and their densities.
fire points of fuels and 2. Understand flash and fire points of fuels and their
lubricants. limits.
3. Understand various flash and fire point tester like
Ables flash and fire point tester and Cleaveland`s Flash
and Fire point tester.
4. Understand to tabulate readings of different fuels and
lubricants.
210
4. Determination of Calorific 1. Understand various types of solid, liquid and gaseous
values of Fuels fuels and their calorific values.
2. Understand combustion process of various fuels.
3. Understand different types of calorimeters and their
working process.
4. Understand condition of different parts of Bomb
calorimeter and Junker`s gas calorie meter.
5. Understand formula`s of Higher Calorific Value and
Lower Calorific Value and calculation.
5. Performance of I.C. 1. Understand different types of engines and various
Engine components of engine.
2. Understand two stroke and four stroke petrol and diesel
engines and their working principles.
3. Understand to record speed, stroke and area of the
engine cylinder.
4. Understand to tabulate and calculate B.H.P, I.H.P, and
Mechanical efficiency of the engine.
5. Understand to plot graphs representing various
characteristics of engines.
211
MINE SURVEYING PRACTICE-I

week periods FA
Mine Surveying
MNG-309 04 60 40 60
Practice -I
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. Major Components Periods
1. Identification of Survey Equipment 04
2. Chain Surveying 16
3. Compass Surveying 16
4. Leveling and contouring 24
Total 60

(i) To familiarise with the Survey Equipment.
(ii) To familiarize with the concepts of chain surveying
Course Objectives (iii) To familiarize compass surveying
(iv) To familiarize levelling and contouring
(v) Applications of contouring in Mining
CO1 Familiarize different types of surveying equipments
CO2 Explain Surveying using chain. Tape, and other linear measurements
Course Outcomes CO3 Explain Simple, compound levelling
CO4 Explain Level survey , Compass traversing
CO5 Calculation of areas of given area, Levelling survey in mining
212
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: MNG-309 Course Title: Mine Surveying Practice-I No of Periods: 60

CO Periods
Mapped with CO addressing PO in Level
PO No Remarks
no Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 32 54 3
PO2 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO3 CO2,CO3,CO4 28 46 3 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
addressed
PO4
PO5 <5% Not addressed
PO6
PO7
CO1 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3
CO4 3 3
CO5
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Up on Completion of the course the student shall be able to:
1.0 Identify the equipment in survey Laboratory

1.1 Identify the Survey field book and familiarize its use
1.2 Ranging of survey line by a) direct method (by eye) b) indirect method.
1.3 Measure distances by judgement, pacing, chaining, taping on a fairly level ground.
2.0 Know Chain surveying

2.1 Identifies the equipment required for chain survey
2.2 Sets the perpendicular offsets to various objects from chain line with chain and tape, cross-
staff.
2.3 Carry out chain triangulation in a given area of Institute campus.
2.4 Prepare the plan of chain triangulation.
2.5 Carries out cross-staff survey
2.6 Plots the cross-staff survey
2.7 Determines the area from cross-staff survey plotting
2.8 Draws the conventional sings used in surveying
2.9 Determine width of a river when obstructed to the chaining
2.10 Determine length across a building when both chaining and vision are obstructed.
2.11 Determine the length of a line when the vision is obstructed and chaining is free.
213
3.0 Know Compass survey
3.1 Identify the parts of the prismatic compass
3.2 Measure the magnetic bearing of a line.
3.3 Measure the bearing of the line of closed figures and records the observations.
3.4 Calculate the included angles of the traverse and perform arithmetic check
3.5 Plot the traverse.
3.6 Calculate the local attraction of traverse and balance the traverse.
4.0 Know the levelling

4.1 Identifies the parts of a Dumpy level.
4.2 Practices taking reading on levelling staff with Dumpy level.
4.3 Conduct simple levelling and determine the R.L of a given point from a known B.M
4.4 Conduct compound levelling and determine the R.L of a given point from a known B.M
4.5 Carryout Fly levelling and determines R.L of a given point from a known B.M
4.6 Carry out profile levelling.
4.7 Plots the profile levelling and finds the gradient of the line.
4.8 Conduct cross-section levelling.
4.9 Plots the cross-section from the observations.
4.10 Understand the Contours and their interpolation
4.11 ConductContouring by Direct method with plotting.
4.12 Conduct Contouring by square method.
MINING GEOLOGY LABORATORY PRACTICE

week periods FA
Mining Geology
MNG-310 03 45 40 60
Laboratory Practice
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. Major Components Periods Mapped CO’s
Identification of minerals by studying their CO1
1. 15
megascopic properties
Identification of rocks by studying their megascopic CO1, CO2, CO3
2. 15
properties
Identification of thin sections of rocks by studying CO1, CO2, CO3
3. 06
their microscopic properties
4 Mapping 06 CO3, CO4,CO5
5 Field Activities 03 CO4, CO5
Total 45
214
- To familiarise with the megascopic properties of minerals

Course Objectives - Identification of various rock formations based on megascopic properties
- To familiarise with the microscopic properties of minerals
- To analyse various features of contour maps, determination of profile or
cross section of contour maps at various locations on the map
- Field visit to understand above concepts
CO1 Explain megascopic, microscopic properties of minerals
CO2 Identification of megascopic and microscopic properties of various

minerals, rocks
CO3 Identification of Minerals, Rocks based on megascopic, microscopic

Course outcomes properties
CO4 Study of contour maps, cross sectional features of various locations on

the map
CO5 Field visit to study the properties of various rocks (Megascopic properties
and structural features)
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: MNG-310 Course Title: Mining Geology Laboratory No of Periods: 45

CO Periods
Mapped with CO addressing PO Level
PO No Remarks
no in Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO5 22 49 3 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO2 CO3 2 4
PO3 CO4 3 7 1 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
PO4 CO5 8 18 1 Addressed
PO5
PO6 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO7 CO5 10 22 1 <5% Not addressed
215
CO1 3 1
CO2 3 1
CO3
CO4 1 1
CO5 3 1 1 2 1
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Identify the Minerals based on Megascopic properties

1.1 Use Streak plate, Penknife, Jolly’s spring Balance/Walker’s steel yard, Glass piece
1.2 Identify the form, colour, streak, lustre, cleavage and hardness of minerals with examples
1.3 Observe the megascopic/physical properties of minerals through which the minerals are
identified.
1.4 Analyse the diagnostic properties of minerals
2.0 Identify the Megascopic properties of Rocks

2.1 Identify the colour of Igneous Rocks
2.2 Understand the texture of Igneous Rocks with the aid of magnifying lens if necessary.
2.3 Observe the structure of Igneous Rocks
2.4 Identify the minerals-essential, accessory present in Igneous Rocks
2.5 Infer the mode of formation of Igneous Rocks
2.6 Identify the colour of Sedimentary Rocks
2.7 Understand the texture of Sedimentary Rocks
2.8 Identify the minerals present inSedimentary Rocks
2.9 Identify the agent of transport and cementing material present inSedimentary Rocks
2.10 Infer the mode of formation of Sedimentary Rocks
2.11 Identify the colour of Metamorphic Rocks
2.12 Understand the texture and structure of Metamorphic Rocks
2.13 Identify the minerals present and grade of metamorphism ofMetamorphic Rocks
2.14 Infer the mode of formation of Metamorphic Rocks
3.0 Identify the Microscopic properties of Rocks

3.1 Identifies the different parts of Petrological microscope and develop skills to use.
3.2 Identify of thin section of Rocks.
3.3 Identify the properties of Igneous, Sedimentary and Metamorphic rocks under microscope
3.4 Infer the mode of formation of rocks observed
216
4.0 Mapping
4.1 Study of topography and contours maps.
4.2 Find out strike and Dip of the structures.
4.3 Drawing of profiles.
4.4 Understand the maps showing different geological features such as
a) Folds b) Faults c) Unconformities d) Dykes e) Sills
4.5 Understanding the Geological History of the area based on maps.
5.0 Undertaking of field activities

5.1 Identifies the tools equipment used in field.
5.2 Identify and collect the important mineral and rock samples in the field.
5.3 Determine Strike and Dip of Formation with the help of Brunton’s compass
5.4 Identify the following features in field
a) Fold and its parts b) Fault and its parts
c) Joint and its parts d) Unconformities
5.5 Identify the following structures.
a) Current bedding b) Inliers
c) Outliners d) Exfoliation
e) Ripple marks f) Out crops
217
IV SEMESTER
218
IV SEMESTER (SECOND YEAR)
Instruction
period / week Total
Subject
Name of the Subject Period / End
Code Practical/T Duration Sessional Total
Theory Sem Exam
utorial (hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Engineering
3 - 45 3 20 80 100
MNG- 401 Mathematics – III
Underground Metal
MNG-402 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Mining Methods
Mine Environmental
MNG-403 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Engineering
MNG-404 Mining Machinery-I 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
MNG-405 Mine Surveying – II 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
MNG-406 Surface Mining 5 75 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL
Mine Environmental
MNG-407 Engineering Laboratory - 3 45 3 40 60 100
practice
MNG-408 Communication Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
MNG-409 Mine Surveying 4 60 3 40 60 100

-
practice - II
Mine Planning and
MNG-410 Design Laboratory - 3 45 3 40 60 100
practice
MNG-411 Mining Machinery 3 45 3 40 60 100
-
Laboratory practice
TOTAL 26 16 630 320 780 1100
219
C-20
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-III
Course No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA

Code Course Title Periods/week periods
Engineering
MNG-401 3 45 20 80
Mathematics-III

Higher order Linear Differential equations
1 15 CO1
with constant coefficients
2 Laplace Transforms 18 CO2
3 Fourier Series 12 CO3
Total Periods 45
(i) To learn the principles of solving differential equations of second and

Course Objectives
higher order.
(ii) To comprehend the concept of Laplace transformations and inverse Laplace
transformations.
(iii) To understand the concept of Fourier Series expansion of functions.
CO1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equations of

second and higher order.
Course Outcomes
CO2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various functions.
CO3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range Fourier Sine and
Cosine series.
220
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III
Learning Outcomes
Unit-I
Differential Equations of higher order
C.O. 1 Solve homogeneous and non-homogeneous differential equation of second and higher order.
L.O 1.1 Solve Differential equations of the type (aD2 +bD + c) y = 0 where a, b, c are real numbers
and provide examples.
1.2 Solve higher order homogeneous differential equations with constant coefficients and
provide examples.
1.3 Define complementary function, particular Integral and general solution of a non-
homogeneous differential equation.
1.4 Describe the methods of solving f(D) y = X where f(D) is a polynomial of nth order and X is
a function of the forms 2cos2   3cos   1  0. and their linear combinations where
n is a positive integer, with examples.
Unit-II
Laplace Transforms
C.O. 2 Find Laplace and inverse Laplace transforms of various functions.
L.O. 2.1 Define Laplace Transform and explain the sufficient conditions of existence of Laplace
Transform
2.2. Obtain Laplace transforms of standard functions and solve simple problems.
2.3 Write the properties of Laplace Transform – Linearity property, First shifting theorem
(without proof) and Change of Scale property and solve simple problems.
2.4. Write the Laplace Transform of unit step function and second shifting theorem (without
proof) and solve simple problems.
2.5. Write formulae for Laplace transform of functions with multiplication by and division
by t, Laplace transform of derivatives, evaluation of some definite integrals using Laplace
Transforms and solve simple problems.
2.6 Define inverse Laplace Transform, obtain inverse Laplace Transforms of standard
functions and solve simple problems.
2.7 Write linearity property, first and second shifting theorems (without proof), change of
scale property of inverse Laplace transform and solve simple problems.
2.8 Write inverse Laplace transforms of derivatives and integrals and solve simple problems.
2.9 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions with multiplication by s and division by s
and solve simple problems.
2.10 Write inverse Laplace transforms of functions using partial fractions and solve some
simple problems.
2.10 Define convolution of two functions, state convolution theorem (without proof) and
solve simple problems.
221
Unit-III
Fourier series
C.O. 3 Expand given functions as Fourier series and half- range Fourier Sine and Cosine series
L.O. 3.1 Define the orthogonality of functions in an interval.
3.2 Define Fourier series of a function in the intervals a 3
cos( B  C )  3abc. and  0,0 ,  6,0 
and write the Euler’s formulae for determining the Fourier coefficients.
3.3 Write sufficient conditions for the existence of Fourier series expansion of a function.
3.4 Find Fourier series of simple functions in the range (0 , 2π) and (-π , π)
3.5 Write Fourier series for even and odd functions in the interval  0,8 . and 1,2 expand
simple functions.
3.6 Write Fourier series expansion of a function over the interval (0, 2l) and 3x  4 y  5  0. and
expand simple functions.
3.7 Write half-range Fourier sine and cosine series of a function over the interval (0, π) and
and expand simple functions.
Engineering Mathematics – III
CO/PO - Mapping
CO1 3 2 1 1 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg 3 2.66 2.33 2.33 2.66 3 2.66
3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)

Note:
teacher.
conducted.
PSO1: An ability to understand the concepts of basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in various
areas like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and electronic systems and
all concerned engineering disciplines.
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tool, along with analytical skills to
arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.
PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a successful
career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological applications.
222
C-20
CO periods addressing PO in
column I
Mapped with CO Level
PO no Remarks
no (1,2 or 3)
No %
1 CO1, CO2, CO3 45 100% 3
2 CO1, CO2, CO3 37 82.2% 3 >40% Level 3
3 CO1, CO2, CO3 32 71.1% 3 Highly
4 CO1, CO2, CO3 32 71.1% 3 addressed
5
25% to 40%
6
Level 2
7
Moderately
PSO 1 CO1, CO2, CO3 37 82.2% 3
addressed
PSO 2 CO1, CO2, CO3 45 100% 3
PSO 3 CO1, CO2, CO3 36 80% 3 5% to 25%
Level 1 Low
addressed
<5% Not
addressed
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – III

(Common Subject)
Course Content
Unit I: Differential Equations of higher order
1. Solve Homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of order two
and higher with emphasis on second order.
2. Solve Non-homogenous linear differential equations with constant coefficients of the

form f(D)y = X where X is in the form k(constant), eax, sinax, cosax, xn, where n is a
positive integer, finding complimentary function, particular integral and general
solution.
Unit II: Laplace Transforms
3. Definition, sufficient conditions for existence of LT, LT of elementary functions, linearity property, state
first shifting theorem, change of scale property, multiplication by tn, division by t, LT of derivatives and
integrals, LT of unit step function, state second shifting theorem, inverse Laplace transforms- state
shifting theorems and change of scale property, multiplication by sn and division by s, derivatives,
integrals, examples of inverse LT using partial fractions, state convolution theorem with simple examples.
223
Unit III: Fourier series
4. Orthogonality of trigonometric functions, Representation of a function in Fourier series over the interval
dy sin 2 (a  y )
 . and y  tan 1 x, , Euler’s formulae , sufficient conditions for existence of Fourier
dx sin a
series expansion of a function, Fourier series expansion of basic functions limited to k(constant),
(1  x2 ) y2  2 xy1  0. and their combinations over the intervals ,
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2 2
a  x a x x a
22 2
1 1 1
Fourier series for even and odd functions over ii) , , , Fourier half-range
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2
1 1 1
sine and cosine series over  a  bSin d ,  a  b cos d and  a cos  b sin   cd and  u.vdx
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers

2. M.R. Spiegel, Schaum’s Outline of Laplace Transforms, Schaums’ Series
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook: Higher Mathematics, Mir Publishers, Moscow.
224
Blue print
Weightag Marks wise Question

S. Chapter/ No of COs
e distribution of wise distribution
No Unit title Periods mapped
allotted weightage of weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Unit – I Higher
order Linear
Differential
1 15 28 11 11 3 3 2 2 1 1 CO1
equations with
constant
coefficients
Unit - II
CO2
2 Laplace 18 33 11 11 11 0 2 2 2 0
Transforms
Unit - III
3 12 19 3 3 3 10 1 1 1 1 CO3
Fourier Series
Total 45 80 25 25 17 13 5 5 4 2
C-20
Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered
Unit Test-I From LO 1.1 to 2.5
Unit Test-II From LO 2.6 to 3.7
225
Unit Test I
First Year
Sub Code: MNG-401
Part-A 16Marks
(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry
three marks each
1. Answer the following:

m n
a. Write the auxiliary equation for given differential equation sin x.cos x dx,
(CO1)
1 1 1
i), 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2
1 1 1
b. For given differential equation ii) , , , if roots of auxiliary
a x
2 2
a x
2 2
x  a2
2
iii) x 2  a 2 , x 2  a 2 , a 2  x 2
equation are 1,-1,then _____________
(CO1)
1
c.  4  x2
dx. ___________
(CO2)

 e  f ( x)  f ( x)  dx  e f ( x)  c then  cos xdx : State TRUE/FALSE

2
x ' x
d. (CO2)
0
 1

Solve  3cos ec x  2 tan x sec x 
2
2.  dx. (CO1)
x
sin  log x 
3. Find the particular integral of  x
dx. (CO1)

x
4. Evaluate e sin 2 xdx. (CO2)

2
5. 
Evaluate sin 2 xdx
0
(CO2)
226
Part-B 3×8=24

1
6. A) Solve  5  4 cos x dx. (CO1)
or

4 3
B) Solve sin x cos xdx. (CO1)
 1  x2 
7. A) Solve  cos 1  2 
dx. (CO1)
 1 x 
or

4 2x
B) Solve x e dx. (CO1)

2
8. 
A) Evaluate cos 4 x cos xdx
0
(CO2)
or

2
sin10 x
B) Evaluate  dx (CO2)
0
sin10 x  cos10 x
-o0o-
227
Unit Test II
First Year
Subject name: Engineering Mathematics-II
Sub Code: MNG-401
Part-A 16Marks

(2) First question carries four marks and the remaining questions carry three
marks each
1. Answer the following:
a. y  f ( x) then  a, b  : State TRUE/FALSE (CO2)
b. f ( x) (CO2)
c.  a, b  (CO2)
d2y dy
d. Write the Fourier series for the function 2
 p 2 y  0 in the interval  Py  Q (CO3)
dx dx
2. Evaluate x 2  2 x  1 (CO2)
3. Evaluate 1, 2 (CO2)
4. Evaluate x 2  4 y (CO2)
5. Evaluate Fourier coefficient x  2 for x  4 in the interval y  A cos 2 x  B sin 2 x. (CO3)
Part-B 3×8=24
dy 1 y2
6. A) Evaluate  . (CO2)
dx 1  x2
OR
B) Evaluate y  x 2  5x (CO2)
7. A) Evaluate y  4  2 x (CO2)
OR
B) Evaluate log x (CO2)
8. A) Obtain the Fourier series for the function x  e in the interval x  e2 (CO3)
OR
x2 y 2 6
1
B) Obtain the half range Fourier cosine series of   1 in  dx (CO3)
16 25 0
1 x
-o0o-
228
END EXAM MODEL PAPER
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS –MNG- 401
PART-A
1. Solve n  6 CO1
  
2. Solve y  2 xy dx  2 xy  x dy  0.
2 2
 CO1
dy y
3. Find the particular integral of differential equation x   x3 y 6 . CO1
dx x
 4 

4. Find the particular integral of differential equation  2sin x  3 e 
x
 dx. CO1
1  x2 

5. Find e x sin e x dx. CO2

6. Find sin 3x cos 2 xdx. CO2

x
7. Find xe dx. CO2
1
1
8. Find the value of  1 x
0
2
dx. in the Fourier expansion of y  x 2 in the interval CO3
9. Find the Fourier coefficients of x  1 in the interval y  sin x CO3
10. Find the value of x  0 in the half range cosine series of x   in the interval
2
 d3y 
2
 dy 
 3   3   x  1
2
CO3
 dx   dx 
PART-B
dy 1  y 2
11. A) Solve  CO1
dx 1  x 2
OR
  
B) Solve x  y dx  y  x dy  0.
2 2
 CO1
229
3x  1
12. A) Solve   x  1 x  3 dx. CO1
OR
1
B) Solve  5  4cos x dx. CO1

13. A) Evaluate x sin 3xcosxdx. CO2
OR

B) Evaluate x3 cos xdx. CO2
1
x3
14. A) Evaluate 0 1 x8 dx. CO2
OR

2
1
B) Evaluate  1  tan
0
3
x
dx. CO2
15. A) Find y  4 x
2
CO2
OR
B) Using convolution theorem find x  4 y

2
CO2
PART-C
16. Find the Fourier expansion of 27  4 x in the interval x  0 and hence deduce that x  3
2
CO3
***
230
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – MNG-401
TIME : 3 HOURS MODEL PAPER- 2 MAX.MARKS : 80M
PART-A
x2 y 2
1. Solve  1 CO1
16 25
11

3
2. Solve x dx CO1
1
dy
3. Find the particular integral of differential equation 2sin x  y cos x  xy 3e x . CO1
dx
 3

4. Find the particular integral of differential equation  3 e  2cos x 
x
 dx. CO1
x

5. Find cos 2 2 xdx. CO2
tan 1 x
6. Find  1  x2 dx. CO2

7. Find x cos xdx. CO2
2
1
8. Find the value of 
0 4 x 2
dx. in the Fourier expansion of i  a sin t in the interval x 2  y 2  9
CO3
9. Write Euler’s formula of Fourier expansion of x  0 in the interval x  2 CO3
x dy
10.Find the value of y  Ae  Be  e2 x  y in the interval
x
in the half range cosine series of
dx
CO3
231
PART-B
1
11. A) Solve  2x 2
 3x  5
dx. CO1
OR

B) Solve sin 3 x cos5 xdx. CO1
 2  sin 2 x 

x
12.A) Solve e   dx. CO1
 1  cos 2 x 
OR

B) Solve e2 x x 4 dx. CO1
1
sec2 x
13.A) Evaluate  1  tan x 
0
2
dx. CO2
OR

2
B) Evaluate log 1  tan   d .
 CO2
0
14.A) Evaluate y  x
2
CO2
OR
B) Using Laplace transforms evaluate y  3x  4 CO2
15.A) Find log x CO2

OR
B) Using convolution theorem find x  e CO2
PART-C
16.Find the Fourier expansion of x  e2 in the interval  and hence deduce

1
1
that  1 x
0
2
dx CO3
***
232
UNDERGROUND METAL MINING METHODS
Course Course Title No of periods / Total no of Marks for Marks for SA

Code week periods FA
MNG-402 Underground Metal 05 75 20 80

Mining Methods
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of
S. No Major Topics Mapped CO’s
Periods
Metal Mining – Basics and
1 10 CO1, CO2
Development
2 Raising methods 14 CO2, CO3
3 Stoping Methods 14 CO2, CO3, CO4
4 Advanced Stoping Methods 15 CO3,CO4,CO5
5 Sampling Methods 12 CO3,CO4
6 Deep mining – Problems 10 CO3,CO4,CO5
Total 75

- Explain basic terminology of metal mining
- Describe the development of Metalliferous deposits
Course
- To familiarize various Raising method used during development
Objectives
- To analyze different sampling used for grading of mineral deposits
- To analyze various problems in Deep mining, their analysis, precautions
and preventive measures
Course Outcomes CO1 Explain basic terminology and various activities in metal mining
CO2 Describe the development of Metalliferous deposits
CO3 Applicability of Raises, winzes , Orepass, Ore chute, Ore bins

during stoping operations
CO4 Analyze various sampling methods
CO5 Analyze different types of stoping methods, Deep mining

problems
233
PO-CO Mapping:
Course Code: MNG-

Course Title: Underground Metal Mining Methods No of Periods: 90
402
CO Periods
Mapped
PO No with CO Remarks
Col 1 (1,2,3)
No.
No %
PO2 CO1 15 20 1
PO3 - - - 25 to 40% Level 2 Moderately addressed
PO4 CO3 10 13.3 1
PO5 CO3 50 66.7 3 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO6 - - - -
<5% Not addressed
PO7 - - - -
CO1 - 1 - - - - - 1 - -
CO2 - - - - - - - - - -
CO3 - - - 1 3 - - - 1 1
CO4 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Metal Mining – Basics and Development
1.1 Define the terms related to metal mining with sketches: Mineral, Ore, Ore body, Gangue, Ore forming
minerals, Rock forming minerals, Foot wall, Hanging wall, Raise, Winze, Level, Level interval, Back,
Crown pillar, Sill pillar, Ore pass, Ore bin, Ore chute, Ore shoot, Cross-cut, Vein, Sub level, Load
1.2 Explain the term Mine Development with respect to Metal mine
1.3 Explain the division of ore body along the dip by levels or horizons
1.4 Explain the division of ore body along the strike by raises and winzes
1.5 Explain the factors considered for selection of level intervals
1.6 List the purposes of driving ore drives, winzes, raises and haulage inclines
1.7 Define the term shaft station and mention its purpose
1.8 List the purposes of ore pass, ore bin and ore chute
1.9 List the application, merits and demerits of tunnel boring method
1.10 Explain the method of drivage with tunnel boring machine with sketch
234
2.0 Raising methods
2.1 Define the terms up-reaming, down reaming and drop raising with sketches
2.2 List the conventional methods of raising (open and compartmental)
2.3 Explain the open raising method with sketch and state its applicability
2.4 Explain the two compartmental raising method with sketch and state its applicability
2.5 Explain the three compartmental raising method with sketch and state its applicability
2.6 State the merits and demerits of open raising
2.7 State the merits and demerits of two compartmental raising
2.8 State the merits and demerits of three compartmental raising
2.9 List the mechanised methods of raising (Swedish ladder, Jora raising, Alimak climber, long hole
drilling, raise boring)
2.10 Explain the Jora- hoist raise method, Alimak raising method with sketch and state its applicability
2.11 Explain the long hole raising method with sketch and state its applicability
2.12 List the applicability of raise boring
3.0 Stoping Methods
3.1 Explain the term ‘Stoping’

3.2 List the different preparatory arrangements for stoping
3.3 Give the classification of Stoping methods
3.4 List the factors governing the selection of Stoping methods
3.5 Explain the method of Breast stoping with a sketch
3.6 Mentions applicability, merits, demerits and limitations of Breast stoping
3.7 Explain the method underhand stopping systems with a sketch
3.8 Mentions applicability, merits, demerits and limitations of underhand stoping
3.9 Explain the method of overhand stoping with sketch
3.10 Mentions applicability, merits, demerits and limitations of overhand stoping
3.11 Compare Under hand stoping with Overhand stoping method
4.0Advanced Stoping Methods
4.1 Explain the method Open stoping

4.2 List applicability, merits, demerits and limitations of open method of stoping
4.3 Sketch and explain Cut and fill stoping
4.4 List applicability, merits, demerits and limitations of Cut and fill method of stoping
4.5 Explain the method of Shrinkage stoping with a sketch
4.6 List applicability, merits, demerits and limitations of Shrinkage stoping
4.7 Explain the method of Sub-level stoping with a sketch
4.8 List the applicability, merits, demerits and limitations of Sub-level stoping.
4.9 Explain the method of VCR method with sketch, its applicability, merits, demerits and limitations
4.10 List the caving methods used in metal mining
4.11 List the applicabilities of different caving methods used in metal mining
4.12 Compare Coal Mining with Metal Mining
235
5.0 Sampling Methods
5.1 Define the term Sampling and state its objectives

5.2 List the mining situations under which samplings are employed
5.3 Classifies sampling methods basing on method of collections (Channel sampling, Chip sampling, Bulk
sampling)
5.4 Explain channel sampling and state its applicability
5.5 Explain chip sampling and state its applicability
5.6 Explain Bulk sampling and state its applicability
5.7 Define the terms Core drill sampling, Radio metric sampling, Stope sampling, Conveyor sampling,
Wagon sampling, Truck sampling
5.8 Explain the technique of coning and quartering with sketch
5.9 State the purpose and application of coning and quartering
5.10 Explain the term salting and list its preventive measures
5.11 Define the terms Assaying, Assay value, Assay plan, Assay average
5.12 List the objectives of Assay plans and details to be shown on Assay plans
6.0 Deep mining – Problems
6.1 Define the term Deep mining and list the difficulties associated with it.
6.2 Define the terms a) Vapour pressure, b) Saturation deficit, c) Relative humidity, d) Dew point, e)
Specific humidity, f) Mixing ratio, g) Absolute humidity
6.3 List the difficulties associated with strata control in deep mines
6.4 Explain the adverse effects of heat and humidity in deep workings.
6.5 List the effects of dust and state the remedial measures for effects of dust.
6.6 List the difficulties associated with strata control in deep mines.
6.7 Define rock burst, the causes and preventive measures of rock burst
6.8 List the causes for raise of body temperature
6.9 Define the term heat stroke, causes ,effects of heat stroke and treatment of a person effected with
heat stroke
6.10 Explain the changes in cardio vascular system of the miners due to raise of temperature and list its
effects
6.11 Explain the changes in water chloride metabolism of the miners due to raise of temperature
6.12 List the causes of mental fatigue and falling of working efficiency in deep mines
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Metal Mining – Basics and Development

Metal mining terminology – definitions – mine development – division of ore body along dip and
strike – factors for level interval – drives, winzes, raises and haulage inclines – shaft station – ore
pass – ore bin – ore chute – tunnel boring – applications, merits and demerits
2.0 Raising methods

Up-reaming, down reaming and drop raising - conventional methods of raising - applicability - open
raising – two compartmental and three compartmental raising method- applicability - merits -
demerits - mechanised methods of raising- -Jora raising - Alimak raise climber - applicability - Long
hole raising method-reaming – applicability – raise boring applicabilities
236
3.0 Stoping Methods
Stoping- preparatory arrangements stope development - classifications of Stoping methods- factors
governing the selection of stoping methods. Classification of stoping methods with respect to its
attack - Breast stoping with a sketch- applicability- merits - demerits - method underhand stopping
with a sketch- Applicability - merits -demerits - limitations - method of Overhand stoping with
sketch- Applicability - limitations –merits-demerits-Comparison
4.0 Advanced Stoping Methods

Open stopes - applicability, merits demerits and limitations - Cut and fill stoping - applicability -
merits –demerits-limitations - Shrinkage - Applicability - merits – demerits-limitations - Sub-level
stoping – applicability – merits – demerits - limitations - vertical crater method – Applicability –
merits – demerits – limitations - caving methods - applicability - comparison between coal Mining
and Metal Mining
5.0 Sampling Methods

Sampling- objectives - Mining situations - classification- channel sampling - Applicability - chip
sampling- Applicability - Bulk sampling- Applicability different definitions - technique of coning and
quartering - purpose – application- salting- preventive measures – Assaying- Assay value- Assay plan-
Assay average- objectives of Assay plans- details shown on Assay plans
6.0 Deep mining – Problems

Deep mining – difficulties associated – Heat and humidity and dust in deep mines – effects and
remedial measures – difficulties with strata control – rock burst – causes and preventive measures –
raise in body temperature – causes – heat stroke – causes, effects and treatment – change in
cardiovascular system – water chloride metabolism – mental fatigue and fall of working efficiency. a)
Vapour pressure, b) Saturation deficit, c) Relative humidity, d) Dew point, e) Specific humidity, f)
Mixing ratio, g) Absolute humidity
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Elements of mining Technology Vol 2 : D.J.DESHMUKH

2. Metalliferous Mining Methods : Y.P.CHACHARKAR
3. S.M.E hand book : Vol 1,2,3
4. Mining Engineers Hand Book : Peele. Vol 1,2
5. Rock Mechanics : VARMA.
237
Blue Print of a Question Paper:

CO’s
Chapter Name Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Metal Mining –
1 Basics and 10 11 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO1
Development
2 Raising methods 14 14 - 3 8 - 1 1 - CO2,CO3
3 Stoping Methods 14 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 - CO2,CO3
Advanced Stoping
4 15 6 3 3 1 1 - CO2,CO3
Methods
5 Sampling Methods 12 11 - 3 8 - 1 1 - CO3
Deep mining –
6 10 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 - CO4
Problems
10 10 1 CO2
from any chapters
TOTAL 75 80 12 18 50 - 4 6 6 -
238

Fourth semester :: MNG-402 Underground Metal Mining Methods
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) The purposes of ore chute is to transport ore

(b) Swedish ladder is mechanised method of raising
(c) Vertical distance between two levels is known as ___________ (CO3)
(d) A road way is driven from lower level to upper level is called___________ (CO2)
2. Define the term shaft station and mention its purpose (CO1)
3.Define the terms a) Foot wall b) Hanging wall (CO1)
4. State the merits and demerits of two compartmental raising (CO2)
5. Classify the Stoping methods (CO3)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A) Explain the term Mine Development with respect to Metal mine (CO1)
(OR)
(B) Explain the division of ore body along the strike by raises and winze (CO1)
7. (A) Explain the open raising method with sketch and state its applicability (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Explain the long hole raising method with sketch and state its applicability (CO2)
8. (A) List the factors governing the selection of Stoping methods (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain the method of Breast stoping with a sketch (CO3)
oOo
239

Fourth semester :: MNG-402 Underground Metal Mining Methods
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Samples are also collected at the time of actual mining operations called stope sampling
(b) Average rate of drilling per stoper per shift is 70-90 drill holes
(c) Roof collapses before normal time is known as ___________ (CO3)
(d) The depth of mine workings more than __________ meters deep such workings called deep mines
(CO2)
2. List merits and demerits of Breast stoping (CO1)
3. List merits and demerits of open stoping method (CO1)
4. List the objectives of Assay plans (CO2)
5. List the difficulties associated with strata control in deep mines (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) Explain the method of Sub-level stoping with a sketch (CO1)

(OR)
(B) Explain the method of Shrinkage stoping with a sketch (CO1)
7. (A) Explain the term salting and list its preventive measures (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Explain the technique of coning and quartering with sketch (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the adverse effects of heat and humidity in deep workings (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain the changes in cardio vascular system of the miners due to raise of temperature (CO3)
oOo
240
C20-MNG-402
D.MNG.E. – IV SEMESTER EXAMINATION
UNDERGROUND METAL MINING METHODS
PART – A
10 X3 = 30
1. Define the terms a) Foot wall b) Crown pillar. (CO1)
2. List the purposes of driving ore drives. (CO2)
3. List the mechanised methods of raising. (CO1)
4. List the different preparatory arrangements for stoping. (CO1)
5. List the factors governing the selection of Stoping methods. (CO2)
6. List applicable conditions of open stoping method. (CO2)
7. List the caving methods used in metal mining. (CO1)
8. Define the terms a) Core drill sampling b) Radio metric sampling. (CO1)
9. List the difficulties associated with strata control in deep mines. (CO3)
10. List the causes of falling of working efficiency in deep mines. (CO4)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Explain the method of drivage with tunnel boring with sketch. (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain the term Mine Development with respect to metal mine. (CO2)
12. A) Explain the two compartmental raising method with sketch and state its applicability.(CO5)
(OR)
B) Explain the Jora raise method with sketch and state its applicability. (CO5)
13. A) Explain the method of overhand stoping with sketch (CO5)

(OR)
B) Explain the term stoping and list the different preparatory arrangements for stoping. (CO2)
14. A) Explain the technique of coning and quartering with sketch. (CO3)
(OR)
B) Explain the term salting and list its preventive measures. (CO2)
15. A) Explain the treatment of heat stroke persons. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the adverse effects of heat and humidity in deep workings. (CO3)
PART – C
Instructions: Part C consists of 1 question which carries 10 marks. 1X 10 = 10
16. Where the vertical crater retreating method applicable? Explain the VCR method with a sketch.
(CO5)
***
241
MINE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
Course No of periods / Total no of Marks for

Course Title Marks for SA
MNG-403 Mine Environmental 04 60 20 80

Engineering
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. Major Topics Periods Mapping CO’s
Introduction and Systems

1 08 CO1, CO2
of Ventilation
2 Mechanical Ventilation 10 CO1,CO4,CO5
3 Distribution of Mine Air 15 CO2, CO3
4 Auxiliary Ventilation 07 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5
5 Ventilation survey 10 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5
6 Mine Gases 10 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5
Total 60

Explain the systems of ventilation
Course Objectives Analyze distribution of mine air
Describe auxiliary ventilation,
Familiarize ventilation survey and mine gases
Course Outcomes CO1 Explain Basic concepts of ventilation systems
CO2 Familiarize various devices used for the distribution of ventilation
CO3 Describe Various laws of ventilation , auxiliary ventilation systems
CO4 Explain the essence of ventilation survey
CO5 Analysis of variation of overall resistance of the mine using various

ventilation devices
242
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: MNG-403 Course Title: Mine Environmental Engineering No of Periods: 60

CO Periods
PO No Remarks
CO no Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2, 30 50 3 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO 2 CO2,CO3 10 16.6 1
PO 3 CO3,CO4 10 16.6 1 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately Addressed
PO 4 CO5 10 16.6 1
PO 5
PO 6
<5% Not addressed
PO 7
CO1 3 1
CO2 3 1 1 1
CO3 1 1 2
CO4 1 1
CO5 1 1
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course, student shall be able to
1.0 Introduction and systems of ventilation

1.1 Define the term Ventilation, purpose of ventilation, various ventilation systems used in
Mines
1.2 Define Natural ventilating pressure, Motive column
1.3. Define the terms down cast and up cast shafts with sketches
1.4 List the conditions suitable for N.V
1.5 List the factors influencing the production of N.V.P
1.6 Applies the formula to determine the height of motive column, NVP
1.7 Converts height of motive column into pressure and vice versa
1.8 List the Limitations N.V.
1.9 Explain the terms-Natural ventilation system
1.10 Solve the numerical problems related to N.V.P and Motive column
2.0 Mechanical Ventilation

2.1 Define the term mechanical ventilation
2.2 Classifies the mechanical ventilation fans basing on the principle of working, location, forcing
or exhausting.
2.3 Classifies the Centrifugal fans basing on the direction of bent of blades.
2.4 Explain the principle of working of Centrifugal Fan, air screw fan and their merits and
demerits
243
2.5 Describe the constructional details of backward bladed centrifugal fan and function of each
part and drive.
2.6 Explain the reasons for preferring backward bladed fan over others
2.7 List the methods of controlling the quantity of air delivered by the Fan
2.8 Compares Air Screw Fan with centrifugal Fan
2.9 Define the laws of mechanical ventilation
2.10 Define the terms Manometric efficiency, theoretical depression, effective depression,
mechanical efficiency and over-all efficiency of mine fan and formula for each of them
2.11 Solve the numerical problems for each of the above
2.12 Compares between forcing Vs exhaust fans
2.13 List the factors for selection of fan for given mine conditions
3.0 Understand the distribution of mine air

3.1 Explain the distribution of mine air, purpose.
3.2 List the ventilation devices used for coursing the air current – Brattices, stopping’s, doors,
regulators, air crossing. Explain the construction, location, field of application of each of the
above devices Explain the effects of regulator on mine ventilation system.
3.3 Explain the accessional and declensional Ventilation systems, merits and demerits
3.4 Explain the Homotropal and Antitropal Ventilation
3.5 State the purpose of air lock, location of installation, sources of leakage of air in a mine,
preventive measures of leakage of air
3.6 State the laws of mine air friction
3.7 Explain the mine air friction and list the factors affecting the mine air friction
3.8 Define the term “Equivalent Orifice”, formula for Equivalent orifice, corresponding numerical
problems
3.9 State the laws and Atkinson’s Equation to determine the pressure required to overcome the
friction to the air passage in a mine road way. Relation between pressure, quantity,
resistance of mine.
3.10 Enumerates the methods of reducing the mine air resistance
3.11 Explain the effects of mine air ways in series and parallel
3.12 State formula for total resistance in series and parallel
3.13 Explain the splitting of air with sketch, merits of splitting of air, ideal conditions of splitting,
limitations
3.14 Simple problem to calculate effective resistance when roadways connected in series, parallel
and due to splitting, change in ventilation pressure and Quantity
4.0 Understand the necessity of Auxiliary ventilation

4.0 Explain the Auxiliary ventilation
4.1 List the Conditions requiring auxiliary ventilation system.
4.2 List the different methods of arranging auxiliary ventilation
4.3 Explain the different methods of arranging auxiliary ventilation systems with sketches
4.4 Explain the location of auxiliary fans
4.5 List the precautions in installing auxiliary fans
4.6 Applies the system of auxiliary ventilation under the following situations
a) Single Heading
i) With Brattice cloth
ii) With Ducting
c) Double Heading
4.7 State the necessity of Booster fans in underground mines.
4.8 Define the term Booster Fan, conditions requiring the use of Booster Fan
244
4.9 List the factors to be consider for location of Booster fans
4.10 Define the term Neutral line, effects of installation of Booster Fans
4.11 Explain ventilation system in Long wall face
4.12 Simple numerical problem on change in resistance, pressure and Quantity with the
installation of booster fan
5.0 Know the ventilation survey

5.1 Define the ventilation survey , objectives of ventilation survey, pressure survey
5.2 List the different components of ventilation survey
5.3 Explain the different methods of conducting pressure survey
5.4 List the equipment required for ventilation survey, precautions for accurate work
5.5 Explain the objectives of quantity survey and methods of quantity survey
5.6 Sketch and Explain the instruments required for quantity survey and qualitative survey
5.7 Determines the quantity of Air Flow in Mine Air Way by ventilation survey
5.8 Explain the term Ventilation Efficiency Quotient (VEQ)
5.9 Explain the objects of qualitative survey
5.10 List the different components of qualitative survey
5.11 Explain the term Kata Factor
5.12 Determines cooling power of Mine Air with help of Kata Thermometer
6.0 Knows different Mine gases

6.1 State the composition of surface air and mine air.
6.2 List the reasons for changes in the composition of air while passing through mine workings.
6.3 Give the classification of mine gases
6.4 List the poisonous , noxious and inflammable gases
6.5 State the occurrence and mention the chemical, physical and physiological effects of
poisonous, noxious and inflammable gases.
6.6 Explain the purpose of flame safety lamp.
6.7 Explain the principle of safety lamp-wire gauge principle
6.8 Describe the constructional details of flame safety lamp.
6.9 Explain the accumulation and percentage tests conducted with flame safety lamp
6.10 List different detectors used for detecting poisonous, noxious and inflammable gases
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction and Systems of ventilation

Know the Ventilation- purpose- types-Down cast and up cast shafts-Natural ventilation and Mechanical
Ventilation-Conditions suitable for Natural Ventilation, factors influencing the production of Natural
ventilation-Definition of N.V.P and motive column and their derivations and its applications in related
calculations limitations of N.V.P
2. Mechanical Ventilation
Classification of Mechanical ventilation, classification of centrifugal fan, constructional details of
backward bladed fan Principle of working off air screw fan controlling the quantity of air delivered,
fittings of mine fan, loss relating to quantity water gauge etc.-Definition of terms – Manometric
efficiency, theoretical depression, effective depression, mechanical efficiency, overall efficiency, Factors
for selection of mine fans.
245
3. Distribution of mine air
Objects of distribution and coursing the air, ventilation devices – its construction, location, application
regulators- Ascentional- Descensional ventilation Homotropal and Antitropal ventilation systems,
leakage of air, air lock, computer basis analysis of mine air distribution.
4. Auxiliary ventilation and booster ventilation

Auxiliary ventilation methods, conditions required for the system and different methods location of
auxiliary fan Booster fan location, neutral line, effects of installation off booster fans.
5. Ventilation survey
Objectives of ventilation survey, different methods of pressure, quality, quantity surveys – precautions,
accessories etc., Kata thermo meter.
6. Mine Gases
Atmospheric and mine air – composition, changes, reasons Classification of mine –poisonous,
inflammable and noxious, their physical and chemical properties physiological effects, occurrence.
Testing for the presence of mine gases, flames safety lamp-Principle constructional details, transfer of
heat in the lamp, Accumulation and percentage tests- Listing of detectors.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Elements of mining, Vol. 2 : D.J.Deshmukh

2. Mine Ventilation, Vol. 1 & 2 : S.Ghatak
3. Mine ventilation : G.B.Mishra
4. Fines in coal seams : L.C.Kaku
5. Ventilation problems : LC Kaku
6. Mine fires explosions recovery, inundation : M.A.Ramulu
7. Mine ventilation : Hartman
246

S. Periods Weightage Distribution of Distribution of CO’s
Chapter Name
No Allocated Allocated Weightage Weightage Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Introduction and
CO1,
1 Systems of 08 9 03 03 03 - 01 01 01 -
CO2, CO5
Ventilation
Mechanical CO1,
2 10 11 03 - 08 01 01
Ventilation CO4, CO5
Distribution of
3 15 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO3
Mine Air
Auxiliary CO1,
4 07 11 03 08 01 01
Ventilation C02, CO5
Ventilation
5 10 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO4, CO5
survey
6 Mine Gases 10 11 03 08 01 01
10 10 01 CO4
from any chapters
TOTAL 60 80 18 09 35 18 06 03 05 02
247

Fourth semester :: MNG-403 Mine Environmental Engineering
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Ventilation means conditioning and distribution of air into mines

(b) Ventilation doors are used on these roads, which do not require ventilation.
(c) Mine airshould not contain less than ___________% of Oxygen (02 ) (CO3)
(d) Centrifugal fans weighs 40 to 60 % more than the ___________ fans. (CO2)
2. List the factors influencing the production of N.V.P (CO2)
3. Classifies the Centrifugal fans basing on the direction of bent of blades (CO2)
4. Compare Air Screw Fan with centrifugal Fan (CO2)
5. List the ventilation devices used for coursing the air current (CO3)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A) Explain the terms-Natural ventilation system (CO1)

(OR)
(B) List the conditions suitable for Natural ventilation system (CO2)
7. (A) Describe the constructional details of backward bladed centrifugal fan (CO3)
(OR)
(B) List the factors for selection of fan for given mine conditions (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the accessional and declensional Ventilation systems (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Explain the effects of mine air ways in series and parallel (CO3)
oOo
248

Fourth semester :: MNG-403 Mine Environmental Engineering
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) If the firedamp content in general body of return air of a ventilating district exceeds 0.75٪ the
ventilation is considered to be inadequate
(b) Damp is derived from German word
(c) The mixture of gases together is called ___________ (CO3)
(d) The auxiliary ventilation is possible by the use of __________ (CO2)
2. List the Conditions requiring auxiliary ventilation system (CO1)
3. List the precautions in installing auxiliary fans (CO1)
4. List the different components of ventilation survey (CO2)
5. State the composition of surface air and mine air (CO3)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A) Explain ventilation system in Long wall face (CO1)

(OR)
(B) Explain the location of auxiliary fans (CO4)
7. (A) Explain the different methods of conducting pressure survey (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Determines cooling power of Mine Air with help of Kata Thermometer (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the principle of safety lamp-wire gauge principle (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Describe the constructional details of flame safety lamp (CO5)
oOo
249
C-20-MNG-403

MINE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING
PART – A
Instructions: Part A consists of 10 questions. Answer all questions and each question carries three
marks. 10 X3 = 30
1. List the various ventilation systems used in Mines (CO1)
2. Compares Air Screw Fan with centrifugal Fan (CO4)
3. Define the terms down cast and up cast shafts with sketches (CO1)
4. List the Limitations N.V (CO2)
5. List the ventilation devices used for coursing the air current (CO1)
6. List the merits of splitting air (CO1)
7. List the Conditions requiring auxiliary ventilation system (CO2)
8. Define the ventilation survey (CO1)
9. List the equipment required for qualitative survey (CO1)
10. State the composition of surface air and mine air (CO1)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Describe the constructional details of backward bladed centrifugal fan and function of each part
and drive (CO2)
(OR)
B) Describe the constructional details, functions of each part and drive of air screw fan (CO2)
12. A) Explain the mine air friction and list the factors effecting the mine air friction (CO3)
(OR)
B) Explain the splitting of air with sketch (CO5)
13. A) Explain ventilation system in Long wall face (CO2)

(OR)
B) Explain the location of auxiliary fans (CO4)
14. A) Sketch and Explain the instruments required for quantity survey (CO3)
(OR)
B) Determines cooling power of Mine Air with help of Kata Thermometer (CO2)
15. A) Explain the accumulation and percentage tests conducted with flame safety lamp (CO5)
(OR)
B) Explain the principle of safety lamp-wire gauge principle (CO4)
PART – C
16. State the Atkinson’s Equation to determine the pressure required to overcome the friction to the air
passage in a mine road way. (CO3)
***
250
MINING MACHINERY – I
MNG-404 Mining Machinery - I 04 60 20 80
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Wire ropes 10 CO1,CO2
2 Rope Capping 10 CO2,CO3, CO4
Transportation in Mines -
3 15 CO2,CO3, CO4
Rope Haulages
Transportation in Mines -
4 Conveyors , Locomotives 10 CO3, CO4
and aerial rope ways
5 Mine Pumps 15 CO2,CO3, CO4
Total 60

- Explain the wire ropes, construction, method of manufacture of wire ropes.
- Familiarize the methods of capping, recapping, splicing. Field application of
Course different types rope capel used in mining
Objectives - Familiarize the transportation systems used in underground mines,
Types of haulage systems, Conveyors, Locomotives, Aerial rope ways
- Describe different types of pumps used in underground mines, Constructional
details and principle of working of Centrifugal pumps, Turbine pumps,
CO1 Basic understanding of different types machinery used in mines, such as

underground transportation, wire ropes.
CO2 Explain Constructional details of wire ropes, methods of manufacture of wire
ropes, types of transportation systems used in mines, Mine pumps
CO3 Explain Applicability of different types of wire ropes, capping, re-capping,

Course haulage systems
Outcomes
CO4 Explain Field application of different types of rope capel, Haulages,
Transportation systems, mine pumps
CO5 Simple numerical problems in determination of Factor of safety of ropes,

Power required for different haulage systems, Conveyors, Tractive effort of
locomotive, Safety devices used in Haulages, Conveyors.
251
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: 404 Course Title: Mining Machinery-I No of Periods: 60

CO Periods
PO No Remarks
CO no Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1
PO 2 CO2,CO3 30 50 3 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO 3 CO2 08 13.3 1 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately Addressed
PO 4 CO2,CO3 16 26.6 2 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO 5 CO2 06 10 1 <5% Not addressed
PO 6
PO 7
CO1
CO2 3 1 2 1 2 1 1
CO3 3 2 1 1
CO4
CO5
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Understand the manufacture of mine ropes used in mines

1.1 State the uses of wire ropes in mines
1.2 Classifies wire ropes basing on place of application and construction.
1.3 State the composition of material of wire ropes.
1.4 Explain the field tests to be conducted on wires in rope
1.5 Explain the stages of manufacturing of wires of ropes
1.6 Describe the constructional details of different types of ropes.
1.7 Explain space factor, factor of safety, capacity factor bending factor
1.8 State the applicability of different types of wire ropes in Mining.
1.9 List the causes of deterioration of wire ropes
1.10 List the preventive measures against deterioration of ropes
1.11 State the formulate for finding the size, weight and strength wire ropes
1.12 Solves numerical problems related to the above formulae.
2.0 Know Rope Capping

2.1 Define the terms capping and recapping
2.2 List the different methods of capping the wire ropes
2.3 State the applicability of different capping types.
2.4 Sate the composition of White metal used for capping
2.5 State the temperature and other conditions in which white metal is poured into the capel
2.6 Explain the method of coned socket capping.
2.7 Describe method of interlocking wedge type capping
252
2.8 State the purpose of splicing of wire ropes
2.9 Describe the methods of splicing of wire ropes.
2.10 Mention the care and maintenance of wire ropes.
3.0 Understand methods of rope haulage in underground mines

3.1 State the purpose of transportation in mines and factors governing the selection of various
haulages systems
3.2 Give comprehensive classification of transportation systems in mines
3.3 Explain different methods of transportation by rope haulage in underground
3.4 List the types of rope haulage and applicability of each type of rope haulage
3.5 Describe the direct rope haulage system, advantages , dis-advantages and safety devices
used
3.6 Describe the endless rope haulage system including safety devices used, advantages and
disadvantages.
3.7 Explain over-rope and under-rope endless system including the applicability
3.8 Describe rope clips commonly used for under rope haulage and over rope haulage
3.9 State the necessity of tensioning arrangements; describe tensioning arrangement for endless
rope haulage
3.10 Describe the main and tail rope haulage system including safety devices used and
advantages, disadvantages
3.11 Explain Gravity rope haulage/Self-acting incline rope haulage, and advantages ,
disadvantages
3.12 Simple numerical problems in determination of capacity of tubs, HP of motor, number of
tubs.
4.0 Understand transportation in mines by conveyors, Locomotives & Aerial ropeways
4.1 Give the comprehensive classification of conveyors based on their applicability
4.2 Explain the belt conveyors with their tensioning arrangements
4.3 State limitations, merits and demerits of belt conveyor system
4.4 Explain scraper chain conveyor system, merits, de-merits of scraper chain conveyor
4.5 Simple problems to calculate the capacity of belt conveyor
4.6 Classify locomotive haulage systems
4.7 State merits, demerits, applicability and limitations of diesel locomotives system
4.8 Explain exhaust conditioner and flame trap fitted to diesel locomotive
4.9 State merits, demerits, applicability and limitations of battery locomotives system
4.10 Explain trolley wire locomotive, merits, demerits and limitations of trolley wire locomotives
system
4.11 Simple numerical problems in calculation of tractive effort of locomotive
4.12 Classify aerial rope ways, applicability of mono cable, Bi-cable aerial rope way
5.0 Understand various Pumps used in Mines

5.1 Define various terms with regards to pumps a) Pump b) Head c) Static suction head d)
Static discharge head e) Total static head f) Friction head g) Manometric head h) Effective
head i) Internal head j) Hydraulic head k) Water hammer l) End thrust
5.2 Give the comprehensive classification of mine pumps with their applicability
5.3 Explain the principle of working, constructional details of reciprocating pump and purpose of
Air vessel
5.4 Describe the principle of working and constructional details of centrifugal pumps
5.5 Describe the methods of starting and stopping of centrifugal pump
5.6 Explain the constructional details and principle of working of turbine pump
253
5.7 Describe the method of starting and stopping of turbines pump, method of balancing end
thrust using – hydraulic balance disc
5.8 Explain the constructional details/fittings of submersible pump.
5.9 Explain the principle of working and constructional details of mono pump.
5.10 List out the considerations for the selection of pumps.
5.11 List differences between reciprocating pump and centrifugal pump
5.12 Simple numerical problems on calculation of head, capacity and H.P of mine pumps
COURSE CONTENTS:
1.0 Wire Ropes

Usage, classification of wire ropes, applicability of different ropes - selection parameters -
computation of numerical problems on size - Weight and strength of wire ropes
2.0 Rope Capping

Capping and recapping of wire ropes, classification - description of capping methods - splicing
methods, description of splicing
3.0 Transportation in Mines -Rope Haulages

Purpose of transportation, comprehensive classification of transportation - ROPE HAULAGE - direct
Rope Haulage System, merits, demerits and applications - safety
Devices in Direct Rope Haulage system-Endless Rope Haulage System, merits, demerits and
applicability’s safety devices - Laying and maintenance of track- constructional details of mine
tub/car -factors of selection for rope haulage serial rope ways- computation problems for
determination of H.P. rope size breaking strength, Tub capacity, number of tubs.
4.0 Transportation in Mines -Conveyors, Locomotives & Areal Rope ways

Conveyor usage, classification - belt conveyor system, different types of belt constructions, safety
devices merits, demerits and limitations of conveying system - Scraper chain convey or system,
protective devices-merits, demerits and limitation, computation of numerical problems on size of
the conveyor for a given output and computation of motor HP.Classify loco haulage systems, merits,
demerits, applicability of different system – classify aerial roper ways, the applicable conditions of
aerial ropeways.
5.0 Mine Pumps

Pumping - Various terms of pumping, classification of pumps - centrifugal pump fittings - Turbine
pump, fittings – End thrust - submersible pump –fittings merits limitation - Mono Pump-Selection of
pumps - computation of numerical problems on Head, Quantity, H.P. Frictional losses.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Elements of Mining : D.J.Deshmukh Vol.3
2 Mine pumps : Rakesh and Lee
3 Mine pumps : S.Ghattak
4 U.M.S.Volumes : UMS Series
5 Statham series VOL II : Statham
6. Mine transportation : Kerlin
7 Introduction to mining engineering : Hartman
8 Mine winding and Transport : S.C Walker
254
S. Chapter Name Period Weightage Marks Wise Question Wise CO’s

No s Allocated Distribution of Distribution of Mapped
Alloca Weightage Weightage
ted R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Wire ropes 10 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO3
2 Rope Capping 10 11 03 08 01 01 CO2
Transportation in
3 Mines -Rope 15 17 03 06 08 01 02 01 C02
Haulages
Transportation in
Mines -Conveyors ,
4 10 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO3
Locomotives and
aerial rope ways
5 Mine Pumps 15 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO3
Higher order question 10
10 01 CO4
from any chapters
TOTAL 60 80 15 15 40 10 05 05 05 01
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap-Application ;An- Analylising
255

Fourth semester :: MNG-404 Mining Machinery-I
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Splicing is the process of fixing the wire rope to capple

(b) Simple round strand rope is used for winding
(c) Back stay is a safety device used in ___________ (CO2)
(d) Wire drawing is___________ process. (CO2)
2. State the uses of wire ropes in mines (CO1)
3. Classifies wire ropes basing on place of application and construction (CO1)
4. List the different methods of capping the wire ropes (CO2)
5. Classification of transportation systems in mines (CO3)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A)Explain the field tests to be conducted on wires in rope (CO4)

(OR)
(B) Explain the stages of manufacturing of wires of ropes (CO2)
7. (A) Explain the method of coned socket capping (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Describe method of interlocking wedge type capping (CO2)
8. (A) Explain different methods of transportation by rope haulage in underground (CO4)

(OR)
(B) Describe the endless rope haulage system (CO5)
oOo
256

Fourth semester :: MNG-404 Mining Machinery-I
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Loop take up arrangement is used in chain conveyors

(b) Snub pulley is used to increase angle of contact in belt conveyor
(c) The limiting gradient of Locomotive Haulage is ___________ (CO3)
(d) Water colliding with the retreating piston or ram causing violent shock is called_____ (CO4)
2. State the necessity of tensioning arrangements (CO5)
3. Classify locomotive haulage systems (CO2)
4. Define the terms a) Pump b) Head (CO1)
5. write the method of starting and stopping of centrifugal pump (CO5)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A)Describe the main and tail rope haulage system (CO5)

(OR)
(B) Explain Gravity rope haulage/Self-acting incline rope haulage (CO4)
7. (A) Explain the belt conveyors with their tensioning arrangements (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Explain exhaust conditioner and flame trap fitted to diesel locomotive (CO2)
8. (A) Describe the principle of working and constructional details of centrifugal pumps (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Explain the constructional details/fittings of submersible pump (CO2)
oOo
257
C20-MNG-404

MININING MACHINERY-I
PART – A
10X3 = 30
1. State the uses of wire ropes in mines (CO1)
2. List the causes of deterioration of wire ropes (CO2)
3. Define the terms capping and recapping (CO1)
4. List the types of rope haulage (CO1)
5. List advantages and disadvantages of Direct rope haulage (CO1)
6. List various safety devices required in direct rope haulage (CO2)
7. State limitations of belt conveyor system (CO3)
8. Classify aerial rope ways (CO2)
9. Define the terms a) Pump b) Head (CO1)
10. List out the considerations for the selection of pumps (CO2)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Explain the stages of manufacturing of wires of ropes (CO2)

(OR)
B) Describe the constructional details of Simple round strand rope. (CO4)
12. A) Describe method of interlocking wedge capping (CO5)

(OR)
B) Describe the methods of splicing of wire ropes (CO2)
258
13. A) Describe the endless rope haulage system including safety devices used (CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain Gravity rope haulage/Self-acting incline rope haulage (CO3)
14. A) Explain scraper chain conveyor system (CO2)

(OR)
B) State merits, demerits, applicability and limitations of battery locomotives system (CO4)
15. A) Explain the constructional details and fittings of centrifugal pumps (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain the constructional details/fittings of submersible pump (CO2)
PART – C
1X 10 = 10
16. What is water hammering and end thrust?Describe the method of balancing end thrust-hydraulic
balance disc (CO2)
oOo
259
MINE SURVEYING - II

MNG-405 Mine Surveying - II 05 75 20 80
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. Major Topics Periods Mapping of CO’s
1 Theodolite surveying 20 CO1, CO2, CO5

2 Setting out curves 12 CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5
Correlation Survey and 15
3 CO2, CO3, CO4
Triangulation Survey
4 Tacheometry 08 CO3,CO4,CO5
Dip, strike and Fault 10
5 CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
problems
Fundamentals of Advanced 10
6 CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
survey
Total 75

- Describe the theodolite survey, traversing of an area by Theodolite
- Familiarize setting out curves, application of different types of curves in
underground mines.
Course Objectives - Familiarize correlation survey, applicability in underground mines
- Explain the Methods of triangulation survey
- Familiarize tachometry survey
- Computation of dip, strike, fault problems
- Familiarize the basic operations of Total station
CO1 Explain the basic principle of operation of theodolite, setting out curves,
correlation survey, Total station
CO2 Explain the methods of Traversing of given area by Theodolite. Setting out
curves both on surface and in underground, Triangulation survey
Course
CO3 Describe the correlation survey in Mines, Important components of Theodolite,
Outcomes Total station
CO4 Describe the total station surveying
CO5 Solving various numerical problems in Theodolite , Tachemetry, Correlation.
Dip strike and length of cross measure drift problems
260
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: 405 Course Title: Mine Surveying-II No of Periods: 75

CO Periods
PO No Remarks
CO no Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO2,CO3 27 36 2
PO 2 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO 3 CO2,CO3 32 43 3 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately Addressed
PO 4 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO 5 CO2,CO3 16 21 1 <5% Not addressed
PO 6
PO 7
CO1
CO2 2 3 1 1 1 1
CO3 2 3 1 1 1 1
CO4
CO5
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Understand the theodolite survey.

1.1 Describe transit Vernier theodolite., fundamental lines of transit theodolite and relation
between them
1.2 List the Essentials (parts) of a transit theodolite, permanent adjustments of a transit
theodolite
1.3 Define the terms, transiting, swinging face left, face right and changing face as used in
theodolite, index error, centring, telescope normal , telescope vertical
1.4 List methods of measurement of horizontal angles, Describe the repetition and reiteration
methods of measurement of horizontal angle, magnetic bearing of line their applicability
1.5 State the applicability of repetition and reiteration methods the method of measuring
vertical angle.
1.6 List the method of traversing with theodolite and explain continuous Azimuth method,
double foresight method of traverse
1.7 Computes the bearing of the lines of traverse in double foresight method.
1.8 State the checks on the accuracy of angular measurements in closed figures
1.9 Explain the term ‘Permissible error of Closure’ and permissible errors in a) Surface traverse
b) Underground traverse
1.10 Explain the term rectangular co-ordinates and compute latitude, departure from the
traverse.
261
1.11 Solves the problems related with rectangular co-ordinates, calculating the length and
bearing of the closing line of the traverse. Determination of area of closed traverse .
1.12 State the rules for distribution of error of closure. Different methods of distribution of error
of closure, Bowditch rule of balancing the traverse
2.0 Setting Out Curves

2.1 Classifies the curves
2.2 Define simple curve, reverse curve, compound curve, transition curve and vertical curve,
super elevation
2.3 State the elements of simple curve
2.4 List the methods of setting out curve,
2.5 Explain the method of setting out curve by chord and offset method on surface and
underground
2.6 Explain the method of setting out curve by chord and angle Method on surface and
underground
2.7 Explain the method of setting out road way in underground from a main road at a given
bearing (direction)and gradient
3.0 Correlation Survey and Triangulation survey

3.1 Define the term correlation, triangulation survey
3.2 State the purpose of correlation.
3.3 List the different methods of correlation.
3.4 Describe the method of correlation by Direct traversing
3.5 Describe the method of correlation by Co-Planning or Exact alignment method
3.6 Describe the methods of correlation by Weissbach triangle or approximate alignment
method
3.7 State the principle of triangulation survey
3.8 Explain different triangulation schemes
3.9 Explain the method of measuring base line in centenary
3.10 Explain the method of extension of base line
3.11 List the (checks) adjustments for measured angles of a triangle
4.0 Tacheometry
4.1 State the principle of tacheometric Surveying
4.2 List merits and demerits of tacheometric survey
4.3 List the systems of tacheometric survey
4.4 Explain the tacheometric constants
4.5 Explain the stadia method of tacheometric survey
4.6 List the errors in stadia method
4.7 Derives the relation (formula) among stadia reading, horizontal distance and vertical
distances when the line of sight is inclined and the staff is held vertical
4.8 Solve problems for horizontal distances and vertical heights.
5.0 Dip, Strike, Fault problems

5.1 Define the terms (a) Dip (b) True dip (c) Apparent dip (d) Strike (e) Fault.
5.2 State the inter relation between true dip, apparent dip and strike of a mineral bed
5.3 Derives a formula relating them
5.4 Solves the problems relating to them – determines the rate and direction of true dip
or strike of a mineral bed
262
5.5 Solves problems related to strike and fault – calculate the length of drift, passing
through the fault.
5.6 Solves problems basing on bore hole date- Calculates the rate and direction of true
dip of the seam.
5.7 Solves problems connected to cross – measure drift driven between two parallel
seams with given data.
6.0 Knows the fundamentals of advanced surveying

6.1 State the basics of Surveying with Electronic instruments
6.2 State the basic principles of surveying with Electronic instruments
6.3 List the types of EDM instruments.
6.4 Explain the working principle of Electromagnetic distance measuring system.
6.5 State the various applications of remote sensing.
6.6 State the fundamentals of GPS.
6.7 List the applications of GPS in Mining
6.8 List the uses of total station
6.9 List the parts of total station
6.10 State the function of each part of total station
6.11 Explain the procedure for measurement of distance and angle between the given
points using Total station
6.12 Explain the procedure for measurement of area between the given points using Total station
COURSE CONTENTS:
1. Theodolite: Magnetic bearing of lines. Traversing – continuous Azimuth, double fore sight methods
– computation of bearings of traverses check of accuracy in angular measurements – permissible
error – distribution – calculation of latitude and departure – problems on rectangular coordinates –
calculation of areas – Bowditch Rule
2. Setting Curves: Classification – Definitions – elements of simple curve – Method of setting out curves
– by chord and offset, chard and angle.
3. Correlation survey and Triangulation surveying - Purpose – methods of correlation – Direct
Traversing – Co – planning – weisbach Triangle-Definition – Principles – Different triangulation
schemes – Base line measurement – Adjustments – Extension of base line
4. Tacheometry: Principles – systems – Constants Methods – Stadia method, substance method,
Tangential method – merits and demerits of Tachometry – relation between stadia reading,
Horizontal distance, vertical distance, solves problems.
5. Dip, Strike, Fault problems: Definitions of Dip, Strike, Fault, True Dip, Apparent Dip-Relation among
them- Solving the problems relating to them – determines the rate and direction of true dip or
strike of a mineral bed- Solving the problems related to strike and fault – calculate the length of
drift, passing through the fault-Bore whole problems- cross measure drift problems.
6. Fundamentals of advanced survey: basics of Surveying with Electronic instruments- principles of
surveying with Electronic instruments- Essentials- Applications of remote sensing- Fundamentals and
applications of GPS in Mining- Uses and parts of Total station- measurement of angle between the
given points using Total station
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Surveying : S.Ghatak Vol-1,2,3
2. Surveying : Kanetkar&KulkarniVol -1 and Vol-2
3. Surveying : B.C.PunmiaVol- 1,2,3
4. U.M.S. Volumes
263

Periods Weightage Distribution of Distribution of CO’s
S. No Chapter Name
Allocated Allocated Weightage Weightage Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
CO2,
1 Theodolite surveying 20 14 03 03 08 01 01 01
CO3
CO2,
2 Setting out curves 12 14 03 03 08 01 01 01
CO3
Correlation Survey
CO2,
3 and Triangulation 15 14 03 03 08 01 01 01
CO3
Survey
CO2,
4 Tacheometry 08 03 03 01
CO3
Dip, strike and Fault CO2,
5 10 11 03 08 01 01
problems CO3
Fundamentals of CO2,
6 10 14 03 03 08 01 01 01
Advanced survey CO3
10 10 01 CO5
any chapters
TOTAL 75 80 15 15 32 18 05 05 05 01
264

Fourth semester :: MNG-405 MINE SURVEYING-II
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a)Is it necessary to know all the coordinates of the stations to calculate the area of given traverse
(b) Two shafts are required in co-planing method of correlation survey
-- True/False (CO1)
(c) Transition curve is introduced between ___________ (CO3)
(d) The magnetic bearing of the lines can be measured by attaching ____ to the theodolite. (CO2)
2. Define the terms a) transiting b) swinging (CO1)
3. State the applicability of repetition method (CO1)
4. Classifies the curves (CO2)
5. List the different methods of correlation (CO3)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A) Explain continuous Azimuth method (CO5)

(OR)
(B) The following are the notes of an underground traverse:
Line Quadrant bearing Hor. Distance
0
AB N36 14′E 320m
BC N6018′W 420m
0
CD S81 44′E 115m
The coordinates of A are 443.7m south and 186.1m west based on a local origin. Calculate
the coordinates of the station B,C and D and determine the length and bearing of closing line DA
(CO5)
7. (A) Explain the method of setting out curve by chord and offset method on surface (CO4)
(OR)
(B) Explain the method of setting out curve by chord and angle method on surface (CO4)
8. (A) Describe the method of correlation by Direct traversing (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Describe the method of correlation by Co-Planning or Exact alignment method (CO3)
oOo
265

Fourth semester :: MNG-405 MINE SURVEYING-II
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a)EDM means Electronic defense mechanical

(b) UK Defense was developed the GPS
(c) In Tangential Method The Horizontal Distance= ___________ (CO3)
(d) The ratio of the perpendicular to the base is constant in similar isosceles is the principle of__(CO2)
2. List merits and demerits of tacheometric survey (CO4)
3. Define the terms (a) Dip (b) True dip (CO1)
4. List the types of EDM instruments (CO2)
5. List the applications of GPS in Mining (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) Explain the method of measuring base line in centenary (CO4)

(OR)
(B) Explain the tacheometric constants (CO3)
7. (A) A) The apparent dip of a lode, when measured in the direction S350W is 350, and when measured in
the direction S350E, is 470. Calculate the amount and direction of dip of the lode
(CO5)
(OR)
(B) Three boreholes A,B and C supplied the following information of a coal seam
Line Bearing Gradient
0
AB S40 W 1 in 5
AC S350E 1 in 3
Calculate the direction and gradient of the true dip of the coal seam (CO4)
8. (A) Explain the working principle of Electromagnetic distance measuring system (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain the procedure for measurement of area between the given points using Total station
(CO3)
oOo
266
C20-MNG-405

MINE SURVEYING-II
PART – A 10 X3 = 30 Marks
1. List the fundamental lines of a transit theodolite (CO2)

2. State the applicability of repetition and reiteration methods (CO2)
3. Define simple curve, reverse curve (CO1)
4. Classifies the curves (CO4)
5. State the principle of triangulation survey (CO1)
6. Define the term correlation, triangulation survey (CO1)
7. List the systems of tacheometric survey (CO2)
8. Define the terms (a) Dip (b) True dip (CO1)
9. List the types of EDM instruments (CO4)
10. List the parts of total station (CO1)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Describe the continuous Azimuth, method of traverse (CO2)

(OR)
B) Describe the method of measuring vertical angle (CO1)
12. A) Explain the method of setting out curve by chord and angle Method on surface (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the method of setting out curve by chord and offset method in underground (CO1)
13. A) Describe the method of correlation by Direct traversing (CO1)

(OR)
B) Explain the method of measuring base line in centenary (CO1)
267
14. A) The apparent dip of a lode, when measured in the direction S350W is 350, and when measured in
the direction S350E, is 470. Calculate the amount and direction of dip of the lode (CO1)
(OR)
B) Three boreholes A,B and C supplied the following information of a coal seam
Line Bearing Gradient
AB S400W 1 in 5
AC S350E 1 in 3
Calculate the direction and gradient of the true dip of the coal seam (CO1)
15. A) Explain the working principle of Electromagnetic distance measuring system (CO1)
(OR)
B)Explain the procedure for measurement of angle between the given points using Total station
(CO1)
PART – C
1X 10 = 10
16. A tacheometer is set up at B and observations are made to station A and C. The multiplying constant
is 100 and the additive constant is 0.42. The following readings are taken:
Staff Intercept Middle Cross-hair Vertical Angle

To A 0.828 0.963 +24012’
To C 1.077 1.068 +12012’
The instrument height is 1.203 m. The reduced level of A is 118.410 m A.O.D. Determine the R.L.s of
B and C and the horizontal distances AB and BC. (CO1)
***
268
SURFACE MINING

MNG-406 Surface Mining 05 75 20 80
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. of
Major Topics Mapped CO’s
No Periods
1 Surface mining - Basics 15 CO1,CO2,CO4
2 Surface mining - Machinery 20 CO4,CO5
Surface mining – Drilling and
3 15 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5
Blasting
4 Slope stability 15 CO3,CO4,CO5
5 Environment and Ecology 10 CO1,CO4,CO5
Total 75

- Explain the basic operations involved in Surface Mining
- Familiarize the methods of opening the deposits for Surface Mining
Course - Explain various machinery used in opencast mines and their
Objectives applicability in Surface Mining
- Familiarize the Drilling and Blasting operations in Surface Mining
- Analysis of stability of slopes in Overburden dumps as well as pit
slope stability
CO1 Explain Basic terminology involved Surface Mining, machinery

used.
CO2 ExplainVarious operations involved in Surface Mining,
Machinery used , Drilling and blasting operation
CO3 Describe the Operation of various machinery used in Surface
Course Outcomes Mining
CO4 Explain drilling and Blasting operation involved in Surface
mining and Production calculations. Factors influencing the
stability of slope. Study of salient features of EMP, EIA
CO5 Determination of production from Surface Mining, Slope
stability analysis, Importance of EMP.EIA
269
PO-CO Mapping:
Course Code: 406 Course Title: Surface Mining No of Periods: 75

CO Periods
PO No Remarks
CO no Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1 20 29 2 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO2 -
PO3 CO2,CO3,CO4 31 42 3 25 to 40% Level 2 Moderately addressed
PO4 CO4 4 1.0 -
PO5 CO2,CO3 20 28 2 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO6 - - - -
<5% Not addressed
PO7 - - - -
CO1 2 - - - - - - - 1 -
CO2 - - 3 - 2 - - - 1 1
CO3 - - 3 - 2 - - - 1 1
CO4 - - 3 - - - - - - 1
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Surface mining - Basics
1.1 Define the term surface mining and classify its types.
1.2 Define the following terms related to open cast mining with sketches, outcrop, overburden, face,
bench, floor of bench, toe, crust, angle of repose, stripping ratio, Break even stripping ratio, placer
mining, alluvial Mining, strip mining, , slope stability, back filling, box cut, trench cut.
1.3 List the major surface coal and metal mines in India.
1.4 List the different Geo – mining situations under which surface mining is adopted.
1.5 List the different merits, demerits and limitations of surface mining.
1.6 List and explain the different stages of surface mining (vegetation clearance, levelling, formation of
approach roads, formation of benches on OB and coal or mineral, drilling, blasting, loading &
transportation, dumping and back filling operations).
1.7 Explain haul roads and write about the location and design of haul roads.
1.8 Describe curves, super elevation, dividers, berms, drainage system, escape lanes, lighting on haul
roads.
1.9 Define dumps in surface mines and mention the types.
1.10 Explain internal and external dumps.
1.11 Explain safety berms on dumps.
270
2.0 Surface mining - Machinery
2.1 List the different machinery for preparing the ground (dozer, scraper, Ripper, road grader,
compacting equipment like road rollers etc,).
2.2 Classify dozers,scrapers, rippers, road graders and list its applicable conditions.
2.3 Classify and list the applications of HEMM deployed in surface mines (Drills, Excavators, Transport
equipment, Road making equipment etc)
2.4 Classify the types of shovels and list their general components with functions.
2.5 Explain the operation and place of application of Shovels with sketch.
2.6 List and define the operating parameters of shovel (dumping height, cutting height, and dumping
radius, maximum digging radius, bucket fill factor, Swell factor, bucket factor, swing factor, cycle
time, loading time)
2.7 Classify the types of draglines and list their general components with functions
2.8 Explain the operation and place of application of Draglines with sketch.
2.9 Compare shovels with draglines
2.10 List the main components , their functions and place of application of Bucket Wheel Excavator with
a neat sketch
2.11 List the types of Transport system (dumpers, belt conveyors, rails, pipeline transport, high angle sand
witch conveyors and aerial rope ways).
2.12 Explain the general construction of dumper with neat sketch.
2.13 List the applicable conditions, merits and demerits of surface continuous miner, In-pit crusher
technology and spreaders
3.0 Surface mining – Drilling and Blasting
3.1 List and explain different parameters connected to drilling of blast holes.
3.2 List and explain the different pattern of drill holes, based on depth, diameter, spacing and burden of
drill holes.
3.3 List the applications, merits and demerits of vertical, inclined and sub-grade drilling.
3.4 List the blasting tools and accessories used in surface mine blasting.
3.5 Explain the use of nonels, raydets, electric detonators, boosters, detonating cords.
3.6 Explain method of giving connections and firing procedure in surface mines.
3.7 Explain the deck charging /deck loading and its applicability.
3.8 Estimate the charges required for blasting a round.
3.9 Explain the controlled blasting techniques to control fly rocks (muffled blasting), vibrations (cushion
blasting), and sound (chamber blasting).
3.10 Define the term sleeping holes and list the situation for their existence.
3.11 Define the term secondary blasting., methods of secondary blasting
3.12 List the dangers due to blasting practice in surface mines and preventive measures
4.0 Slope stability
4.1 Define slope stability and list the factors influencing the slope stability of a bench.
4.2 Define the terms slope angle, angle of repose, overall slope of bench.
4.3 List and explain types of slope failures.
4.4 List and explain parameters required for slope design.
4.5 List and explain the methods of preventing slope failures.
4.6 State the formula to calculate the factor of safety of bench slope
4.7 Simple numerical problems to calculate the factor of safety of bench slope (Planer failure)
4.8 State the effect of water in bench slope stability
271
5.0 Environment and Ecology
5.1 Define the term Environment

5.2 State the impact on environment due to opencast mining operations
5.3 State and explain the various environmental pollutions (Water, Air, Land Pollutions) due to
mining operations
5.4 Explain the prevention and control of various pollutions ( Water, Air, Land pollutions) due to
mining
5.5 Define the term Ecology and impact on ecology due to Surface Mining operations
5.6 Explain the relation between Environment and Ecology
5.7 State the purpose of EIA (Environmental Impact Assessment)
5.8 Explain the salient features of EIA
5.9 State the necessity of EMP (Environmental Management Plan
5.10 Explain the salient features of EMP
5.11 Define the term “Reclamation”.
5.12 Explain land reclamation operations in Surface Mines
COURSE CONTENTS:
1.0 Surface mining - Basics
Define Surface Mining, different terms used in surface mining - forms of Surface mining – Geo mining
situation under which surface mining adopted - major coal and metal opencasts – Limitations –
merits and demerits – preparation of ground, de-vegetation – clearance – formation of OB benches –
coal benches – drilling – blasting – loading – transportation – back filling- box cut, trench cut, haul
roads dumps- internal and external dumps, safety berms on dumps - dividers, berms, drainage
system, escape lanes on haul roads.
2.0 Surface mining - Machinery

Different machinery for preparing the ground for mining operation, dozer, scraper, ripper, road
grader, classification of dozers - application of dozer in mines.-classification of rippers-- road graders-
application of road grader - classification of road rollers (compacting equipment) - classification of
excavators - types of shovels - components and their functions of shovels - operating parameters of
shovel - define dumping height, cutting height, dumping radius, maximum digging radius, bucket fill
factor, swell factor, bucket factor, swing factor, cycle time, loading time - operation and place of
application of shovels - list types of draglines - Main components and their functions, of dragline -
operation and place of application of dragline - comparison of shovel vs dragline - main components
and their functions, of bucket wheel excavator - operation and place of application of bucket wheel
excavator- applicable conditions, merits and demerits of surface miner
3.0 Surface mining – Drilling and Blasting
Classify drill holes – vertical inclined drilling – merits – demerits – various parameters for drill blast
holes – drill patterns – application estimation of charges for blasting round of holes – blasting tools
for shot firing procedure - patterns - transportation, storage, charging of bulk explosives - use of
accessories such are nonels, electronic detonators, boosters, detonating cords-- methods of giving
connection and firing procedure -deck charging and its applicability - controlled blasting
272
techniquesto control of fly rocks, vibrations sound, dust generation - muffled blasting, cushion
blasting - chamber blasting and deck blasting and their applicability - Secondary Blasting-Pop
shooting, plaster blasting -Dangers due to blasting practice in open cast mines--preventive measures
due to blasting practice in open cast mines.
4.0 Slope stability
Slope stability and Factors influencing the slope stability of a bench - Define the terms: Slope angle,
Angle of Repose, Over all slope of bench - Simple numerical problems to calculate the overall slope
of the bench -Types of slope failures - Parameters required for slope design - Methods of preventing
slope failures - Formula to calculate the factor of safety of bench slope - Simple numerical problems
to calculate the factor of safety of bench slope
5.0 Environment and Ecology :
Definition- Impact on environment due to opencast mining operations - Various environment

pollutions (water, air, land pollutions) due to mining operations - Prevention and control of various
environment pollutions (water, air, land pollutions) due to mining operations –Ecology and impact
on ecology due to OC Mining operations - Relationship between Environment & Ecology- EIA
(Environmental Impact Assessment) - EMP land Reclamation operations in opencast mines
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Surfacing Mining : G.B.Mishra

2. Blasting in Mines : Samir Kumar Das
3. Surfacing Mining : Samir Kumar Das
4. Mine Management : S. Ghattak
5. Heavy earth mining Machinery : Amitosh de
6. Principles & practices of coal mining : R.D.Singh
273

CO’s
Chapter Name Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Surface mining -
1 15 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO1,CO3
Basics
Surface mining -
2 20 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO3
Machinery
Surface mining –
3 15 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO2
Drilling & Blasting
4 Slope stability 15 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO3,CO4
Environment and CO1,CO4,C
5 10 14 3 3 8 1 1 1
Ecology O5
10 10 1 CO3
from any chapters
TOTAL 75 80 15 15 16 34 5 5 2 4
274

Fourth semester :: MNG-406 Surface Mining
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a)Leaching is the chemical extraction of metals

(b) What is the extension of a box cut known as Trench Cut
(c) Maximum height of the mineral bench is ___________ (CO3)
(d)Usually in the soft strata the blast hole length can be taken ___________. (CO2)
2.Define the terms a) face b) bench (CO1)
3. List the different machinery for preparing the ground (CO1)
4. List the applications, merits and demerits of sub-grade drilling (CO2)
5. Classify the types of shovels (CO3)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A) List the major surface coal and metal mines in India (CO1)
(OR)
(B) List the different Geo – mining situations under which surface mining is adopted (CO1)
7. (A) Explain the operation and place of application of Draglines with sketch (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Explain the general construction of dumper with neat sketch (CO2)
8. (A) Explain different parameters connected to drilling of blast holes (CO2)

(OR)
(B)Explain the use of nonels, raydets, electric detonators (CO3)
oOo
275

Fourth semester :: MNG-406 Surface Mining
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Rope shovel machine is rugged and used in hard ore

(b) EMP means Environment Management Project
(c) Place of application of dozer is ___________ (CO3)
(d) Bucket Wheel Excavator boom can be moved up and down by ___________about the horizontal axis
(CO2)
2. Define the term secondary blasting (CO1)
3. Define the terms slope angle, angle of repose (CO1)
4. Define the term Environment (CO2)
5. State the purpose of EIA (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) Explain method of giving connections and firing procedure in surface mines (CO1)
(OR)
(B) Explain the deck charging /deck loading and its applicability (CO1)
7. (A) Explain parameters required for slope design (CO3)

(OR)
(B) Explain the methods of preventing slope failures (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the prevention and control of various pollutions (Water, Air, Land pollutions) due to mining
(CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain land reclamation operations in Surface Mines (CO3)
oOo
276
C20-MNG-406
SURFACE MINING
PART – A
10 X3 = 30
1. Define the term surface mining and classify its types. (CO1)
2. Describe curves, super elevation. (CO1)
3. List the different merits of surface mining. (CO1)
4. List the different machinery for preparing the ground. (CO1)
5. Classify the types of draglines. (CO1)
6. List the types of transport systems used in surface mining. (CO1)
7. Define the term sleeping holes and list the situation for their existence. (CO1)
8. List the blasting tools and accessories used in surface mine blasting. (CO1)
9. List the factors influencing the slope stability of a bench. (CO1)
10. Define the terms a) slope angle b) angle of repose. (CO1)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Explain haul roads and write about the location and design of haul roads. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain internal and external dumps. (CO1)
12. A) Explain the operation and place of application of Shovels with sketch. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Classify and list the applications of HEMM deployed in surface mines. (CO1)
13. A) List and explain different parameters connected to drilling of blast holes (CO1) .
(OR)
B) Explain the methods of secondary blasting. (CO1)
14. A) Explain method of giving connections and firing procedure in surface mines. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Estimate the charges required for blasting a round. (CO1)
15. A) List and explain parameters required for slope design. (CO1)
(OR)
B) List and explain types of slope failures. (CO1)
PART – C
1X 10 = 10
16. Explain the operation and place of application of Bucket wheel Excavator with sketch. (CO1)
oOo
277
MINE ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY PRACTICE

Mine Environmental
MNG-407 Engineering Laboratory 03 45 40 60
Practice
TIME SCHEDULE
1. Flame Safety Lamp and Gas Detectors 15 CO1,CO2,CO4,CO5
2. Coursing of air with ventilation devices 15 CO1,CO2,CO3, CO4,CO5
3. Rescue and Reviving apparatus 15 CO1,CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5
Total 45

- To familiarise various components of Flame safety lamp
- Explain various detectors used in underground mines and their
Course applicability
Objectives - Familiarise various devices used in Ventilation
- Explain principle of operation various Rescue apparatus used in mines
- Familiarise various Rescue and Reviving apparatus
CO1 Describe Flame safety lamp, gas detectors and rescue apparatus
CO2 Explain precise operations with flame safety lamp, gas detectors and
rescue operation
Course Outcomes CO3 Observe various parameters, their variations and graphically
represent the same
CO4 Explain coursing of the air with various ventilation devices
CO5 Determine the percentage of different gases
278
PO-CO Mapping
Course Title: Mine Environmental Engineering

Course Code: MNG-407 No of Periods: 45
Laboratory Practice
CO Periods
PO No Remarks
no in Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3 15 33.3 2 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO2 CO1,CO3,CO4 10 22.2 1
PO3 CO2 10 22.2 1 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
PO4 CO2 10 22.2 1 Addressed
PO5 - - - -
PO6 - - - -
CO1 2 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
CO2 2 - 1 1 - - - 2 1 -
CO3 2 1 - - - - - 1 1 -
CO4 - 1 - - - - - 1 - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
Learning Outcomes
1.0 Flame Safety Lamp and Gas Detectors

1.1 Identifies and sketches the parts of flame safety lamp
1.2 Dissembles and assembles the flame safety lamp
1.3 Tests for the presence of inflammable gas accumulation and percentage of tests.
1.4 Sketches the size and shape of the gas caps with varying percentages of inflammable gas
1.5 Determines the percentage of methane using Methanometer
1.7 Determines the percentage of CO using CO Detectors (chemicals)
1.8 Determines the percentage of other gases using multi-gas detectors
2.0 Coursing of air with ventilation devices

2.1 Sketches the ventilation devices
2.3 Conducts the ventilation survey for quantity of air using Anemometer, Velometer, Smoke
test, Pitot tube
2.4 Conducts the ventilation survey for pressure using inclined manometer
2.5 Determines the ventilation efficiency quotient (VEQ)
2.6 Conducts the qualitative survey for determining the temperature, relative humidity and
cooling power of air.
2.7 Draws the ventilation plan
279
3.0 Studies various Rescue and Reviving apparatus used in mines
3.1 Identify various rescue and reviving apparatus
3.2 Sketch and study self-contained breathing apparatus
3.3 Sketch and study gas mark
3.4 Sketch and study the self-rescuer used in minus
3.5 Sketch and study the dragger Pulmotor reviving apparatus.
Communication Skills
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks Marks
Code Periods/Week Periods for FA for SA
MNG-408 Communication 3 45 40 60
Skills
No of COs Mapped
S. No. Unit Title Periods
Listening Skills
1 6 CO1
Introducing Oneself
2 3 CO1, CO2, CO3
Short Presentation (JAM)

3 6 CO1, CO2, CO3
Group Discussion
4 6 CO1, CO2, CO3
Preparing Resume with Cover Letter

5 3 CO3
Interview Skills
6 9 CO1, CO2, CO3
Presentation Skills
7 9 CO1, CO2
Work place Etiquette

8 3 CO1, CO2
Total Periods 45
To comprehend the features of communication needed for professional success

and display the use of these competently
Course Objectives To present ideas, opinions in group discussions and presentations on topics of
general and technical interest
To prepare for job selection processes
280
CO1 Interacts in academic and social situations by comprehending what is listened to when
others speak.
CO2 Demonstrates effective English communication skills while presenting ideas, opinions
in group discussions and presentations on topics of general and technical interest.
CO3 Exhibits workplace etiquette relevant in classroom situations for easy adaptation in
professional setting in the future.
CO-PO Matrix
Number Percentage % (1,2,3)
PO1 Not directly applicable for Communication Skills Course however
PO2 interactive activities that use content from science and technology
PO3 relevant to the Programme taken up by the student shall be exploited
PO4 for communication in the Course.
PO5 CO1, CO2, 11 25% >60%: Level 3
CO3
PO6 CO1, CO2, 27 60% 16 -59%: Level 2
CO3
PO7 CO1, CO2, 7 15% Up to 15%: Level 1
CO3

Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7
CO 1   
CO 2   
CO3   
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:

Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following parameters of
communication in the rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence
 Lexical Resource (Vocabulary)
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy
281
*Rubric Descriptors ‘Good/ Competent / Fair /Poor' for Communication
LEVEL OF Fluency and Coherence Lexical Resource Grammatical Range

COMPETENCE (Vocabulary) and Accuracy
Speaks at length without Uses vocabulary Uses a range of complex

noticeable effort or loss of resources flexibly during structures with some
coherence. May demonstrate discussion. Uses flexibility.
language-related hesitation at paraphrase effectively.
times, or some repetition
GOOD
and/or self-correction.
(9-10*)
Uses a range of connectives Uses some less common Mostly produces error-free
and discourse markers with vocabulary and shows sentences.
some flexibility. Articulates some awareness of style
and adapts to near and collocation
naturalization.
Is willing to speak at length, Has enough vocabulary Uses a mix of simple and
though may lose coherence at to discuss topics and complex structures, but
times due to occasional make meaning clear in with limited flexibility.
repetition, self-correction or spite of
COMPETENT
hesitation. inappropriacies.
(6-8)
Uses a range of connectives Generally paraphrases May make mistakes with
and discourse markers but not successfully complex structures though
always appropriately. these rarely cause
comprehension problems.
Tries to maintain a flow of Manages to talk about Produces only basic
speech but t uses repetition, familiar and unfamiliar sentence forms, however,
self correction and/or slow topics but uses errors persist.
speech to keep going. vocabulary with limited
FAIR flexibility.
(3-5) Produces simple speech Attempts to use Uses a limited range of
fluently, but more complex paraphrase but with more complex structures,
communication causes fluency mixed success. but these usually contain
problems. errors and may cause some
comprehension problems
Speaks with long pauses. Uses simple vocabulary Attempts basic sentence
Pauses lengthy before most to convey personal forms but with limited
words. Merely imitates information success, or relies on
apparently memorized
utterances
POOR
Has limited ability to link Has insufficient Makes numerous errors
(0 *-2)
simple sentences vocabulary for less except in memorized
familiar topics expressions
Gives only simple responses Only produces isolated Struggles to produce basic
and is frequently unable to words or memorized sentence forms
convey basic message utterances
s*10 marks to be awarded only if competence level shows flawless expertise in English.
*0 marks to be awarded when student shows incoherence and gives irrelevant responses.
282
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.
Periods Marks allotment for each Student in Mapping of

Marks Wise
Questions based on Allocate the Rubric* COs
S. Distribution
Course Outcomes d for Poor Fair Competent Good
No. of
practica 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-10
Weightage
l work
1 Describe the given CO 2
6 10
object in a minute
Exchange ideas/ views CO1, CO 2
in a group discussion
2 on ________ issue 6 10
(academic, technical
or social )
Present your ideas CO1, CO2,
/opinions on the given CO 3
3 9 10
issue/ topic (individual
to an audience)
Role play an imaginary CO1, CO2,
4 6 10
work-place situation CO 3
Individual interaction CO1, CO2,
with the Examiner CO 3
duly submitting
Resume ( Facing the
5 12 10
Interview) –
Introducing oneself
and answering
questions
*Listen to and CO1, CO2,
comprehend any CO 3
6 6 10
audio communication/
content
TOTAL 45 60
*Listen to and comprehend the given audio content: Giving the Students time to read the questions (Fill in
the Blanks, Select from Alternatives, True or False, Table fill, etc.) in chunks before listening to audio inputs
also played in chunks.
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for Formative Assessment:
Note: Every Question based on CO has to be given marks for the following parameters in the
rubric.
 Fluency and Coherence
 Lexical Resource
 Grammatical Range and Accuracy
283
Periods Marks allotment for each Student in Mapping of
Marks Wise
Questions based on Allocate the Rubric* COs
S. Distribution
Course Outcomes d for Poor Fair Competent Good
No. of
practica 0-2 3-5 6-8 9-10
Weightage
l work
Formative Assessment - 1
Describe the given 10
1 3
object in a minute CO 2
Exchange ideas/ views
2 in a group discussion CO1, CO 2
on ________ issue 6 10
(academic, technical
or social )
Present your ideas
3 /opinions on the given CO1, CO2,
6 10 CO 3
issue/ topic (individual
to an audience)
4
*Listen to and
CO1, CO2,
comprehend any
3 10 CO 3
audio communication/
content
Total 18 40
Formative Assessment -2
Present your ideas
1
/opinions on the given
10
issue/ topic (individual 3
to an audience)
Role play an imaginary CO1, CO2,
2
work-place situation 6 10 CO 3
Individual interaction
with the Examiner
duly submitting CO1, CO2,
3 Resume ( Facing the CO 3
15 10
Interview) –
Introducing oneself
and answering
questions
*Listen to and
comprehend any CO1, CO2,
4 10
audio communication/ 3 CO 3
content
TOTAL 27 40
284
Learning Outcomes
1. Listening Skills:
1.1 Listen to audio content (dialogues, interactions, speeches, short presentations) and
answer questions based on them
1.2 Infer meanings of words / phrases / sentences / after listening to audio content as
mentioned above
2. Introducing Oneself:
2.1 Prepare a grid different aspects for presentation about a person / oneself
2.2 Present a 1 or 2 minute introduction of oneself for an audience
3. Short Presentation:
3.1 Define an object
3.2 Describe an object, phenomenon, event, people
3.3 Speak on a topic randomly chosen
4. Group Discussion:
4.1 Practice Group Discussion. Techniques
4.2 Participate in group discussions
5. Resume Writing and Cover Letter:

5.1 Prepare resumes of different sorts – one’s own and others.
5.2 Write an effective cover letter that goes with a resume
6. Interview Skills:
6.1 Prepare a good Curriculum Vitae
6.2 Exhibit acceptable (Greeting, Thanking, Answering questions with confidence)
7. Presentation Skills:
7.1 Prepare Posters, Charts, PPT’s on issue of general and technical interest
7.2 Present one’s ideas before an audience with confidence using audio visual aids and
answer questions that are raised.
8. Workplace Etiquette:
8.1 Show positive attitude & adaptability / appropriate body language to suit the work
place.
Display basic of etiquette like politeness, good manners
285
MINE SURVEYING PRACTICE - II
Mine Surveying
MNG-409 04 60 40 60
Practice -II
TIME SCHEDULE
1. Theodolite Traversing 36 CO1,CO2,CO5
2. Triangulation 04 CO5
3. Curve setting 08 CO2,CO5
4. Tacheometry 12 CO4,CO5
Total 60

-To familiarise with the Theodolite, various operation of theodolite
-To familiarize with the concepts of triangulation
Course Objectives -To familiarize the methods of curve setting both surface as well as
underground mines
-To familiarize computation of distance using tacheometry
-Hands on experience of various surveying instruments
CO1 Demonstrate various operations of theodolite
CO2 Compute horizontal and vertical angles
Course Outcomes CO3 Compute the distance and elevation for different conditions
CO4 Explain Setting out curves by different methods
CO5 Explain Concept of triangulation
286
PO-CO Mapping
Course Title: Mine Surveying

Practice-II
CO Periods
Mapped with CO addressing PO in Level
PO No Remarks
no Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 - - - -
addressed
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 40 66 3
PO6 - - - -
PO7 CO2 10 17 1
CO1 3 1
CO2 1 3 1 2 1
CO3 1 3
CO4 1 3 1 1
CO5
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Know the parts, functions and uses of Transit theodolite.
1.1 Practices the centering, leveling the theodolite over a station and reads the Vernier.
1.2 Practices the measurement of horizontal angle over a station and reads the Vernier.
1.3 Practices the prolongation of straight line with theodolite.
1.4 Measures the horizontal angle by repetition.
1.5 Measures the horizontal angle by reiteration.
1.6 Practices the measurement of vertical angle.
1.7 Determines the height of pole when its base is inaccessible.
1.8 Conducts traverse survey by direct bearing method.
1.9 Conducts traverse survey by double foresight method
1.10 Plot the traverse by meridian method and rectangular coordinate
2.0 Know the Triangulation
2.1 Carries out Extension of the given base line.
3.0 Know the Curve Setting
3.1 Sets out curve by chord and offset.
3.2 Sets out curve by Chord and Angle.
4.0 Know the Tacheometry survey
4.1 Determines the tacheometric constants.
4.2 Determines the R.L of points by fixed hair method.
4.3 Determines the R.L.s of points by tangential method.
287
MINE PLANNING AND DESIGN LABORATORY PRACTICE
Mine Planning and Design

MNG-410 03 45 40 60
Laboratory Practice
TIME SCHEDULE
Major topics Periods Mapped CO’s

Sl. No
1 Drawing of layouts of underground mine 15 CO1
Drawing of layouts of open cast mine and C02,C04
2 15
blasting design
3 Calculation of output for surface mine 8 CO2,CO5
4 Design of mine transport for surface mine 7 CO4,CO5
Total 45

- To familiarise with the Underground mine layout
- To familiarise with Surface mine layouts
Course Objectives
- Explain various cross sectional plans of a mine
- Output calculation
- To familiarize various systems of mine transportations
Course Outcomes CO1 Salient features of various plans and sections used in mines
CO2 Familiarise Various features of Mine plans
CO3 Explain the systems of transportation of a mine , Estimation of

reserves, life of the mine
CO4 Analyse the features of cross sectional plans
CO5 Determination of production of mine based on the given data
288
PO-CO Mapping
Course Title: Mine Planning and Design
Laboratory Practice
CO Periods
PO No Remarks
CO no Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1,CO3 13 28.8 2
PO2 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO3 CO1,CO3 20 44.4 3 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
addressed
PO4
PO5 <5% Not addressed
PO6 CO1,CO3 12 26.6 2
PO7
CO1 2 3 2 2 1
CO2
CO3 2 3 2 2 1
CO4
CO5
3: High, 2: Moderate, 1: Low
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Draw the layouts of underground mine
1.1 Draw a pit-top & pit Bottom layouts of shaft
1.2 Draw a layout of Development of Bord and Pillar mining using LHD
1.3 Draw a layout of Depillaring by Bord and Pillar by using SDL
1.4 Draw a layout of mechanised long wall advancing by caving/stowing
1.5 Draw a layout of mechanised long wall retreating by caving/stowing
1.6 Draw a layout of mechanised Blasting Gallery method
1.7 Draw a layout of incline slicing by caving/stowing
2.0 Draw the layouts of surface mine and blasting design
2.1 Draw a layout for a surface mine with an output 10,000 tonne/day in a flat deposit. Shovel
dumper combination .Assume required data.
2.2 Explain and draw the Layout of Dragline mining combinations in opencast mines
2.3 Draw the Layout of Bucket wheel excavator combinations in opencast mines
2.4 Draw a layout for a surface coal mine with an output of 1000 tonne /day in a deposit having a
gradient of 4 degree. Assume your own conditions.
2.5 Design of blasting sequence in surface mine.
3.0 Knows Calculate output for surface mine
3.1 Calculation of No. of shovels, dumpers, drills require for given output.
3.2 Calculation of bucket capacity of the shovel, dragline capacity, Bucket wheel excavator
capacity, capacity of the dumper for the above problem.
4.0 Design of Mine transport for surface mine
4.1 Draw the transport layout of haul roads in a mechanised surface mine
4.2 Draw the sketches of the following machinery
a) Shovel b) Bucket wheel excavator c) Surface miner d) Dragline
289
MINING MACHINERY LABORATORY PRACTICE

Mining Machinery Laboratory

MNG-411 03 45 40 60
Practice
TIME SCHEDULE
1. Rope haulage systems - Equipments 20 CO1,CO2,CO5
2. Mine pumps 15 CO3,CO4,CO5
3. Drilling machines and accessories 10 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5
Total 45

- To familiarise with the rope haulage system used in mines
Course Objectives - To familiarise mine pumps
- To familiarise various parts of drilling machine
- Describe various operations of drilling machines
Course CO1 Explain constructional details of different wire ropes

Outcomes
CO2 Describe different haulage system used in underground mines
CO3 Describe the different safety devices used in haulage system
CO4 Explain different drilling machinery used in underground mines
CO5 Explain different types of pumps used in mines
290
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: MNG-411 Course Title: Mining Machinery Laboratory Practice No of Periods: 45
CO Periods
PO No Remarks
CO no Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1 5 11 1 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO3 CO1,CO2,CO3 17 38 2 addressed
PO4 CO1 5 11 1 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO5 - - - -
PO7 - - - -
CO1 1 3 2 1 - - - 2 1 1
CO2 - 3 2 - - - - - 1 1
CO3 - 3 2 - - - - - 1 1
CO4 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
3: High, 2: Moderate,1:Low
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Rope haulage systems - Equipments
1.1 Sketch the direct rope haulage system used in mines and observe the types of motor used, braking
system present in it.
1.2 Sketch the endless rope haulage system used in mines and also sketch various attaching devices
like small man clip
1.3 Sketch the various safety devices used in haulage system.
1.4 Draw the circuit diagram of signalling system used in Haulages
2.0 Mine pumps

2.1 Sketch the reciprocating pump and know about the method of starting and stopping of
reciprocating pump
2.2 Sketch the centrifugal and turbine pump and observe the functioning of balancing disk
3.0 Drilling machines and accessories

3.1 Sketch the electrical coal drill used in mine
3.2 Sketch and know the working of sun and planet gear used in coal drill
3.3 Sketch the different types of drill rods used in mining.
291
V SEMESTER
292
V SEMESTER (THIRD YEAR)
Instruction
period / week Total
Subject Name of the
Period End
(hours) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY
Mine
MNG- Management and 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
501 Entrepreneurship
MNG- Mine Legislation
6 - 90 3 20 80 100
502 and Safety
MNG- Mine Hazards and
5 - 75 3 20 80 100
503 Rescue
MNG- Mining
6 - 90 3 20 80 100
504 machinery-II
Rock Mechanics
MNG-
and Strata 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
505
Control
PRACTICAL
MNG- Practical Training

- 1 7 3 20 30 50
506 * and Assessment
MNG- Rock Mechanics

Laboratory - 3 45 3 40 60 100
507
Practice
MNG-
Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
508
MNG-
CAD Practice - 3 45 3 40 60 100
509
MNG- Total station
- 3 45 3 40 60 100
510 Survey Practice
MNG-
Project Work - 2 38 3 20 30 50
511
TOTAL 27 15 630 300 700 1000
*MNG 506 shall be scheduled for one single day for entire semester while framing the time table for class
work
293
MINE MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Mine Management and

MNG-501 05 75 20 80
Entrepreneurship
TIME SCHEDULE
1 Mine Management 10 CO1, CO2

2 Entrepreneurship 20 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5
Total Quality Management,
3 20 CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5
Recruitments and Training
4 Network analysis 15 CO3,CO4,CO5
5 Smart Technologies 10 CO4, CO5
Total 75
- Familiarise the concepts of management, ownership styles and

organisation structures
- Exposure to organisational behavioural concepts, basics of project
Course Objectives
and operational management
- Familiarize the fundamentals of Total Quality Management (TQM).
- Familiarize recruitment and training
- Explain network analysis and its usage in salvage operation of Mining
machinery
- Describe the necessity and functioning of smart technologies.
CO1 Explain Basic terminology management, entrepreneurship, network

analysis
CO2 Explain total quality management, recruitment and training

Course Outcomes
CO3 Explain network analysis
CO4 Explain mining operations and transportation
CO5 Describe the necessity and functioning of smart technologies
294
PO-CO Mapping
Course Title: Mine Management and
Entrepreneurship
CO Periods
PO No Col 1 Remarks
CO no (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO2,CO4 5 6.6 1

>40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO 2 CO4 5 6.6 1
25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
PO 3 CO1,CO2,CO3 23 30.6 2
Addressed
PO 4 CO2,CO5 10 13.3 1
PO 5 CO1,CO3 16 21.3 1
<5% Not addressed
PO 6 CO1 16 21.3 1
PO 7
CO1 2 1 1 2 1
CO2 1 2 1 2 1
CO3 2 1 1 1
CO4 1 1 2
CO5 1 1
Learning Outcomes
1.0 Know Principle of Management applied to mining Industry.
1.1 State the role of Mining Industry in economic development of our country.
1.2 State the Applicability of different types of ownership of Industries with reference to mining.
1.3 Define the term Management
1.4 Explain the different functions of Management
1.5 State the Principle of Scientific Management
1.6 List its characteristics of Scientific Management.
1.7 Define the term organisation
1.8 List the different departments in Mining Industry.
1.9 Draw the organisation chart of a conventional Underground mine
1.10 Draw the organisation chart of a mechanised Long wall mine
1.11 Draw the organisation chart of a mechanised Opencast mine.
295
2.0 Understand Entrepreneurship and organisational structure
2.1 Define the term Entrepreneurship and Explain the concepts of Entrepreneurship
2.2 List the factors that motivate entrepreneur
2.3 State the risks and rewards encountered by an entrepreneur in respect of finance, career, personality
and requirements of an entrepreneur
2.4 Explain the Maslow’s theory of motivation
2.5 Explain Traits theory of leadership and Behavioural theory of leadership
2.6 Explain the method of product and site selection
2.7 Explain decision making and communication process
2.8 List the financial assistance programs
2.9 Explain the role of banks in the development of entrepreneur
2.10 State the statutory requirement in setting up a mining industry
2.11 Conduct demand and market surveys
2.12 Explain the Break even Analysis , terminology used in Break even analysis and numerical problems on
Break even analysis
3.0 Total Quality Management, Recruitments and Training
3.1 Define the total quality management, concept of quality
3.2 List the quality systems and elements of quality systems
3.3 State the principles of quality assurance
3.4 Understand the basic concepts of TQM, pillars of TQM and Indian standards on quality systems
3.5 List the evolution of ISO standards
3.6 Discuss ISO standards along with constituents of ISO 9000 series of quality systems, outstanding
features and drawbacks of ISO 9000 series of standards.
3.7 List the beneficiaries of ISO 9000.
3.8 Explain the concept of ISO 14000
3.9 Define the term recruitment and training
3.10 State various methods of recruitment process.
3.11 State Essential Qualification of persons recruited in mines under various category.
3.12 Explain different category training as per VTC Rules and various training programmes
4.0 Network analysis
4.1 Define network analysis
4.2 State the objectives of network analysis
4.3 Define the various terms CPM, Activity, Predecessor event, Merge and burst event, dummy activity
4.4 List the guide lines for construction of network diagrams
4.5 List the merits and demerits of CPM
4.6 Solve simple problems on CPM
4.7 Define the term PERT
4.8 List the time estimate in PERT
4.9 State the methodology of PERT
4.10 List the merits and demerits of PERT
4.11 Compare PERT Vs CPM
4.12 Solve the simple problems on PERT
5.0 Knows the Smart Technologies
5.1 Understand the overview of Internet of Things(IoT)
5.2 Define the term IoT, principle of working of IoT and key features of IoT
5.3 List the components of IoT (hardware, software, technology and protocols)
296
5.4 List the advantages and disadvantages of IoT, applications of IoT in various fields of engineering
5.5 Mention the application of IoT in Smart Cities
5.6 State the application of IoT in Smart Energy and the Smart Grid
5.7 Mention the application of IoT in Smart Transportation and Mobility
5.8 State the application of IoT in Smart Home, Smart Buildings and Infrastructure
5.9 Mention the application of IoT in Smart Factory and Smart Manufacturing
5.10 Mention the application of IoT in Smart Health
5.11 Mention the application of IoT in Food and Water Tracking and Security
5.12 Mention the application of IoT in Social Networks and IoT
COURSE CONTENTS:
1. Mine management
Role of mining Industry in country’s economic development, ownerships of Industries, Management,
organisation, in the context of mining Industry.
2. Entrepreneurship and organisational structure
Motivating factors, Risks and Rewards, requirements of entrepreneur, products selection. site
solution, , setting of a Mine-Theory of motivation-Leader ship-Decision making process-
communication process- Market survey., Demand survey techno-economic-Break even analysis.
3. Total Quality Management, Recruitments and training
Definition of TQM-concept of quality- quality systems and elements of quality systems- principles of
quality assurance- constituents of ISO 9000 series-Merits and drawbacks of ISO-Indian standards of
Quality system - Recruitment and training, Methods of recruitment - Essential Quality of person
different category training as per VTC Rules - Training programmes
4. Network analysis
Definition and Objectives of network analysis-construction of network diagrams-Definitions of
various terms-Merits and demerits of CPM-Simple problems on CPM-PERT-Definition, methodology,
time estimates –Simple problems on PERT-Compression CPM Vs PERT
5. Knows the Smart Technologies
Overview of Internet of Things (IoT)-working principle - key features -- components - advantages and
disadvantages of IoT-applications of IoT in various fields of engineering
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mine Management, Legislation and Ground safety : S.Ghattak.

2. Mine Management : V.N.Singh
3. Industrial Management : O.P.Khanna
297
S. Chapter Name Periods Weightage Marks Wise Question Wise CO’s

No Allocated Allocated Distribution of Distribution of Mapped
Weightage Weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Mine Management 10 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO1
2 Entrepreneurship 20 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO1
Total Quality
Management,
3 20 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO3
Recruitments and
Training
4 Network analysis 15 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO2,CO4
Smart Technologies 10 CO1,CO2,C

5 14 03 03 08 01 01 01
O3

10 10 01 CO3
from any chapters
TOTAL 75 80 15 15 32 18 05 05 04 02
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap -Application ; An- Analyzing
298

Fifth semester :: MNG-501 Mine Management and Entrepreneurship
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1. (a) Organisation is a tool of Management

(b) Demand survey is the process of knowing the demand of a particular product which is intended to
manufacture
(c) Industry plays a vital role in the development of _____of any country (CO3)
(d) The details gathered from various Feasibility Studies are presented in the form of a report
called ___________ . (CO2)
2. Define the term Management (CO1)
3. List the different departments in Mining Industry (CO1)
4. List the factors that motivate entrepreneur (CO2)
5. Define the total quality management, concept of quality (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) Explain the different functions of Management (CO1)

(OR)
(B) Draw the organisation chart of a mechanised Opencast mine (CO1)
7. (A) Explain the Maslow’s theory of motivation (CO3)

(OR)
(B) Explain Traits theory of leadership and Behavioural theory of leadership (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the method of product and site selection (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Explain decision making and communication process (CO3)
oOo
299

Fifth semester :: MNG-501 Mine Management and Entrepreneurship
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) IoT means Internet of Things

(b) It is the process of selecting the different category of persons to the different posts by adopting some
procedure
(c) 5 S principles are developed in ___________ (CO3)
(d) The vocabulary on quality system is defined in ___ . (CO2)
2. State various methods of recruitment process (CO1)
3. Define the various terms a) Activity b) Predecessor event (CO1)
4. List the time estimate in PERT (CO2)
5. Define the terms a) IoT b) principle of working of IoT (CO3)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A) Explain the concept of ISO 14000 (CO1)

(OR)
(B) Explain different category training as per VTC Rules and various training programmes (CO1)
7. (A) List the merits and demerits of PERT (CO3)

(OR)
(B) Compare PERT Vs CPM (CO2)
8. (A) State the application of IoT in Smart Factory and Smart Manufacturing (CO2)
(OR)
(B)State the application of IoT in Smart Home, Smart Buildings and Infrastructure (CO3)
oOo
300
C-20-MNG-501
D.MNG.E. – V SEMESTER EXAMINATION
MINE MANAGEMENT AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP
PART – A
10 X3 = 30
1. Define the terms a) Management b) organisation (CO1)
2. List its characteristics of Scientific Management (CO2)
3. List the factors that motivate entrepreneur (CO2)
4. List the financial assistance programs (CO2)
5. Define the total quality management (CO1)
6. Define the term recruitment and training (CO1)
7. Define network analysis (CO1)
8. List the time estimate in PERT (CO4)
9. Define the term IoT (CO1)
10. List the key features of IoT (CO1)
PART – B
5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Explain the different functions of Management. (CO2)
(OR)
B) Draw the organisation chart of a mechanised Opencast mine (CO3)
12. A) Explain the role of banks in the development of entrepreneur. (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain the terminology used in Break-even Analysis (CO3)
13. A) Discuss ISO standards and list the constituents of ISO 9000 series of quality systems (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain different category training as per VTC Rules (CO1)
14. A) List the merits and demerits of CPM (CO2)
(OR)
B) List the merits and demerits of PERT (CO2)
15. A) List the advantages and disadvantages of IoT. (CO1)
(OR)
B) State the application of IoT in Smart Home, Smart Buildings and Infrastructure (CO5)
PART – C
16. Construct the network diagram and find

a) Critical path(b) Expected time to build the plant. By using the given data (CO4)
Activity 1-2 2-3 3-6 2-4 1-5 5-6 4-6 5-7 7-8 6-8
Duration
6 4 5 8 4 7 11 9 12 3
(days)
***
301
MINE LEGISLATION AND SAFETY

Mine Legislation and

MNG-502 06 90 20 80
Safety
TIME SCHEDULE
S.
Major Topics Periods Mapping CO’s
No.
1 Mines Act 1952, and Mines Rules 1955 14 CO1
Coal Mines Regulations, 2017 and Metalliferous Mines
2 20 CO2,CO5
Regulations,1960- I
Coal Mines Regulations, 2017 and Metalliferous Mines
3 20 CO2,CO5
Regulations,1960- II
The Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act,
4 20 CO4
1957 Mineral Concession Rules, 1960
5 Industrial Dispute Act-1947and Mine safety 16 CO2
Total 90

- Explain the acts and rules used in mines and provisions related to them
- Explain the importance of Coal mines regulations -2017 and various
Course Objectives provisions
- Explain the importance of Metalliferous Mines Regulations
- Describe the scope and importance of Mines and Minerals
Development act 1957, and Mineral concession rules 1960
- Explain Industrial Dispute Act 1947
CO1 Explain mines act and mine rules
CO2 Explain application of coal mines regulations
Course Outcomes CO3 Explain application of metalliferous mines regulations
CO4 Explain application of Mines and Mineral concession rules
CO5 Explain Industrial Dispute Act 1947
302
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: 502 Course Title: Mine Legislation and safety No of Periods: 90
CO Periods addressing PO
PO Mapped with CO
in Col 1 Level (1,2,3) Remarks
No no
No %
PO1 - - - - >40% Level 3 Highly
PO 2 CO1,CO3,CO5 40 44.4 3 addressed
PO 3 CO1,CO3,CO5 24 26.6 2 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
PO 4 CO1,CO3,CO5 24 26.6 2 Addressed
PO 5 - - - - 5 to 25% Level 1 Low
PO 6 CO5 2 2.4 - addressed
<5% Not addressed
PO 7 -
CO1 3 2 2 2 1
CO2
CO3 3 2 2 2 1
CO4
CO5 3 2 2 2 1
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Mine Act 1952 and Mine Rules 1955

1.1 a) State the necessity of Mine Legislation
b) List the different laws applicable to mines-(Mines Act 1952, Mines Rules 1955, Coal Mines
Regulations 2017 and Metalliferous Mines Regulations 1961, Mines Vocational Training
Rules, 1966, Mines Crush Rules, 1966, Oil Mines Regulations 1984, Mineral Concession Rules
1960, Mines and Minerals (Reg. & Dev.) Act 1957, Granite Conservation and Development
Rules 1999, Indian Electricity Rules 1956)
1.2 State the areas of application and date of commencement short title and extent of mines
Act, important terms of Mines Act
1.3 Define the term Adult, Agent, Chief Inspector, Employer, Inspector, Relay and Shift, Serious
bodily injury, reportable injury
1.4 List the situations exempted from application of the Mines Act
1.5 List the provisions related to the drinking water.
1.6 List the provisions of Act in respect of notice to be given about accidents
1.7 List the provisions related to hours and limitations of employment above ground
1.8 List the provisions related to hours of work below ground and above ground
303
1.9 List the provisions of limitations of daily hours of work including overtime
1.10 Enumerates the provisions of Act, related to leave wages, related to drinking water
1.11 Define the terms, leave, calendar year, certifying surgeon, court of enquiry
1.12 List the rules related to First Aid, Medical appliances
2.0 Know the provisions of CMR -2017/MMR -1961 – Part I
2.1 Define the terms; approved safety lamp, Banks man, competent person, machinery, Ventilating
District, Working place
2.2 Know the other terms limited to CMR only.
Define the terms shot firer, over man, assistant or under manager, on setter, firery seam flame
proof apparatus, gassy seam of first, second and third degree, General body of air
2.3 Know the other terms limited to M.M.R. only.
Define the terms Assistant Manager, Underground Manager, Blasters, Bell man, Single Man,
Metalliferous Mine, Mine foremen, Mine mate.
2.4 List the duties and responsibilities of manager, Safety officer, Oven-man under CMR/MMR
2.5 List the provisions related to Haulage roads, travelling road ways under CMR/MMR
2.6 List the provisions related to open cast working under CMR/MMR
2.7 List the provisions related to workings near mine boundaries, setting of supports under
CMR/MMR
2.8 List the provisions related to steep workings, development, depillaring under CMR
2.9 List the provisions related to extractions of coal by method other than the bord and pillar
system, Multi sections and contiguous seams under CMR
2.10 List the provisions related to workings under railways roads, systematic timbering rules under
CMR/MMR
2.11 List the provisions related to precautions after a fire has broken out, general precautions
against fire, surface precautions against fire under CMR/MMR
2.12 List the provisions related to precaution against dust , eruption of gas , dangers from surface
water under CMR/MMR
2.13 List the provisions related to dangers from underground inundation, intentional flooding under
CMR/MMR
3.0 Know the provisions of CMR -2017/MMR -1961 - Part II
3.1 List the provisions related to underground precautions against fire under CMR/MMR
3.2 List the provisions related to further precautions against spontaneous heating, precautions
after a fire has broken out under CMR/MMR
3.3 List the provisions related to equipment, precautions for fire fighting under CMR/MMR
3.4 Know the provisions related to standards of ventilation under CMR/MMR
3.5 List the precautions against gas during dewatering and reopening under CMR/MMR
3.6 List the precautions against inflammable gases and noxious gases under CMR
3.7 Determination of percentage of inflammable gas and of, environment conditions, general
precautions in gassy, Mines, Management etc., of gassy mines under CMR/MMR
3.8 List the provisions related to storage of explosives, magazines and transport of explosives under
CMR/MMR
3.9 List the provisions reserve station, drilling, charging stemming. Shot holes electrical shot firing
under CMR/MMR
3.10 List the provisions related to inspections before shot firing , after shot firing and misfires under
CMR/MMR
304
3.11 List the provisions related to additional precautions in gassy mines, stone drifts under
CMR/MMR
3.12 List the provisions to use, and maintenance of protective footwear, supply of helmets under
CMR/MMR
3.13 List the provisions related to use and supply of other protective equipment. under CMR/MMR
4.0 Knows about the Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act-1957 and Mineral Concession
Rules-1960
4.1 Define the terms- Mining Lease, Minor minerals, Prospecting license and reconnaissance permit
as per MMDR Act, 1957.
4.2 List the provisions related to Prospecting or mining operations to be under licence or lease as
per MMDR Act, 1957.
4.3 List the provisions related to Restrictions on the grant of prospecting licences or mining leases
as per MMDR Act, 1957.
4.4 List the provisions related to application of prospecting licences or mining leases as per MMDR
Act, 1957.
4.5 List the provisions related to Application for reconnaissance permit as per Mineral Concession
Rules, 1960
4.6 List the provisions related to Application for prospecting licence and its renewal as per Mineral
Concession Rules, 1960
4.7 List the provisions related to Applications for grant of mining leases as per Mineral Concession
Rules, 1960
4.8 List the provisions related to Renewal of mining lease as per Mineral Concession Rules, 1960
5.0 Know the Industrial Dispute Act-1947 and importance of safety in mines
5.1 Define the term Industrial Dispute act-1947

5.2 State various causes and adverse effects of Industrial Dispute, various provisions of ID act
5.3 List the provisions related to Strike, lockout
5.4 Define the terms-safety, unsafe act, unsafe conditions, safety campaign, safety awareness.
5.5 Define the term ‘Accidents’,’ Injury’, serious bodily injury, Accidents rate.
5.6 List direct losses (costs) and indirect losses (costs) due to accidents in mines.
5.7 Classify accidents in mines basing on causes, responsibility, and place wise, degree of severity,
category wise, age wise, shift wise and time wise.
5.8 Explain the importance of safety in mines, factors influencing safety in mines
5.9 Explain the need of vocational training to promote safety.
5.10 Describe pit safety committee.
5.11 State the term of office, scope and functions of pit safety committee.
5.12 Explain safety organization at pit level.
305
COURSE CONTENTS:
1.0 Mines Act 1952 and Mines Rules 1955

Meaning of the terms, Mine Act, Regulations, Rules, Bye-laws, standing orders, and situations under
which act does not apply. Provisions of Mines Act in respect of Drinking water health and hygiene
conservancy, Medical Appliances, Hour and limitations of Employment - Leave with wages.
Mine Rules related to drinking water, lavatories, urinals with on surface and in underground first
aid, - Ambulance, Hours, and limitations of Employment - leave with wages - with wages and over
time.
2.0 Coal Mines and Metalliferrous Mines Regulations Part -I
Important definitions, regulations related to notice of accidents duties of managers, Asst/under
Managers, Overman, foreman and surveyor, Mine plans and sections. Means of Access and egress
ladder and Ladder ways under M.M.R. Transport of men and material by Haulage mine
3.0 Coal Mines and Metalliferrous Mines Regulations Part -II
Working precautions against dangers from gas and water Mine ventilation, mine lighting and safety
equipment and types of fences(Miscellaneous)
4.0 Knows about The Mines and Minerals (Development and Regulation) Act, 1957 and Mineral
Concession Rules, 1960
Define the terms- Mining Lease, Minor minerals, Prospecting license and reconnaissance permit as
per MMDR Act, 1957-Lit the provisions related to Prospecting or mining operations to be under
licence or lease , Restrictions on the grant of prospecting licences or mining leases , application of
prospecting licences or mining leases as per MMDR Act, 1957. - List the provisions related to
Application for reconnaissance permit --Application for prospecting licence and its renewal -
Applications for grant of mining leases as per Mineral Concession Rules, 1960-Renewal of mining
lease as per Mineral Concession Rules, 1960.
5.0 Industrial Dispute Act-1947 and Importance of Safety in mines
Industrial Dispute act-1947, causes f or Industrial Dispute adverse effects for Industrial Dispute
various provisions of ID act -strike and lockout-Define the terms-safety, unsafe act, unsafe
conditions, safety campaign, safety awareness.- importance of safety in mines- factors that influence
safety in mines- need of vocational training to promote safety-mine safety week celebrations- pit
safety committee- term of office, scope and functions of pit safety committee- safety organization at
pit level-Define the term ‘Accidents’,’ Injury’, serious bodily injury, Accidents rate- direct losses
(costs) and indirect losses (costs) due to accidents- Classify accidents in mines basing on causes,
responsibility, place wise, degree of severity, category wise, age wise, shift wise and time wise- Pit
safety committee.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Mine Management, Legislation and Ground safety : S.Ghattak.
2. Mines act 1952
3. Mines rules 1955
4. CMR/MMR 1957 / 61
5. Critical Appraisal : Rakesh& Prasad
306

Distribution of Distribution of
S. Periods Weightage CO’s
Chapter Name Weightage Weightage
No Allocated Allocated Mapped
A
R U Ap R U Ap An
n
Mines Act 1952,
1 14 17 03 06 08 01 02 01 CO1,CO3
Mines Rules 1955
Coal Mines
Regulations, 2017
CO1,CO3,C
2 and Metalliferous 20 14 03 03 08 01 01 01
O5
Mines Regulations,
1960- Part –I
Coal Mines
Regulations, 2017
3 and Metalliferous 20 11 03 08 01 01 CO3,CO5
Mines Regulations,
1960- Part –II
The Mines and
Minerals
(Development and
3 Regulation) Act, 20 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO1,CO3
1957 Mineral
Concession Rules,
1960
Industrial Dispute
4 Act-1947and Mine 16 14 03 03 08 01 01 01 CO3
safety
10 10 01 CO5
from any chapters
TOTAL 90 80 12 18 40 10 04 06 05 01
R-Remember; U-Understanding; Ap-Application ;An- Analylising
307

Fifth semester :: MNG-502 Mine Legislation and Safety
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Court of enquiry means a court of inquiry appointed under section 24 of the Act
(b) The Competent person means a person who has a attained the age of 17 years
(c) The water points shall not be with in washing place ___________meters (CO3)
(d) Indian electricity rules ___________ . (CO2)
2. State the necessity of Mine Legislation (CO1)
3. Define the terms a) approved safety lamp b) Banks man (CO1)
4. Define the terms a) leave b) calendar year (CO1)
5. Define the terms a) shot firer b) over man (CO1)
Instructions :
6. (A) List the provisions of Act in respect of notice to be given about accidents (CO2)
(OR)
(B) List the provisions related to hours and limitations of employment above ground (CO1)
7. (A)List the duties and responsibilities of manager (CO3)

(OR)
(B) List the provisions related to Haulage roads under CMR (CO2)
8. (A) List the provisions related to open cast working under CMR (CO2)
(OR)
(B) List the provisions related to underground precautions against fire under CMR/MMR (CO3)
oOo
308

Fifth semester :: MNG-502 Mine Legislation and Safety
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) If any dispute arises as to the life of any protective equipment, it shall be referred to the chief
inspector for decision
(b) Z.A.P means Zero accident power
(c) The percentage of inflammable gas does not exceed ___________in the general body of the return air
(CO3)
(d) Masonry or other adequate protection against fire, for a distance of not less than ___ metres in every
direction from the fan. (CO2)
2. List the provisions to use, and maintenance of protective footwear (CO1)
3. Define the terms- Mining Lease, Minor minerals (CO1)
4. Define the terms-safety, unsafe act (CO1)
5. Define the term Industrial Dispute act-1947 (CO1)
Instructions :
(ii) Each question carries EIGHT mark
6. (A) List the precautions against inflammable gases and noxious gases under CMR (CO1)
(OR)
(B) List the provisions related to storage of explosives, magazines and transport of explosives
under CMR/MMR (CO2)
7. (A) List the provisions related to Restrictions on the grant of prospecting licences or mining leases
as per MMDR Act, 1957 (CO3)
(OR)
(B) List the provisions related to application of prospecting licences or mining leases as per MMDR
Act,1957 (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the need of vocational training to promote safety (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Explain the importance of safety in mines (CO5)
oOo
309
C20-MNG-502
D.MNG.E. –V SEMESTER EXAMINATION
MINE LEGISLATION AND SAFETY
PART – A 10 X3 = 30
1. Define the terms a) Adult b) Agent (CO1)
2. List the different laws applicable to mines (CO2)
3. List the provisions of limitations of daily hours of work including overtime (CO1)
4. Define the terms a) approved safety lamp b) Banks man (CO1)
5. List the provisions related to workings under railways roads under CMR (CO2)
6. List the provisions related to use and supply of helmets under CMR (CO1)
7. Define the term Industrial Dispute act-1947 (CO1)
8. List the provisions related to Lockout (CO4)
9. Define the terms a) Mining Lease b) Minor minerals (CO1)
10. Define the term a) Accidents b) Injury (CO1)
PART – B 5 X 8 = 40
11. A) List the situations exempted from application of the Mines Act (CO1)
(OR)
B) List the rules related to Medical appliances (CO2)
12. A) List the duties and responsibilities of manager under CMR/MMR (CO5)
(OR)
B) List the provisions related to open cast working under CMR/MMR (CO4)
13. A) List the precautions against inflammable gases and noxious gases under CMR (CO2)
(OR)
B) List the provisions related to inspections after shot firing misfires under CMR/MMR (CO1)
14. A) List the provisions related to Prospecting or mining operations to be under licence or
lease as per MMDR Act, 1957 (CO4)
(OR)
B) List the provisions related to Renewal of mining lease as per Mineral Concession Rules,
1960 (CO4)
15. A) Explain safety organization at pit level (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the need of vocational training to promote safety (CO2)
PART – C 1X 10 = 10
16. List the provisions reserve station, drilling, charging stemming under CMR/MMR (CO5)
***
310
MINE HAZARDS AND RESCUE

MNG-503 Mine Hazards and Rescue 05 75 20 80
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of
Periods
1 Mine Fires 15 CO1,CO2
Mine Explosions and
2 20 CO3,CO4
Inundation
3 Miner’s diseases 15 CO2,CO5
4 Rescue and recovery 15 CO5
5 Gas detectors 10 CO3,CO4
Total 75

- Explain various sources of mine fires, causes, preventive measures
- Explain different types of explosions, causes, preventive measures
Course
- Describe inundation, safety provisions
Objectives
- Familiarize different types of miners diseases,
- Describe the usage of different gas detectors,
- Familiarize various rescue apparatus and recovery procedure
CO1 Explain various sources of mine fires, causes, preventive measures
CO2 Explain different types of explosions, causes, preventive measures
Course CO3 Describe inundation, safety provisions

Outcomes
CO4 Familiarize different types of miners diseases
CO5 Describe different gas detectors, rescue apparatus and recovery procedure
311
PO-CO Mapping:
Course Code: MNG-

Course Title: Mine Hazards and Rescue No of Periods: 75
503
CO Periods
PO Mapped addressing PO in Level
Remarks
No with CO no Column 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO2 8 10.6 1 >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
CO1,CO2,CO
PO2 41 54.6 3
3 25 to 40% Level 2 Moderately addressed
PO3 CO2 7 9.3 1
PO4 CO1,CO2 19 25.3 2 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO5 - - - -
PO7 - - - -
CO1 - 3 - 2 - - - - 1 1
CO2 1 3 1 2 - - - 2 1 1
CO3 - 3 - - - - - - - 1
CO4 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Mine Fires

1.1 Define mine fires and list the types of mine fires.
1.2 List the causes and preventive measures of surface and underground mine fires
1.3 Explain the term ‘Spontaneous heating’ and list the signs of spontaneous heating
1.4 List the factors for developing spontaneous heating.
1.5 List the causes and preventive measures of spontaneous heating
1.6 List and explain different methods of dealing with fires and their applicability
1.7 Explain the procedure of permanent sealing of fire in I,II, III degree gassy mines.
1.8 Explain the method of collecting samples behind the Fire Seals
1.9 Calculate the CO/O2 and CO2/O2 deficiency ratio
1.10 Describe and interpret the Coward diagram for finding the explosibility of methane air
mixture.
1.11 List and explain the different methods of re-opening of sealed off areas.
1.12 List different fire fighting equipment and describe it in fire fighting organisation
312
2.0 Mine Explosions and Inundation
2.1 Define mine explosion and list the different types of mine explosions.
2.2 List the causes and preventive measures of fire damp and coal dust explosions.
2.3 Explain the method of treating the coal dust.
2.4 Explain the purpose of construction of stone dust barriers and their locations.
2.5 State the application and functions of water barriers.
2.6 Classify the sources of water in mines.
2.7 List the precautions against inundation due to surface and underground water.
2.8 List the precautions to be taken while approaching water logged area with sketch.
2.9 Explain the function and the use of Burnside safety boring apparatus.
2.10 List the different types of dams and state the purpose and applicability of water dams in
mines.
2.11 Describe the constructional details of sump and barriers.
3.0 Miner’s diseases

3.1 Explain about various forms of pollution due to mining and explain about control methods.
3.2 List various miner’s diseases.
3.3 List the causes, symptoms and treatment of miner’s Jaundice and Ankylostomiasis.
3.4 List the causes, symptoms and treatment of Nystagmus.
3.5 Define the term pneumoconiosis and list the causes, symptoms and precautions against
pneumoconiosis.
3.6 List the causes, symptoms and precautions against Asbestosis and Silicosis.
3.7 List the causes, symptoms and precautions against Siderosis and manganese poisoning.
3.8 List the causes, symptoms and precautions against lead poisoning and chromium poisoning.
3.9 List the causes, adverse effects and control of diseases due to radioactive minerals.
4.0 Rescue and recovery

4.1 Define the terms rescue and recovery.
4.2 List the situations requiring rescue operations.
4.3 Classify rescue apparatus.
4.4 Explain the constructional details and principle of working of compressed oxygen self-
contained breathing apparatus.
4.5 Describe the constructional details of smoke helmet and state the purpose of it.
4.6 Describe the constructional details of gas mask and state the purpose of it.
4.7 Explain the functions of self-rescuer.
4.8 Define resuscitation.
4.9 State the purpose of resuscitation apparatus and rescue station.
4.10 List the equipment required to be kept in mine rescue station.
4.11 Describe rescue operations at mine level.
5.0 Gas detectors

5.1 Classifies the different methods of gas detection.
5.2 Explain the principles on which the detectors are developed or designed.
5.3 List the recent techniques of gas detection (remote sensing devices, continuous recorders,
remote monitoring, infrared spectrometer and sensors).
5.4 List the method of CO detectors.
5.5 Explain the method of CO detection by warm blooded creature.
5.6 Explain the method of detection CO by chemical detectors.
5.7 List and explain the methods of detecting CH4.
5.8 Explain the multi gas detector and its use.
313
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Mine fires

Classification, causes, preventive measures, spontaneous heating- causes and preventive measures.
Different methods of dealing with fire Permanent sealing of Fire. Collection of samples behind fire
seals – Interpretation of samples – Coward’s diagram, calculation of CO/O2 deficiency rations,
reopening of sealed off areas Fire fighting equipment and organisation- Nitrogen infusion
2.0 Mine Explosions and Inundation
Types of mine explosions-Causes and preventive measures, coal dust explosion-causes and
preventive measures, Treating coal dust by watering and stone dust barriers – water barriers -
Inundation in mines-dangers different sources of water-precautions against surface and
underground water-precautions-while approaching water logged area - Burn side safety boring
apparatus - purpose of dams. - Design of a dam construction of concrete dam. Accident due to
Inundation.
3.0 Miner’s diseases
Various forms of environmental pollution due to mining- various forms of pollution due to mining-
pollution control methods- various miners’ diseases- causes, symptoms and treatment of miner’s
Jaundice- causes, symptoms and treatment of Ankylostomiasis- causes, symptoms and treatment of
Nystagmus-pneumoconiosis- causes, symptoms and precautions against Pneumoconiosis- causes,
symptoms and precautions against Asbestosis-causes, symptoms and precautions against Silicosis-
causes, symptoms and precautions against Sidirosis- causes, symptoms and precautions against
Manganese poisoning- causes, symptoms and precautions against Lead poisoning- causes, symptoms
and precautions against Chromium poisoning- causes, adverse effects and control of diseases due to
radioactive minerals
4.0 Rescue and recovery
Define the terms rescue and recovery- situations requiring rescue operations- rescue apparatus-
constructional details of compressed oxygen self-contained breathing apparatus (proto IV
apparatus)- principle of function- tests, care and maintenance of compressed O2 apparatus- purpose
of smoke helmet- constructional details --the purpose and constructional details of gas mask
functions of self-rescuer- resuscitation- purpose of resuscitation apparatus- purpose of rescue
station- equipment required to be kept in mine rescue station- details of rescue stations- rescue
organization at mines level.
5.0 Gas Detectors
Gas detectors, Uses,– principle on which designed, determination of percentage of gas with them-
Recent techniques of gas detection – remote sensing devices, continuous recorders, monitors, infra-
red spectrometers, sensors-Carbon Monoxide detection – Warm blooded birds, chemical detectors,
Multi gas detector.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mine fires, Rescue, Recovery and Inundation : M A. Ramulu

2. Mine ventilation : S. Ghatak
3. Mine environment and its control : G B Mishra
4. Mines Rescue rules
5. Mine ventilation : Hartmen
6. UMS Volumes
7. Statham series
314

CO’s
Chapter Name Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
1 Mine Fires 15 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO1,CO3
Mine Explosions
2 20 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO1,CO3
and Inundation
3 Miner’s diseases 15 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO3
Rescue and
4 15 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO1,CO2
recovery
5 Gas detectors 10 14 3 3 8 - 1 1 1 - CO2
10 10 1
from any chapters
TOTAL 75 80 15 15 24 26 5 5 3 3
315

Fifth semester :: MNG-503 Mine Hazards and Rescue
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Air crossings should be constructed of Fire Proof Material– True/False (CO1)
(b) A mine is not considered to be adequately ventilated if the fire damp percentage exceeds 0.75
(c) Incipient fires are also called as ___________ (CO3)
(d) In underground coal mines the amount CO produced varies with the ___________ . (CO2)
2. Define mine fires and list the types of mine fires (CO1)
3. List different fire fighting equipment (CO1)
4. List the different types of mine explosions (CO2)
5. Classify the sources of water in mines (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) List the causes and preventive measures of spontaneous heating (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain the procedure of permanent sealing of fire in III degree gassy mines (CO4)
7. (A) List the causes and preventive measures of fire damp explosions (CO3)
(OR)
(B) List the causes and preventive measures of coal dust explosions (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the purpose of construction of stone dust barriers and their locations (CO5)
(OR)
(B) Explain the function and the use of Burnside safety boring apparatus (CO5)
oOo
316

Fifth semester :: MNG-503 Mine Hazards and Rescue
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) If the lever is affected, then the disease is called Jaundice– True/False (CO1)
(b) CH4 is an inflammable gas ---- True/False (CO1)
(c) Disease caused due to inhalation of iron oxide dust is called ___________ (CO3)
(d) The weighs of the gas mask is ___________ Kg. (CO2)
2. List various miner’s diseases (CO2)
3. Define the terms rescue and recovery (CO1)
4. Classifies the different methods of gas detection (CO2)
5. List the methods of detecting CH4 (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A)List the causes, symptoms and treatment of Nystagmus (CO1)

(OR)
(B) List the causes, symptoms and precautions against Asbestosis and Silicosis (CO1)
7. (A) Describe the constructional details of gas mask and state the purpose of it (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Describe rescue operations at mine level (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the principles on which the detectors are developed or designed (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain the multi gas detector and its use (CO5)
oOo
317
C20-MNG-503
BOARD DIPLOMA EXAMINATION
MINE HAZARDS AND RESCUE
PART – A 10 X3 = 30
1. Define mine fires and list the types of mine fires. (CO1)
2. List the factors for developing spontaneous heating. (CO2)
3. List the causes of fire damp explosions. (CO2)
4. Classify the sources of water in mines. (CO3)
5. List various miner’s diseases. (CO2)
6. List the causes of diseases due to radioactive minerals. (CO1)
7. Define the terms rescue and recovery. (CO1)
8. List the equipment required to be kept in mine rescue station. (CO2)
9. Classifies the different methods of gas detection. (CO1)
10. List the method of CO detections. (CO4)
PART – B 5 X 8 = 40
11. A) List different fire fighting equipment and describe it in fire fighting organisation. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the procedure of permanent sealing of fire in III degree gassy mines. (CO1)
12. A) Describe the constructional details of sump and barriers. (CO4)

(OR)
B) Explain the purpose of construction of stone dust barriers and their locations. (CO5)
13. A) Explain about various forms of pollution due to mining and explain about control methods
(CO2)
(OR)
B) List the causes, symptoms and precautions against Asbestosis. (CO2)
14. A) Explain the functions of self-rescuer. (CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain the constructional details and principle of working of compressed oxygen self-
contained breathing apparatus. (CO4)
15. A) Explain the principles on which the detectors are developed or designed. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the method of CO detection by warm blooded creature. (CO4)
PART – C 1X 10 = 10
16. Why Burnside safety boring operator used in underground mines? Explain the function and the use
of Burnside safety boring apparatus with sketch. (CO5)
***
318
MINING MACHINERY-II

MNG-504 Mining Machinery - II 06 90 20 80
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of
Periods
1 Conventional Face machinery 18 CO1,CO2
2 Longwall Face machinery 17 CO2,CO4
Flame proofing, intrinsic safety,
3 15 CO2,CO3
Signalling and Cables in mines
4 Winding system- Part-I 20 CO2,CO5
5 Winding system Part-II 20 CO4,CO5
Total 90

- Familiarize different machinery, principle of operation
- Familiarize the scope and importance of flame proofing, constructional
details
- Explain various intrinsic safety apparatus used in mines and their
Course constructional details. Methods of making circuit intrinsically safe
Objectives - Familiarize various types of signaling systems used in mines, their
construction and mode of operation
- Familiarize different types of cables used in mines, their construction , field
usage,
- Describe the winding system used in mines, various components, principle
of working, safety precautions
CO1 Explain different drilling machinery

CO2 Describe different cables used in mines, their construction and mode of operation.
CO3 Explain various intrinsic safety apparatus used in mines and their construction
Course
CO4 Describe the winding system used in mines, various components, principle of
Outcomes
working, and safety precaustions.
CO5 Explain various types of signaling systems used in mines, their construction and
mode of operation
319
PO-CO Mapping:
Course Code:
Course Title: Mining Machinery-II No of Periods: 90
MNG-504
CO Periods
PO No Remarks
CO no Column 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO2 CO1,CO2 20 22.2 2
PO3 CO1,CO2 25 27.7 2 25 to 40% Level 2 Moderately addressed
PO4 CO1,CO2 25 27.7 2
PO5 CO2,CO3 20 22.2 2 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO6 - - - -
<5% Not addressed
PO7 - - - -
CO1 - 2 2 2 - - - - 3 -
CO2 - 2 2 2 2 - - - 4 -
CO3 - - - - 2 - - - 1 -
CO4 - - - - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - -
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Conventional face machinery

1.1 List the different drills used in mines and mention the field of use of each.
1.2 Explain the working of electric rotary drill with neat sketch.
1.3 Explain the working of hammer rock drill with sketch.
1.4 Write down the function of each part of hammer rock drill.
1.5 State the purposes of air-leg and coal cutting machines.
1.6 List the types of power loaders used mines and mention the field use of each.
1.7 Explain the principle of working of Side Discharge Loaders used in mines
1.8 Explain the principles of working of Load Haul Dumpers used in mines
1.9 Explain the principles of working of Rocker shovel used in metal mines
1.10 Explain the principles of working of Road headers used in underground mines.
2.0 Long wall face machinery
2.1 Explain the working of Single Ended Ranging Drum Shearer (SERDS)with sketch.
2.2 Explain the working of Double Ended Ranging Drum Shearer (DERDS) with sketch
2.3 Write down the applications of SERDS and DERDS.
2.4 Explain the principle of working of Armoured Face Conveyor (AFC)
2.5 State the principle of lump breaker
2.6 State purpose of power pack.
2.7 List the factors governing the selection of power supports.
320
2.8 Draw and state the purpose of the following in power supports
a) Canopy b) Caving Shield c) Double acting Advancing Ram
d) Face Guard e) Extension Canopy f) Lemniscates Links
2.9 Explain various components of AFC
2.10 State the purpose of Bottom opened and Bottom closed AFC and their applicability
2.11 State the applicable conditions of Twin-In-Bord and Twin-Out-Bord AFC and their
advantages, dis advantages.
3.0 Fame proofing, Intrinsic safety, Signalling and Cables in mines
3.1 Define the terms flame proof apparatus and intrinsically safe apparatus.
3.2 State the necessity of flame proofing and intrinsic safety to apparatus used in mines.
3.3 List the field use of flame proof apparatus and intrinsically safe apparatus,
3.4 Describe the constructional features of flame proofing.
3.5 Explain the methods of intrinsic safety
3.6 Describe the gate-end switch gear (box) used for coal drills.
3.7 Classify the methods of signalling in mines.
3.8 Explain the electrical signalling system used in underground haulage roadway with sketch.
3.9 Explain the signalling system in winding shafts.
3.10 Classify the types of cables used in mines.
3.11 Explain the constructional details of mine cables with cross sectional sketch
3.12 Explain cable jointing methods in vertical shaft.
3.13 Write down the care and maintenance steps to be taken for protection of mine cables.
4.0 Winding system – Part -I
4.1 Define the term winding and state the purpose of winding in shafts.
4.2 List the equipments required in a winding system and state the purpose of each.
4.3 Explain the types of head gear frames and state the purpose of head gears
4.4 Explain the arrangement for loading and unloading of skip at pit-top and pit-bottom
respectively.
4.5 State the necessity of guides for cage or skip
4.6 Explain the erection of flexible and rigid guides to cage or skip.
4.7 List the applicable conditions, merits and demerits of rigid and flexible guides
4.8 Explain the working of keps and safety catches with sketch.
4.9 List the types of safety hooks
4.10 Explain the working of kings-safety hook (detaching hook) with sketch.
4.11 Explain the constructional details of cage suspension gear
4.12 Explain the purpose of each component of cage suspension gear
4.13 Explain the constructional details of sheave or pulley
5.0 Winding system – Part -II
5.1 Compare cage winding with skip winding.
5.2 List the types of winding systems (drum and koepe)
5.3 Explain the drum winding with drum construction and list the types of drums.
5.4 List the safety devices used on winding system.
5.5 Explain the koepe or friction winding.
5.6 Describe the single rope and multi-rope friction winding with sketch.
5.7 List the merits and demerits of koepe or friction winding.
5.8 Compare drum winding with friction winding.
5.9 State the principle of braking in winding.
5.10 Explain the suspended calliper brake and anchored post brake
5.11 Explain the dynamic electrical breaking , Regenerative breaking
5.12 Explain the method of speed control by Lilly controller and other automatic contrivances
321
COURSE CONTENTS:
1. Conventional Face machinery

Handheld drills – electronic rotary drills - hammer rock drills - power loader – field of applications,
working operation – air leg – coal cutters
2. Longwall face machinery

Principle, design and application of long wall face machinery shearer, AFC, Lump breaker – stage
loader, power pack self-advancing chock shield supports- SERDS and DERDS- their applications-
principle of working of AFC (Armoured Face conveyor)- principle of lump breaker- purpose of power
pack.
3. Fame proofing, Intrinsic safety, Signalling and Cables in mines

Necessity of flame proofing- intrinsic safety apparatus - field of application – constructional features
- methods of intrinsic safety - field or application - methods of signalling in mines – electrical
signalling - classification – types – constructional details – cable jointing – care and maintenance.
4. Winding systems- Part-I

Winding in shafts – purpose, equipment - types of had gear frames – shaft fittings – guides in the
shafts – pit – top arrangement – keps and suspension gear – Types of drums - head gear pulley, care
skip winging-pit-top and pit-bottom arrangements – cage suspension gear- sheave -pulley
5. Winding systems – Part –II

Drum winding and skip winding, multi-deck winding and friction winding – drum and friction
winding – winding engine – depth - methods of speed control – breaking in winding – types of breaks-
automatic contrivances – dynamic –regenerative breaking
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Elements of Mining Vol.3 : D.J.Deshmukh

2. Mine Pumps, Haulages and Winding : S.Ghatak
3. Mining Machinery : S.Ghatak
4. Statham series VOL III
5. U.M.S.Volumes
6. Mine transportation : KERLIN
322
Question
Marks Wise Wise
S. Periods Weightage Distribution of Distribution CO’s Mapped
Chapter Name
No Allocated Allocated Weightage of
Weightage
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Conventional
1 18 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO2
Face machinery
Longwall Face
2 17 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO2
machinery
Flame proofing,
intrinsic safety,
3 15 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO1,CO3
Signalling and
Cables in mines
Winding system –
4 20 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO2
Part –I
Winding system –
5 20 14 3 3 8 1 1 1
Part –II
10 10 1 CO2
from any chapters
TOTAL 90 80 15 15 16 34 5 5 2 4
323

Fifth semester :: MNG-504 Mining Machinery-II
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) The fluid which is used in the powered support system is 5 to 10% emulsion oil
(b) Adjacent flanges must be placed metal to metal for a width of a least Two inches
(c) Weight of electric rotary drill machine is ___________ (CO3)
(d) Speed of jack hammer drill controlled by ___________ . (CO2)
2. List the different drills used in mines (CO2)
3. List the types of power loaders used mines (CO1)
4. Classify the methods of signalling in mines (CO2)
5. List the factors governing the selection of power supports (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) Explain the working of electric rotary drill with neat sketch (CO1)
(OR)
(B) Explain the principles of working of Load Haul Dumpers used in mines (CO1)
7. (A) Explain the working of Single Ended Ranging Drum Shearer (SERDS)with sketch (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Explain the principle of working of Armoured Face Conveyor (AFC) (CO2)
8. (A) Describe the gate-end switch gear (box) used for coal drills (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Explain the electrical signalling system used in underground haulage roadway
with sketch (CO3)
oOo
324

Fifth semester :: MNG-504 Mining Machinery-II
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) There is no fleet angle in the case of a koepe winder pulley

(b) Re- Generative braking is Mechanical braking
(c) The suspension gear should be renewed after every ___________ (CO3)
(d) ___________ is used to reduce oscillations of cage are used. (CO2)
2. Classify the types of cables used in mines (CO3)
3. State the necessity of guides for cage or skip (CO1)
4. List the types of safety hooks (CO2)
5. List the safety devices used on winding system (CO3)
Instructions :
answer.
6. (A) Explain the signalling system in winding shafts (CO1)

(OR)
(B) Explain cable jointing methods in vertical shaft (CO1)
7. (A) Explain the working of kings-safety hook (detaching hook) with sketch (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Explain the constructional details of cage suspension gear (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the suspended calliper brake and anchored post brake (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Compare drum winding with friction winding (CO3)
oOo
325
C20-MNG-504
MINING MACHINERY-II
PART – A 10 X3 = 30
1. List the different drills used in mines and mention the field of use of each. (CO1)
2. State the purposes of air-leg. (CO1)
3. Write down the applications of SERDS. (CO2)
4. State purpose of power pack. (CO1)
5. Define the terms flame proof apparatus and intrinsically safe apparatus. (CO1)
6. Classify the methods of signalling in mines. (CO4)
7. State the necessity of flame proofing and intrinsic safety to apparatus used in mines. (CO1)
8. List the equipments required in a winding system. (CO1)
9. List the safety devices used on winding system. (CO2)
10. State the principle of braking in winding. (CO4)
PART – B 5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Explain the principle of working of Side Discharge Loaders used in mines. (CO1)
(OR)
B) Explain the working of hammer rock drill with sketch. (CO1)
12. A) Explain the working of Double Ended Ranging Drum Shearer (DERDS) with sketch. (CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain the principle of working of Armoured Face Conveyor. (CO5)
13. A) Write down the care and maintenance steps to be taken for protection of mine cables(CO2)
(OR)
B) Describe the constructional features of flame proofing (CO1)
14. A) Explain the methods of intrinsic safety. (CO2)

(OR)
B) Describe the gate-end switch gear (box) used for coal drills. (CO3)
15. A) Compare cage winding with skip winding. (CO1)

(OR)
B) Explain the erection of flexible and rigid guides to cage or skip. (CO1)
PART – C

16. Explain the drum winding with drum construction and list the types of drums. (CO5)
***
326
ROCK MECHANICS AND STRATA CONTROL

Rock Mechanics and

MNG-505 05 75 20 80
Strata control
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of
Periods
1 Basics, Ground Forces and stress analysis 12 CO1,CO2
2 Rock properties and rock classifications 13 CO2,CO4
Rock failures, behaviour and
3 15 CO3,CO4
measurements
4 Ground movements and subsidence 15 CO4,CO5
5 Strata control 20 CO4,CO5
Total 75

- Analyze the different ground forces,
- Explain stress analysis,
Course Objectives - Describe rock properties and classifications,
- Analyze different types of rock failures and behavior,
- Explain different ground moments due to mining activity
- Analyze different methods of subsidence and strata control
CO1 Analyze Ground Forces and stress analysis

CO2 Describe rock properties and classifications
Course CO3 Explain the different ground forces, rock failures and behavior
Outcomes
CO4 Explain different ground moments due to mining activity
CO5 Explain different methods of subsidence and strata control
327
PO-CO Mapping:
Course Code: 505 Course Title: Rock Mechanics and Strata Control No of Periods: 75
CO Periods
Mappe
addressing PO in Col Level
PO No d with Remarks
1 (1,2,3)
CO no
No %
PO1 CO3 10 14 1
CO1,CO >40% Level 3 Highly addressed
PO2 15 20 1
3
CO1,CO 25 to 40% Level 2 Moderately addressed
PO3 19 25 2
3
CO2,CO 5 to 25% Level 1 Low addressed
PO4 31 41 3
3
PO6 - - - -
PO7 - - - -
CO1 - 1 2 - - - - 1 1 -
CO2 - - - 3 - - - - - 1
CO3 1 1 2 3 - - - 2 1 1
CO4 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1.0 Basics, Ground Forces and stress analysis

1.1 Define the term Rock mechanics.
1.2 State the scope and areas of application of rock mechanics in mining.
1.3 State forces due to the weight of strata
1.4 State tectonic, orogenic, residual and thermic origin forces
1.5 List the ground forces acting on a block of in-situ rock in three dimensions
1.6 Define the terms stress – field, principal stress, principal strain, plane stress and plane strain
1.7 Explain the relation between vertical and lateral stresses
1.8 Explain hydrostatic and lithostatic states of rock.
1.9 Lists the induced stresses due to mining operations.
1.10 Explain stress distribution around a mine workings
1.11 Explain stress concentration around shaft of different shapes
1.12 Explain stress concentration on pillars.
328
2.0 Rock properties and rock classifications
2.1 List the physical and mechanical properties of rocks.
2.2 Explain about compressive strength of rocks.
2.3 Explain about tensile strength of rocks.
2.4 Explain about shear strength of rocks.
2.5 Lists the strength indices of rocks.
2.6 Explain about point load strength index.
2.7 Explain about Protodyaknov strength index.
2.8 Explain porosity, permeability and anisotropy of rocks.
2.9 Define the term rock mass.
2.10 Classify rocks by Moh’s hardness scale.
2.11 Classify the rocks by RQD(Rock Quality Designation).
2.12 Classify the rocks by RMR (Rock Mass Rating).
2.13 List the factors considered for estimation of RMR and RQD.
3.0 Rock failures, behaviour and measurements
3.1 List the theories of rock failure.
3.2 List the confining pressures
3.3 State the effect of water ,time and temperature on failure of rocks
3.4 Explain the deformability of rock
3.5 Explain the concept of coal bumps and rock bursts.
3.6 List the causes of rock bursts and coal bumps.
3.7 List the preventive measures against coal bumps and rock bursts.
3.8 List the instruments used for measurement of stress
3.9 List the instruments used for measurement of strain
3.10 List and explain the instruments used for measurement of load.
4.0 Ground movements and subsidence
4.1 Differentiate the strata conditions before and after mining operations.
4.2 Explain the pressure arch theory
4.3 Explain Normal theory
4.4 Explain Dome theory
4.5 Explain Rzhijaz theory
4.6 Explain the strata pressure in and around bord and pillar and longwall workings.
4.7 Explain the term subsidence.
4.8 Define the different terminology used in subsidence.
4.9 Explain angle of draw positive and negative.
4.10 List the factors influencing angle of draw.
4.11 List the factors effecting subsidence.
4.12 List the effects and protective measures related to subsidence.
4.13 Explain the method of subsidence measurement.
5.0 Strata control
5.1 States the necessity of supports in mine.
5.2 List the various materials used for supporting in mines (timber, iron, steel, building stone,
brick and concrete).
5.3 Classify the types of supporting systems.
5.4 List the applicable conditions and write the size of props, chocks, cogs, stulls, bars, linked
bars.
5.5 States the principles of roof bolting.
5.6 Explain the system of roof bolting.
5.7 Lists the applicable conditions, merits and demerits of roof bolting.
5.8 Explain about the rigid and yield props.
329
5.9 Describe the constructional details of friction and hydraulic props.
5.10 Explain the method of setting props, bars and chocks at different situations.
5.11 Explain the method of fore-poling, roof stitching and state its applicability.
5.12 Explain the method of safari supporting, road way junction and state its applicability.
5.13 Explain the method of supporting after heavy roof collapse while clearing the debris,
withdrawal of supports by safety prop with drawer with sketch
COURSE CONTENTS:
1. Basics, Ground Forces and stress analysis

Definition of rock mechanics – scope of rock mechanics- application of Rock mechanics to mining –
field and ground forces - various forces acting on block – types of Stress – Relation between vertical
and lateral stresses – Stress field – hydrostatic and lithostatic stage of rock - induced stresses due to
mining – stress – field, principal stress, principal strain, plane stress and plane strain - stress
distribution around a mine workings .
2. Rock properties and rock classifications
Rock properties – physical and mechanical properties of rocks – compressive strength – tensile
strength - shear strength – strength indices of rocks – point load strength index - protodyakonov’s
strength index – porosity – permeability - anisotropy –RQD (Rock Quality Designation) - Mohr’s
Hardness scale. -RMR (Rock mass rating), factors consider for estimation of RMR – classificationof
rock based on RMR.
3. Theories of Rock failure,Rock Behaviour and Measuring Devices
Theories of failure of rocks - confining pressures - the effect of water ,time and temperature -
deformability of Rock - instruments used for measurement of stress measuring load, stress and
strain - bumps and rock bursts.
4. Ground movements and subsidence
Strata conditions before and after mining operations - pressure arch theory - normal theory -dome
theory - rzhijaz theory -strata pressure in and around bord and pillar and longwall workings –
subsidence – terminology - angle of draw-positive and negative - factors influencing angle of draw -
factors effecting subsidence - effects of subsidence - protective measures on surface and
underground to minimise damages due to subsidence - method of subsidence measurement.
5. Strata control
Supports – necessity – materials used – classification of supporting systems – applicability of various
types of supports – size, shape of supports – principle of roof bolting, stitching – merits and demerits
of bolting – rigid and yield props – constructional details of friction, hydraulic props – methods of
setting various supports at different situations – fore poling - safari supporting- junction supports –
clearance of heavy roof collapse – withdrawal of supports.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Rock Mechanics : Richard E. Goodman.
2. Introduction of Rock mechanics. : V.P.Varma
3. Rock mechanics and strata control : Peng
4. Long Wall Mining : Peng
5. Mining technology 1,2,3 :D.J.Deshmukh&R.T.DeshmukVol
6. S.M.E. Hand Books Vol. 1,2,3.
7. Soil mechanics : Punmiya&Kulkarni.
330

CO’s
Chapter Name Mapped
R U Ap An R U Ap An
Basics, Ground Forces
1 12 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO3
and stress analysis
Rock properties and
2 13 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO1,CO3
rock classifications
Rock failures,
3 behaviour and 15 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO3
measurements
Ground movements
4 15 14 3 3 - 8 1 1 - 1 CO3
and subsidence
5 Strata control 20 14 3 3 8 1 1 1 CO2
10 10 1 CO4
any chapters
TOTAL 75 80 15 15 8 42 5 5 1 5
331

Fifth semester :: MNG-505 Rock Mechanics and Strata Control
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a) Rock mechanics is applicable in Preparation of Coal seam into pillars

(b) Compressive strength is the strength property of a rock
(c) Lateral Stress means stresses acting ___________ (CO3)
(d) Rock is subjected to Hydrostatic pressure due to presence of ___________ (CO2)
2. Define the term Rock mechanics (CO1)
3. Classify rocks by Moh’s hardness scale (CO3)
4. List the physical properties of rocks (CO2)
5. List the theories of rock failure (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) Explain the relation between vertical and lateral stresses (CO1)
(OR)
(B) Explain stress concentration around shaft of different shapes (CO1)
7. (A) Explain about compressive strength of rocks (CO3)

(OR)
(B) Explain porosity and anisotropy of rocks (CO2)
8. (A)Explain the deformability of rock (CO2)

(OR)
(B) Explain the concept of coal bumps and rock bursts (CO3)
oOo
332

Fifth semester :: MNG-505 Rock Mechanics and Strata Control
PART- A 16 Marks
Instructions :
1.(a)The redistribution of pressure is explained by Mohr’s theory

(b) Wire mesh is used in Expansion shell type of roof bolting
(c) In normal theory fractures are developed at right angles to the ___________ (CO3)
(d) ___________ is the Primary force acting on a rock. (CO2)
2. List the causes of rock bursts and coal bumps (CO4)
3. List the factors influencing angle of draw (CO3)
4. Classify the types of supporting systems (CO4)
5. States the principles of roof bolting (CO3)
Instructions :
6. (A) List the preventive measures against coal bumps and rock bursts (CO1)
(OR)
(B) Explain the instruments used for measurement of load (CO4)
7. (A) Explain the pressure arch theory and Dome theory (CO3)
(OR)
(B) Explain the strata pressure in and around longwall workings (CO2)
8. (A) Explain the method of setting props, bars and chocks at different situations (CO2)
(OR)
(B) Describe the constructional details of hydraulic props (CO5)
oOo
333
C20-MNG-505
ROCK MECHANICS AND STRATA CONTROL
PART – A 10 X3 = 30
1. Define the term Rock mechanics. (CO1)
2. Lists the induced stresses due to mining operations. (CO2)
3. Lists the strength indices of rocks. (CO1)
4. Classify rocks by Mohr’s hardness scale. (CO3)
5. List the causes of rock bursts and coal bumps. (CO2)
6. List the instruments used for measurement of strain. (CO1)
7. List the factors effecting subsidence. (CO2)
8. Explain the term subsidence. (CO1)
9. Classify the types of supporting systems. (CO3)
10. States the principles of roof bolting. (CO1)
PART – B 5 X 8 = 40
11. A) Explain stress distribution around a mine workings. (CO3)
(OR)
B) Explain the relation between vertical and lateral stresses. (CO3)
12. A) Explain porosity, permeability and anisotropy of rocks. (CO2)

(OR)
B) Explain about compressive strength of rocks. (CO1)
13. A) Explain the concept of coal bumps and rock bursts. (CO4)
(OR)
B) State the effect of water,time and temperature on failure of rocks. (CO5)
14. A) Explain the pressure arch theory with neat sketch. (CO2)
(OR)
B) Explain the method of subsidence measurement. (CO4)
15. A) Explain the method of safari supporting and state its applicability. (CO4)
(OR)
B) Explain about the rigid and yield props. (CO5)
PART – C 1X 10 = 10
16. Explain the method of setting props and chocks at different situations. (CO4)
***
334
PRACTICAL TRAINING AND ASSESSMENT

Practical Training and

MNG-506 01 07 20 30
Assessment
TIME SCHEDULE
S.NO Code TOPICS Duration
 Practical training in Mines

 Training Report Preparation
Report Preparation: Title Page, Certificate, Two
1 MNG-506 Acknowledgements, Abstract, Contents(introduction of Months
Mine, Mine Layout, Organization Chart, List of Major
Equipments, methods of working: Skills Acquired;
Conclusions; Bibliography

1.Expose to real time working environment
Course 2. Enhance knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.
Objectives 3. Acquire the required skills of mining methods, supervising in the mines.
4. Instill the good qualities of integrity, responsibility and self-confidence.
CO1 Apply theory to practical work situations
Course CO2 Cultivate sense of responsibility and good work habits

Outcomes CO3 Exhibit the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
CO4 Write report in technical projects
335
PO-CO Mapping
CO1 2 1
CO2 2 3 1 1
CO3 2 2 2
CO4 3 1
OBJECTIVES:
After the completion of these topics the student should be able to
1. Study / collection of History of Mine and organisation chart
2. Study/collection of Mine geological information/bore hole data
3. Study /collection of Mine Plans and Sections
4. Study/collection of Surface features related to Mine
5. Study of methods of working- COAL Mining methods/ METAL Mining methods
6. Study of method of drilling and blasting
7. Study of Transportation system and layouts
8. Study of Ventilation systems and layouts
9. Study of Drainage system
10. Study of Pit top and Pit bottom layouts.
11. Study of man Power plan
12. Develop the Lamp room layout and Magazine Layout
13. Calculate production / capacities of various mining operations –development, depillaring, advancing,
retreating, machinery, pumps and man power
Note: Students will be sent for practical training to Coal/ Metal mines for one month at the end of I Year
and for one month at the end of II year i.e., during summer vacation to different Mining industries. The
training reports/records submitted by the students will be assessed in V semester for award of marks.
336
ROCK MECHANICS LABORATORY PRACTICE
Rock Mechanics
MNG-507 03 45 40 60
Laboratory Practice
TIME SCHEDULE
S. No. Major Components Periods Mapping CO’s
1 Sample collection and specimen preparation 10 CO1,CO2
Determination of Compressive, Tensile and Shear CO3
2 10
strengths
3 Determination of hardness of specimens 15 CO4
4 Determination of abrasive resistance of the rocks 10 CO4
Total 45

- To familiarise with the specimen preparation
Course Objectives - Analysis of compressive strengths, tensile strength and shear strength
- Familiarize determination of various strength indices
- Determination of hardness and abrasion
Course Outcomes CO1 Explain specimen preparation
CO2 Familiarize determination of various strength indices
CO3 Analysis of compressive strengths, tensile strength and shear strength
CO4 Operation equipment and Determination of hardness and abrasion
CO5 Determination of hardness and abrasion
337
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: MNG-507 Course Title: Rock Mechanics Laboratory No of Periods: 45

CO Periods
PO No Remarks
no in Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO2 CO2,CO3 10 22 2
PO3 - - - - 25% to 40% Level 2 Moderately
PO4 CO2,CO3 15 33 2 Addressed
PO5 CO2,CO3 20 45 3
PO6 - - - -
CO1 - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 - 2 - 2 3 - - - 2 1
CO3 - 2 - 2 3 - - - 2 1
CO4 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
LEARNING OUTCOMES

1.0 Sample collection and specimen preparation
1.1 Collection of cores of rock samples.
1.2 Preparation of Samples for various tests test as per ISRM standards.
2.0 Determination of Compressive, Tensile and Shear Strength

2.1 Determination of area of the specimen.
2.2 Measuring load and determination of compressive strength of Rock specimen
2.3 Measuring load and determination of Brazilian tensile strength of rock specimen
2.4 Measuring load and determination of Shear Strength for given Specimen
3.0 Determination of hardness of specimens

3.1 Determination of Point Load Strength Index of Rocks
3.2 Determination of Protodyknov’s Strength Index of Rocks
3.3 Determination of Schmidt Hammer Number of the rocks
4.0 Determination of abrasive resistance

4.1 Determine the abrasive resistance of the rocks using Los Angeles Abrasivity machine
338
LIFE SKILLS
No. of Marks
Course Code Course Title Total No. of Periods Marks for SA
Periods/Week for FA
MNG-508 Life Skills 3 45 40 60
S. No. Unit Title No of Periods COs Mapped
1 Attitude 4 CO1
2 Adaptability 4 CO1, CO2
3 Goal Setting 4 CO1, CO2, CO3
4 Motivation 4 CO1, CO2, CO3
5 Time Management 4 CO2
6 Critical thinking 4 CO3
7 Creativity 4 CO3
8 Problem Solving 5 CO3
9 Team Work 4 CO4
10 Leadership 4 CO4
11 Stress Management 4 CO4
Total Periods 45
To understand the importance of Life skills for acceptable, sustainable and ethical
behaviour in academic, professional and social settings
Course To exhibit language competence appropriate to acceptable social and professional
Objectives behaviour.
To demonstrate time management, stress management, team skills, problem solving ability
to manage oneself in academic, professional and social settings.
339
CO1 Demonstrates positive attitude and be able to adapt to people and events
CO2 Fixes personal and professional goals and manages time to meet targets
CO3 Exhibits critical and lateral thinking skills for problem solving.
CO4 Shows aptitude for working in teams in a stress free manner and sometimes/ very often/
mostly display leadership traits.
CO-PO Matrix

Number Percentage % (1,2,3)
PO1 Not directly applicable for Life Skills Course. However activities that use
PO2 content and situations from academic, professional and social settings
PO3 relevant to the Programme shall be exploited for triggering thought and
PO4 interaction in the Course.
PO5 CO1, CO2, 11 25% >60%: Level 3
CO3, CO 4
PO6 CO1, CO2, 27 45% 16 -59%: Level 2
CO3, CO4
PO7 CO1, CO2, 7 30% Up to 15%: Level 1
CO3, CO4
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes:
CO PO 1 PO 2 PO 3 PO 4 PO 5 PO 6 PO 7
CO 1   
CO 2   
CO3   
CO4   
340
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA:
Note: Every Activity based Question that focuses on COs and responses as exhibited through communication
has to be given marks for the following parameters
 Clarity of Thinking as Exhibited through Content
 Features of Etiquette
*Rubric Descriptors ‘Outstanding/ Very Good/ Good/ Satisfactory/ Poor’ levels of Competence
Level of Parameters of Assessment

Competence
Clarity of thinking as exhibited through content Features of etiquette
Thinking is extremely logical and suggested course of action

is feasibile
Exhibits courtesy to all most
Outstanding Shows creativity and uniqueness appropriately with
10
confidence
Exhibits expert use of expression (organizational devices and
discourse markers) that denote clarity in thought.
Thinking is clear and logical
Suggested course of action is feasible

Very Good Exhibits courtesy to all to a
8/9 Shows traces of creativity considerable level.
Exhibits good expression (organizational devices and

discourse markers) that denote clarity in thought.
Thinking is clear and logical most of the time. Lacks

Good Exhibits courtesy / politeness
creativity or out of the box thinking as expressed through
6/7 to an acceptable level.
content.
Satisfactory Thinking is logical; However expressing content is disjointed Has courtesy but often
4/5 and disorganized. fumbles with language.
Poor Thoughts as expressed through content are Fails to show courtesy to

3 or less than 3 incoherent.Language skills are very limited. others.
341
Blue Print for evaluation based on Course Outcomes for SA of each student:
Note: Marks are awarded for each student as per the Rubric descriptors.
S Questions based on Course Periods Max Poo Satisfactor Goo Very Outstandin
Outcomes Allocate Mark r y d Goo g
No d for s >3 4 /5 6/7 d 10
. practical 8/9
work
1 Short presentation on GOALS with

12 10
Timeline and Action Plan
2 State what you will do in the given

situation (Assesses adaptability
12 10
and critical thinking skills,
leadership, team skills )
3 In how many different and

creative way can you use _____ 8 10
(Object) other than its primary use
4 What solutions can you think of

13 10
for _____ problem.
Total 45 60
Note: The marks that are awarded for the student for 40 to be increased proportionally for 60.
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1. Attitude Matters :
1.1 Understand the importance of positive attitude and the consequences of negative attitude.
1.2 Demonstrate positive attitude in dealing with work-related issues and in personal life.
2. Adaptability….makes life easy :

2.1 Understand the significance of adaptability.
2.2 Show adaptability whenever needed, both at place of work and on personal front.
3. Goal Setting … life without a Goal is a rudderless boat!

3.2 Understand the SMART features of goal-setting.
3.3 State one’s short-term and long-term goals and spell out plans to achieve them.
342
4. Motivation … triggers success!
4.2 Comprehend the need for motivation in order to achieve success in life.
4.3 State how one is motivated in life.
4.4 Show the impact of motivation on one’s life
5. Time Management… the need of the Hour!

5.2 Understand the value of time management and prioritizing in life
5.3 Demonstrate the effect of time management on one’s professional work.
6. Critical Thinking … logic is the key!

6.1 Distinguish between facts and assumptions
6.2 Use logical thinking in dealing with professional matters
7. Creativity … the essential you!

7.2 Understand the importance of thinking out of the box in dealing with critical issues
7.3 Solve problems using creativity / imagination
8. Problem Solving … there is always a way out!

8.2 Understand the need for and importance of problem solving.
8.3 Use logic or creativity to solve a problem at workplace or home.
9. Team Work… together we are better!

9.1 Understand the need for team skills / team building
9.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
10. Leadership… the meaning of a leading!

10.1 Understand the need for team skills / team building
10.2 Demonstrate one’s skills as a team player
11. Stress Management… live life to the full!

11.1 Understand what causes stress and how to cope with stress at workplace.
11.2 Demonstrate how stress can be overcome in a healthy way.
343
CAD PRACTICE
MNG-509 CAD Practice 03 45 40 60
TIME SCHEDULE
S.No Major Topics No. of Mapped CO’s
Periods
1 Understand Various CAD commands 10 CO1
2 Practice Geometric Constructions Using CAD 10 CO4
3 Practice 3-D drawings of underground Mine pillar 10 CO5
,section of Mine Plan using CAD Software
4 Digitization (R2V Conversion) of Mine Maps Using 15 CO2
CAD Map
Total 45

- To familiarise with CAD commands,
- Hands on experience on geometric constructions,
Course Objectives
- Hands on experience to draw 3-D drawings
- Understand salient features of CAD Map
- Hands on experience on digitisations Mine Maps
CO1 Understand CAD commands
CO2 Hands on experience on geometric constructions
Course Outcomes CO3 Understand salient features of CAD Map
CO4 Hands on experience to draw 3-D drawings
CO5 Hands on experience on digitisations Mine plans
344
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: MNG-509 Course Title: CAD LAB No of Periods: 45

CO Periods
PO No Remarks
no in Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO2 - - - -
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3 20 45 3 Addressed
PO5 CO1,CO2,CO3 15 33 2
PO6 - - - -
CO1 1 - - 3 2 - - 1 1 1
CO2 1 - - 3 2 - - 1 1 1
CO3 1 - - 3 2 - - 1 1 1
CO4 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
OBJECTIVES:
1.0 Understand various CAD Commands
1.1 Study of drawing editor screen.
1.2 Practice the methods of selecting/entering commands to start new drawing accessing CAD
commands by selecting from menus, tool bars and entering Commands on command line.
1.3 Sets the limits of the drawing to get the needed working area.
1.4 Practice the ‘setting commands’ Grid, Snap, & Ortho Commands.
1.5 Practice ‘Draw commands’- point, line, pline, rectangle, circle, tangent, ellipse, arc, polygon
and spline.
1.6 Dimensions the given figures.
1.7 Practice ’modify commands’ – erase, copy, mirror, move, rotate, scale, stretch, trim, extend,
break, chamfer, fillet, explode, Pedit, Mledit.
1.8 Practice ‘construct commands’ – offset, array, Divide, measure.
1.9 Practice ‘edit commands’ – Undo, Redo, Oops, Copy Clip, Paste Clip, Del.
1.10 Practice ‘view commands’ – Redraw, Regen, Zoom, Pan.
1.11 Practices ‘Hatch commands’ – Bhatch, Hatch
1.12 Practices ‘insert commands’ – Block, Wblock, Insert, Minsert.
345
2.0 Practice Geometric Constructions Using CAD
2.1 Practices dividing a line into number of segments.
2.2 Practices drawing external/internal common tangents for circles of same/different radii.
2.3 Practices drawing external/internal common arcs for circles of same/different radii.
2.4 Practices construction of ellipse, parabola, hyperbola, cycloid, and helix.
3.0 Practices 3-D drawings of underground Mine pillar ,section of Mine Plan using CAD Software
3.1 Practice drawing of different 3D solid objects.
3.2 Practice 3D view of given building plan
3.3 Draw the 3D view of the underground mine pillar
3.4 Draw the 3D view of given section of Mine plan
4.0 Digitization (R2V Conversion) of Mine Plans using CAD Map 3D
4.1 Download the free educational version of CAD Map 3D from AUTODESK using respective
institute AICTE Id (https://academic.autodesk.com/?nd=landing)
4.2 Know the basic commands of CAD Map 3D for digitization of a given map
4.3 Carryout the digitization of given Mine Map by creating various Layers
a) Development plan Layer
b) Depillaring plan Layer
c) Ventilation plan Layer
d) Mine Survey Plan Layer
e) Mine Surface Plan Layer
4.4 Entering the relevant information of the above digitized layers
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Understand various CAD Commands-Sets the limits of the drawing- Draw commands- Modify
commands- Edit commands- View commands- Hatch commands
2. Practice Geometric Constructions Using CAD-Draws simple geometrical shapes like circles, tangents
3. Practices3-D drawings of underground Mine pillar ,section of Mine Plan using CAD Software-3D
Commands – Simple 3D elements- 3D view of underground mine pillar – 3D view of given section of
mine plan
4. Digitization (R2V Conversion) of Mine Plans using CAD Map 3D- Various options of AutoCAD Map
3D- Digitization options- Digitization in various Layers-Underground Development Plan- Depillaring
Plan – Ventilation Plan –Under ground Survey Plan – Surface Survey Plan- entering relevant
information
346
TOTAL STATION SURVEY PRACTICE
MNG-510 Total Station Survey 03 45 40 60

Practice
TIME SCHEDULE
S.N No. of Mapped CO’s
Major Topics
o Periods
Understand various menu options of total CO1
1 5
station
2 Field exercises using total station -I 10 CO2,CO4
3 Field exercises using total station -II 15 CO5
Transferring the field observation into CO3,CO5

4 5
Auto CAD
5 Surveying with GPS 10 CO5
Total 45

- To familiarise with various menu options and functional features of Total
station
- Hands on experience of traversing of given area using total station
Course Objectives - Identify the surveying station of known location
- Stakeout point and stake out lines using total station
- Transformation of filed data from total station into CAD and vice versa
- Hands on experience of identifying the co-ordinates of given location
using GPS
Course Outcomes CO1 Explain Various parts of Total station
CO2 Identifying the co-ordinates of given location using GPS
CO3 Transferring the field observation into CAD
CO4 Traversing of given area using total station
CO5 Determination of length, width and area of given area
347
PO-CO Mapping
Course Code: MNG-510 Course Title: TOTAL STATION SURVEY PRACTICE No of Periods: 45
CO Periods
PO No Remarks
no in Col 1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO2 - - - -
PO4 CO1,CO2,CO3 20 45 3 Addressed
PO5 CO1,CO2,CO3 15 33 2
PO6 - - - -
CO1 1 - - 3 2 - - 1 1 1
CO2 1 - - 3 2 - - 1 1 1
CO3 1 - - 3 2 - - 1 1 1
CO4 - - - - - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - - - - - - -
OBJECTIVES:
1.0 Understand Various Menu Options of Total Station
1.1 Familiarize various menu options of total station
1.2 Creation of new job
1.3 Open an existing job
1.4 Key In survey points
1.5 Options present under survey
1.6 Options present under COGO
1.7 Copy the surveying points from one job to another job
1.8 Linking of one survey job to another survey job
1.9 Options to take readings with Prism and without prism
2.0 Field Exercises using total station –I
2.1 Centering of total station over a given surveying station using optical plummet
2.2 Leveling of total station
2.3 Station setup given one known co-ordinate and one angle
2.4 Station setup using two known co-ordinates
2.5 Setting out orientation of total station by using resection method
2.6 Orientation of total station to true north
2.7 To measure distance between two given points and angle using total station
2.8 To measure multiple sets (rounds) of observations with total station
2.9 To carry out the surveying of given area by radiation method
348
2.10 To perform a station setup on a known point by making observation to one or more back
sight points
2.11 To establish the position of an occupied point by total station relative to a baseline or
boundary line
2.12 Calculation of traverse area , perimeter, and balancing of errors using total station
3.0 Field Exercises using total station –II
3.1 Stake out of a given surveying point
3.2 To carryout stakeout of a line
3.3 Carryout widening of given road way using stakeout line
3.4 To carryout stakeout of an arc connecting two roadways for a given radius and angle
3.5 Transferring the B.M located at an in accessible location into surveying area
3.6 Find out the height of remote object using Remote elevation method
3.7 Marking the surveying point of a given building plan using total station
4.0 Transferring the field observation into CAD
4.1 To Transfer the surveying points of a job into USB drive
4.2 To transfer the surveying points of job into the system
4.3 Conversion of total station job file to CAD file format
4.4 Conversion of job file into .csv file
4.5 Importing the .csv file surveying points into total station
4.6 Calculation of area and volume of a given job using CAD
4.7 Earth work calculation to fill or cut the profile a given area based on the pre-defined datum.
5.0 Global positioning system
5.1 Identifies the parts and the functions of Global Positioning System.
5.2 Determine the Coordinates of various points on the ground using GPS
5.3 Carryout of surveying to locate various geo special co-ordinates using DGPS
5.3 Link the G.P.S data with Total Station.
5.4 Link the GPS data with GIS software.
COURSE CONTENTS:
1. Understand Various Menu Options of Total Station – Various menu options of total station –
Creating new survey job – Open an existing survey job – Options for station setup- Options to
carryout surveying- Options to take readings – Options for survey calculations – Options to draw the
map – Options to transfer the survey job information to USB, system. Menu option to take reading
without prism (if present with the instrument)- With prism.
2. Field Exercises using total station –I – Station setup – by angle and survey station- by two stations –
by two or more points (Resection method) – Single station setup and carry out surveying ( radiation
method), - Carry out traverse. Measurement of –angle between the stations –distance between the
two given survey stations- Balancing the errors of the traverse.
3. Field Exercises using total station –II- Stake out – point, Line, stake out an arc with the given angle
and radius – Transferring the bench present in an in accessible location to survey area – Remote
object height by remote elevation method- Marking the given surface plan location on the ground.
4. Transferring the field observation into CAD- Method of transferring the filed observation to – USB,
into system. Conversion survey job into csv file and the file format required by Auto CAD- Loading
the AutoCAD drawing points into total station to mark them in the field. Calculation of area and
perimeter of the given surveyed area using total station. Earth work calculations using AutoCAD
based on the given datum
5. Surveying with GPS - Various features of GPS and DGPS, Procedure to capture geo-spacial co-
ordinates using GPS, DGPS – Method to transfer the GPS info into Total station and GIS software.
349
PROJECT WORK
MNG-511 PROJECT WORK 02 38 20 30
OBJECTIVES:
1. Identify different works to be carried out in the project.
2. Collect data relevant to the project.
3. Arrive at efficient method from the available choices based on preliminary investigation.
4. Design the required elements of the project as per standard practices.
5. Prepare working drawing for the project by CAD.
6. Prepare schedule of time and sequence of operations by PERT and CPM.
7. Prepare charts or models for each project.
8. Prepare project report
9. Prepare the production mathematical calculation /capacities of various operation(output
ventilation, machinery and man power) in mines during period of project
10. Prepare the layout /Drawing of various operations by CAD
COURSE CONTENTS:
Identification of the Project- Collection of data- Organisation of the data- Design of Project elements
- Preparation of drawings- Schedules and sequence of operations- Preparation of charts and models-
Preparation of report-calculation /capacities of various operation-Drawing of various operations by
CAD-time and sequence of operations by PERT and CPM
Note :
Students shall be divided into groups of five and each group shall be assigned a problem that calls for
application of the knowledge. Project work will be allotted by the concerned Head of Section and
assign a staff member as guide at the beginning of V semester. The students are exposed to the U/G
workings or Industries for collecting relevant data from respective areas during the entire V
semester, after the institutional working hours or during holidays – second Saturdays / Sundays/
Winter/ Pongal holidays and prepare project report under the supervision of guide. Project report
will be assessed at the end of V Semester for final examination.
Project may be selected from among the following suggested topics
Underground mining (coal)
a) Bord and pillar mining method
b) Longwall mining method.
c) Blasting gallery method.
Opencast mining
a) Pillars extracting by open cast method(coal)
b) Mechanized opencast mining.
c) In Pit crushing technology
d) Surface mining technology
e) Blasting technology
Metal Mining
a) Stoping methods
b) Mechanized stoping methods
Other Methods
Any other method identified and suggested by the HOD
350
MNG-601 INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
Upon
Assessment Max
no Marks
of
12 weeks 1.The faculty 120

1 concerned and Learning outcomes as given in the
2. Training Mentor of following scheme of assessment
20-22 weeks the industry 120
2
1.The faculty member 2. Demonstration of any one of

30
3.Final
outcomes, other than S.No. 2
summative 23 week 2.HoD concerned and 2.Training Report 20
TOTAL 300
INDUSTRIALTRAINING
Marks for
Marks for Summative
Course Code Course Title Duration Formative
Assessment
Assessment
MNG-601 Industrial Training 24 weeks 240 60
Time schedule
S.No Code TOPICS Duration
 Practical training in Mines

 Training Report Preparation
Report Preparation: Title Page, Certificate, Acknowledgements, Abstract. Six
Months
Contents: analysis organisational setup of a mine, Geology of the mine ,
mine transportation, method of working, mine equipment /machinery,
1 MNG-
ventilation system/lighting , drilling and blasting, safety aspects, Charts,
601
Diagrams, Plans etc., pertaining to organization, Literature.
351
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
1. Expose to real time working environment

Course 2. Enhance knowledge and skills already learnt in the institution.
Objectives 3. Acquire new skills of man and material supervising safety aspects and working in mines.
4. Develop qualities like team & work culture, integrity, responsibility and self-confidence.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 MNG601.1 Apply theory to practical work situations

COURSE OUT
COMES CO2 MNG601.2 Cultivate sense of responsibility and good work habits
CO3 MNG601.3 Exhibit the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
CO4 MNG601.4 Write report in technical projects
PO-CO Mapping
CO1 2 2 1 3 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2
Note : The gaps in CO-PO mapping will be met by one or more appropriate activities from the following:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest lectures (v) Group discussions
(vi) Quiz (vii) Industrial visits (viii) Tech fests (ix) Mini project works (x) Library visits etc
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
The student shall be able to display the following skill sets
1) Technical Skills(Drilling/Blasting/Method of working/Maintenance etc)

2) PreparingSurveying plans, drawings and analysing method of working
3) Recognize and Practice safety Measures
4) Handling Tools/Instruments/Drilling andBlasting (ore/rock/coal)/Machines
5) Implementation of mine legislation in mines
6) Planning, Organizing and safety Skills
352
Scheme of Internal Assessment and Summative Evaluation for Industrial Training
Upon Max
Assessment no By Based on
completion of Marks
1 12 weeks 1.The faculty 120

concerned and Learning outcomes as given in the
following scheme of assessment
2. Training Mentor
2 20-22 weeks of the industry 120
1.The faculty 1.Demonstration of any one of the

member skills listed in learning outcomes
3.Final concerned, ,other than S.No. 2 30
summative 23 week
Evaluation 2.HoD concerned 2.Training Report 20
and 3.An external
TOTAL 300
Weightage of marks for Assessment of Skill sets during first and second assessment.
Skill Set Max Marks
Sl.No SKILL SET Allotted
For each
parameter
1 Technical Skills (Drilling/Blasting/Method of working/Maintenance etc) 20
2 Prepare different plans, drawings and analysing Specifications 20
3 Recognize and Practice safety Measures 15
4 Handling Tools/Instruments/ Drilling and Blasting 25
(ore/rock/coal)/machines
5 Implementation of mine legislation in mines 20
6 Planning, Organizing and safety Skills 20
Total 120
353
During assessment the performance of the students shall be assessed in those skills in which the
student has been trained and be awarded the marks as per the weightage assigned as above. In case the
student has undergone training in a few skill sets then the total marks obtained shall be raised to 120 marks
for the given assessment i.e. either assessment 1 or 2. However the performance of the student shall be
assessed at the most skill sets listed above but not less than three skill sets.
Illustration
If the student has undergone training in only 4 skill sets (namely serial number 1, 2, 5,6 of above skill
sets) and marks awarded during assessment is 50 out of 80 marks, then the marks of 50 shall be enhanced to
120 proportionately as (50/80)*120=75.
GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
1. Duration of the training: 6 months.

2. Eligibility: The As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students may be trained in the fields Underground coal mines/Underground
metal mines/Granite quarry/Cement quarry/ Road metal quarry/Open cast mines etc.
4. The candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance during Industrial Training.
5. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student shall
reappear for 6 months industrial training.
6. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the Mentor from of the industry,
where the student is undergoing training and the faculty in charge (Guide) from the concerned
section in the institution.
7. The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessments at industry
(first and second assessment) and final summative assessment at institution level put together
i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks.
8. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level, the
student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board
examination.
9. Final Summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including Head of the
section of respective branch/ discipline, External examiner and Faculty members who assessed
the students during Industrial Training as members.
354
Guidelines and responsibilities of the faculty members who are assessing the students’performance during
Industrial Training:
1. Every Teacher (Including HoD, if not holding any FAC) shall be assigned a batch of students of 10 to
15 for Industrial Training irrespective of students’ placements for training
2. Shall guide the students in all aspects regarding training.
3. Shall create awareness regarding safety measures to be followed in the industry during the training
period, and shall check it scrupulously.
4. Shall check the logbook of the students during the time of their visit for the assessment.
5. Shall monitor progress at regular intervals and make appropriate suggestions for improvement.
6. Shall visit the industry and make first and second assessments as per stipulated schedules.
7. Shall assess the skill sets acquired by the students during their assessment.
8. Shall award the marks for each skill set as per the marks allotted for that skill set during 1 st and 2nd
assessments
9. Shall voluntarily supplement students learning through appropriate materials like photographs,
articles, videos etc.
10. Shall act as co-examiner along with other examiners in the final assessment at institution.
11. Shall act as liaison between the student and mentor.
12. Shall maintain a diary indicating his observation with respect to the progress of students learning in
all three domains (Cognitive, Psychomotor and Affective).
Guidelines to the Training Mentor in the Industry:
1. Shall train the students in all the skill sets as far as possible.
2. Shallassess and award the marks in both the assessments along with the faculty member .
3. Shall check and approve the log books of the students.
4. Shall approve the attendance of each student at the end of the training period.
Shall report to the guide about student’s progress, personality development or any misbehavior as
the case may be
355
Format for Internal assessment for INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
DEPARTMENT OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION

GOVERNMENT POLYTECHNIC:
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING ASSESSMENT
NAME OF THE STUDENT PIN
Sl.No Learning Outcome Max Marks Marks

awarded
1 Technical Skills(Drilling/Blasting/Method of 20
working/Maintenance etc).
2 Prepare different plans, drawings and analysing 20

Specifications
3 Recognize and Practice safety Measures. 15
4 Handling Tools/Instruments/ Drilling and Blasting 25

(ore/rock/coal)/machines
5 Implementation of mine legislation in mines. 20
6 Planning, Organizing and safety Skills 20
Total 120
(Marks in words: )
Signature of the Training In-charge(Mentor) Signature of the faculty concerned(Guide)
Name: Name
Designation Designation
***
356

C 20 Dmnge 06-08-21 - 556.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C 20 Dmnge 06-08-21 - 556.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

C 20 Dmnge 06-08-21 - 556.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

1 DURATION AND PATTERN OF THE COURSES:

2 PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION INTO THE DIPLOMA COURSES:

4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

6 ELIGIBILITY (ATTENDANCE TO APPEAR FOR THE END EXAMINATION):

Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective Principal/ Regional

b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

9 INTERNAL ASSESSMENT SCHEME

(i) Drawing Courses:

Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)

Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks

Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

1 12 weeks 1.The faculty Learning outcomes as given in the 120

1.The faculty member 1.Demonstration of any one of

10 MINIMUM PASS MARKS

a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she

For IVC& ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester

A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment (Seminar/Viva-voce)

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she

C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

13. STUDENTS PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

b) For drawing Courses:

II. Summative assessment (End examination)

a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’.

I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on Drawing)

16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA Programmes:

18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

B) FOR RE-COUNTING(RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT

Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued answer

20. MAL PRACTICE CASES:

21. DISCREPANCIES/ PLEAS:

22. ISSUE OF DUPLICATE DIPLOMA

23. ISSUE OF MIGRATION CERTIFICATE AND TRANSCRIPTS:

24. The following specific changes are discussed and incorporated:

M1 To provide a competitive learning environment, through a need based curriculum designed

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

Apply appropriate technologies and tools with an understanding of the limitations

MNG- Mining Geology

MNG- Practical Training

MNG- Rock Mechanics

TOTAL 27 15 630 300 700 1000

12 weeks 1.The faculty 120